Sie sind auf Seite 1von 192

Molded-Case

Circuit-Breakers (MCCB)

4/2 Introduction

SENTRON VL circuit-breakers up to
1600 A
4/4 General data
4/22 3-pole
4/28 4-pole
4/34 Options
4/36 Accessories/spare parts
4/60 Project planning aids

Circuit-breakers up to 2500 A
4/130 General data
4/142 3-pole, fixed-mounted design
4/150 3-pole, plug-in/
withdrawable design
4/156 4-pole, fixed-mounted design
4/164 4-pole, plug-in/
withdrawable design
4/170 General use switch,
3-pole, fixed-mounted design
4/171 Options
4/173 Accessories/spare parts
4/190 Project planning aids

Siemens LV 30 2004
Molded-Case Circuit-Breakers (MCCB)

Introduction

Overview

Type VL160X VL160 VL250 VL400 VL630 VL800

4 SENTRON VL molded-case circuit-breakers up to 1600 A

Rated current In A 16 ... 160 A 25 ... 160 A 80 ... 250 A 126 ... 400 A 252 ... 630 A 320 ... 800 A
at 50 C ambient temperature
Number of poles 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Rated operating voltage Ue
AC 50/60 Hz V 690 690 690 690 690 690
DC (only with thermal- V 500 500 600 750 600 750 600 750 600 750
magnetic trip unit)
Overcurrent trip units
Thermal-magnetic
Electronic ETU/LCD
Replaceable
PROFIBUS module COM10
Dimensions
D A mm 105 140 105 140 105 140 139 184 190 254 190 254
A C B mm 158 158 175 175 175 175 280 280 280 280 407 407
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 5 9

C mm 82 82 82 82 82 82 102 102 102 102 115 115


D mm 107 107 107 107 107 107 139 139 139 139 152 152
B

Switching capacity Icu/Ics


r.m.s. value, to IEC 60947-2
Standard switching capacity N
up to AC 240 V kA 65/65 65/65 65/65 65/65 65/65 65/65
up to AC 415 V kA 40/40 40/40 40/40 45/45 45/45 50/50
up to AC 690 V kA 8/4 12/6 12/6 15/8 20/10 20/10
up to DC 250 V kA 30 30 30 30 30
up to DC 600 V kA
up to DC 750 V kA
High switching capacity H
up to AC 240 V kA 100/75 100/75 100/75 100/75 100/75 100/75
up to AC 415 V kA 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
up to AC 690 V kA 12/6 12/6 12/6 15/8 30/15 30/15
up to DC 250 V kA 30 30 30 30 30
up to DC 600 V kA 30
up to DC 750 V kA
Very high switching capacity L
up to AC 240 V kA 150/150 200/150 200/150 200/150 200/150
up to AC 415 V kA 100/75 100/75 100/75 100/75 100/75
up to AC 690 V kA 12/6 12/6 15/8 35/17 35/17
up to DC 250 V kA 30 30 30 30
up to DC 600 V kA 30 30 30 30
up to DC 750 V kA 30 30 30 30
available
not available

4/2 Siemens LV 30 2004


Molded-Case Circuit-Breakers (MCCB)

Introduction

VL1250 VL1600 3VF2 3VF3 3VF4 3VF5 3VF6 3VF7 3VF8


SENTRON VL molded-case
circuit-breakers up to 1600 A
Molded-case circuit-breakers up to 2500 A
4
400 ... 1250 A 640 ... 1600 A 16 ... 125 160, 205, 225 220/250 315/400 500/630/800 800/1250 1600/2000, 2500

3 4 3 4 3 and 4 3 and 4 3 and 4 3 and 4 3 and 4 3 and 4 3 and 4

690 690 up to 415 690 690 690 690 690 690


750 750 750 750

229 305 229 305 76/102 105/140 105/140 140/183 210/280 210/280 394/508
407 407 537 537 124 153 254 258 273 406 407
153 153 153 153 68 81 97 97 97 140 229
209 209 209 209 73 105 126 126 141 183 305

65/35 65/35 65/33 85/851) 85/85 85/85 85/852) 85/85


50/25 50/25 18/9 40/401) 40/40 45/45 45/452) 50/50
20/10 20/10 12/6 14/7 20/10 20/102) 20/10
20/10 20 20 20
20/10 20 20 20
20/10 20 20 20

75/50 100/50 100/100 100/100 100/100 100/100 100/100 135/100


70/35 70/35 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/50 70/50
30/15 30/15 14/7 18/9 25/13 25/13 25/13 25/13
20/10 20 20 20
20/10 20 20 20
20/10 20 20 20

200/100 200/100 200/150 200/150 200/150 200/150 200/100 200/100


100/50 100/50 100/75 100/75 100/75 100/75 100/50 100/50
35/17 35/17 18/9 22/11 35/18 35/18 35/18 35/18
20/10 20 20 20
20/10 20 20 20
20/10 20 20 20
1) or up to AC 240 V: 40/40 kA and up to AC 415 V: 25/25 kA.
2) or at In = 800 A; up to AC 240 V: 65/33 kA; up to AC 415 V: 50/25 kA;
up to 690 V: 20/10 kA.

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/3


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data

Overview
.

4
.

$ Withdrawable/plug-in base
% Side walls for withdrawable version
& Phase barriers
( Flared front busbar connecting bars
) Straight connecting bars
* Multiple supply terminal for Al/Cu
+ Box terminal for Cu
, Extended terminal cover
- Standard terminal cover
. Masking frame/cover frame for door cut-out
/ Motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store
0 Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
1 Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
2 SENTRON VL circuit-breaker
3 Internal accessories
4 Electronic overcurrent trip unit
5 Thermal/magnetic overcurrent trip unit
6 RCD module
7 Rear terminals flat and round
8 COM10 communication module to the PROFIBUS DP
9 Manual tester for electronic trip unit

4/4 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data

,
- & %

(
)
+
*
4
$
9
2

8
4
5
6

( 7
)

+
&
,

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/5


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data

Benefits Operating conditions


The SENTRON VL circuit-breakers are climate-proof.
The compact design of the SENTRON VL circuit-breakers cou-
They are intended for use in enclosed areas where no severe op-
pled with excellent characteristics fulfills the high demands of
erating conditions (e.g. dust, corrosive vapors, damaging
today's electrical distribution systems.
gases) are present.
These circuit-breakers offer a broad product range, improved
technology, space savings and easy operation. When installed in dusty and damp areas, suitable enclosures
must be provided.
They are available both in thermal/magnetic (16 A to 630 A)
and in electronic versions (63 A to 1600 A). Utilization category
All SENTRON VL circuit-breakers satisfy utilization category A.
Area of application
The different versions of SENTRON VL circuit-breakers are suit-
able for the following applications:

4 Incoming and outgoing circuit-breakers in distribution systems


Switching and protection devices for motors, transformers and
capacitors
Main control switches and EMERGENCY-STOP switches in
conjunction with lockable rotary operating mechanism and ter-
minal covers.
The SENTRON VL circuit-breakers are available in the following
versions:
1. For system protection (in 3 and 4-pole versions)
The overload and short-circuit releases are designed for the pro-
tection of cables, leads and non-motor loads.
2. For motor protection (in 3-pole versions)
The overload and short-circuit releases are designed for opti-
mized protection and direct starting of three-phase squirrel-cage
motors. The circuit-breakers for motor protection are susceptible
to phase failure and feature an adjustable trip class. The over-
current trip units operate with a microprocessor.
3. For starter combinations (in 3-pole versions)
These circuit-breakers are used both for short-circuit protection
as well as for isolating functions, which may be required in
starter combinations consisting of circuit-breakers, overload re- Degree of protection
lays and motor contactors. These circuit-breakers exclusively Circuit-breaker IP20
feature adjustable, instantaneous short-circuit releases.
Masking frame IP40
4. As non-automatic circuit-breakers (in 3- and 4-pole versions) Terminal covers IP30
These circuit-breakers can be used as feeder circuit-breakers, With front rotary operating mechanism IP40
main control switches or disconnecting switches without over-
With door-coupling rotary mechanism IP65
load protection. They incorporate an integrated short-circuit self-
protection system, eliminating the need for back-up fuses. With motorized operating mechanism IP30
With motorized operating mechanism and IP40
Standards and specifications masking frame for the door cut-out
SENTRON VL circuit-breakers comply with: Plug-in base/withdrawable version IP20

IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1, RCD module


DIN VDE 0660, Part 100, The RCD module is designed for retrofitting to the switch. It can
IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2, also be retrofitted by the customer.
DIN VDE 0660, Part 101.
Isolating features to IEC 60947-3, EN 60947-3. The combination of SENTRON VL circuit-breaker and RCD
module can be fed from the top or bottom.
Please contact Siemens for details of other standards.
All SENTRON VL circuit-breakers with RCD modules are avail-
The overcurrent trip units of the circuit-breakers for motor protec- able with auxiliary switches, alarm switches, undervoltage and
tion also fulfill IEC 60947-4-1, DIN VDE 0660, Part 102. shunt releases.
Main control switches to EN 60204 or DIN VDE 0113 (see Area Protection of plant and equipment against overload or damage
of application). EMERGENCY-STOP switches to EN 60204 or by ground faults (ground fault protection).
DIN VDE 0113 (see Area of application).
The RCD module trips the circuit-breaker through vectorial sum-
mation current formation for all phase currents if the vectorial
sum of the currents in the poles (= the ground fault current) ex-
ceeds the pre-set response and delay time values. AC currents
and pulsating DC currents are measured (CBR, design A to
EN 60947-2).

4/6 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data
Switching of DC currents For voltages above 250 V, a series connection of 2 or 3 current
paths is required.
The VL160X to VL630 circuit-breakers (for system protection with
TM, for starter combinations, non-automatic circuit-breakers) As the current has to flow through all of the current paths, the fol-
can also be used for DC switching and protection applications. lowing connections are recommended in order to satisfy the
thermal tripping characteristics.
The VL160 to VL1600 circuit-breakers with electronic trip units
(ETU) are not suitable for DC applications. With DC applications, the response values of the instantaneous
short-circuit releases ("I" trip units) are increased by 30 to 40 %.
However, the maximum permitted DC voltage for each current
path needs to be taken into account for DC switching applica-
tions.

Recommended connection Maximum permitted DC voltage Ue Remarks


For 3 and 4-pole circuit-breakers
L L DC 250 V 2-pole switching (ungrounded system)

NSE0_00741
M
If there is no possibility of a ground fault, or if every ground fault is rectified
immediately (ground-fault monitoring), then the maximum permitted DC volt-
age is 600 V.
4
L L DC 500 V 2-pole switching (grounded system)
The grounded pole is always assigned to the individual current path, so that
there are always 2 current paths in series in the event of a ground fault.
NSE0_00742
M

L L DC 600 V 1-pole switching (grounded system)


3 current paths in series.
The grounded pole is assigned to the unconnected current path.
M
NSE0_00743

L L DC 750 V 1-pole switching (grounded system)


4 current paths in series.
The grounded pole is assigned to the unconnected current path.
NSE0_00744
M

Design
Rated current range from 16 A to 1600 A
Different switching capacity for each frame size
N Standard (40 to 50 kA)
H High (70 kA)
L Very high (100 kA)
No derating or loss of performance up to 50 C
Electronic overcurrent trip units from size 160 A (VL160), partic-
ularly for time-based discrimination and ground-fault protec-
tion
2 families of internal accessories
Full range of external accessories e.g. terminals for aluminum
cable.
All circuit-breakers are supplied with integrated overcurrent trip
units. The SENTRON VL160X to VL1600 circuit-breakers are avail-
able with busbar connection pieces or box terminals (up to
400 A; see Page 4/10). Auxiliary switches/alarm switches or aux-
iliary releases can be easily adapted by the customer, or they
are also available ready installed if required.
The switching capacity is shown on the front of every circuit-
breaker.
Standard switching capacity:
Icu = 40 to 50 kA at AC 50/60 Hz 380/415 V
High switching capacity:
Icu = 70 kA at AC 50/60 Hz 380/415 V
Very high switching capacity:
Icu = 100 kA at AC 50/60 Hz 380/415 V

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/7


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data
Connection SENTRON VL800 to VL1600 circuit-breakers
The SENTRON VL160X to VL160 circuit-breakers are equipped The arrangement of the current paths and switching mecha-
with incoming and outgoing terminals which are suitable for nisms corresponds with those of the SENTRON VL160X to
stranded conductors, flexible copper rails and conductors with VL630 circuit-breakers.
end sleeves. Different supply terminals are available for VL630
to VL1600 (sizes 630 A to 1600 A). The SENTRON VL800 to VL1600 circuit-breakers are only avail-
able with electronic trip units.
Appropriate accessories for screw connection to fixed and flex-
ible copper bars or cables are available for SENTRON VL160X As is the case for all versions of the SENTRON VL circuit-break-
to VL1600 circuit-breakers. ers with electronic trip units, the current transformers are in the
same enclosure as the trip units. They send a signal which is
SENTRON VL160X to VL1600 circuit-breakers can be equipped proportional to the load current to the electronic overcurrent trip-
with connecting bars. These are intended for connection of stan- ping unit.
dard busbars and can be used for front or rear connection. The
SENTRON VL1600 circuit-breaker is supplied with front con- All SENTRON VL circuit-breakers with electronic trip units mea-
necting bars. sure the actual r.m.s. current. This type of measurement is the

4 The incoming and outgoing connections for the circuit-breaker


can be freely selected. The electrical specifications remain the
most accurate method. Currents in today's electrical distribution
systems with many harmonics are evaluated reliably.

same. Overcurrent trip unit systems


The infeed for circuit-breakers with RCD modules can be con- 1. Overcurrent trip unit system of the SENTRON VL160X to
nected above or below. VL630 circuit-breakers - thermal-magnetic
Bare conductors at the top connections must be insulated in the The overcurrent and short-circuit releases function with bimetal-
arc quenching space that is necessary above the arcing cham- lic and magnetic trip units. They are available in fixed set or ad-
bers. Phase barriers or terminal covers can be used for this pur- justable versions.
pose.
The four-pole circuit-breakers for system protection can be
For the SENTRON VL160X to VL1600 circuit-breakers, the con- equipped with overcurrent trip units for all four poles or without
nections for the internal accessories (auxiliary releases, auxiliary an overcurrent trip unit for the fourth pole (N). From 100 A and
switches and alarm switches) are supplied with terminal screws. higher, the trip units for the fourth pole (N) are set to 60 % of the
The auxiliary releases (shunt releases and undervoltage re- current for the 3 main current paths, so that safe protection for
leases), auxiliary switches and alarm switches for all neutral conductors with a reduced cross-section is ensured.
SENTRON VL circuit-breakers can be connected easily and The circuit-breakers for starter combination applications are
directly. usually combined with a motor contactor and a suitable overload
The motorized operating mechanisms with spring energy stores relay.
are always equipped with terminals. The leading auxiliary The non-automatic circuit-breakers have an integrated short-
switches for the rotary operating mechanisms are always sup- circuit self-protection system eliminating the need for back-up
plied with connecting leads. fuses. These circuit-breakers have no overload protection. Four-
SENTRON VL160X circuit-breakers pole circuit-breakers do not have a short-circuit release for the
fourth pole (N).
The main components of the SENTRON VL160X circuit-breakers
are the three conducting paths with the incoming and outgoing 2. Overcurrent trip unit system for SENTRON VL160 to VL1600
terminals. The fixed and moving contacts are designed in such circuit-breakers, electronic, ETU
a way that the contacts are magnetically repelled if there is a The electronic overcurrent trip unit system consists of:
short-circuit. In conjunction with the arcing chambers, a dy- 3 current transformers
namic impedance is created that causes current limiting due to
a reduction in the damaging effects of I2t and Ip energy that Evaluation electronics with microprocessor
arises during short-circuits. Tripping solenoid.
The trip unit is preassembled and equipped with fixed or adjust- For SENTRON VL160 and VL250, the tripping solenoid is in-
able overload releases as well as with fixed short-circuit releases stalled in the left accessory compartment.
for each pole.
An auxiliary power supply is not necessary for the release.
The circuit-breaker is trip-free.
A minimum load current of approx. 20 % of the corresponding
To the right and left of the operating mechanism, the double-in- rated current In of the circuit-breaker is required to activate the
sulated accessory compartments are situated for the auxiliary microprocessor trip units.
releases and auxiliary switches.
At the output of the electronic overcurrent trip unit module there
SENTRON VL160 to VL630 circuit-breakers is a tripping solenoid which trips in the case of overload or short-
circuit.
The arrangement of the current path, main contact and switch-
ing mechanism corresponds to that of the SENTRON VL160X Abbreviations (functions)
circuit-breakers. L = Long Time Delay = Overload protection
The trip units for the SENTRON VL160 to VL630 have the follow-
ing features: S = Short Time Delay = Short-circuit protection
(short-time delayed)
The trip units are available in thermal-magnetic and electronic I = Instantaneous = Short-circuit protection
versions. They can be replaced by the customer using a spe- (instantaneous)
cial tool. G = Ground Fault = Ground-fault protection
The thermal-magnetic trip units have adjustable overload and
L, S, I, G designations in accordance with IEC 60947
short-circuit releases.

4/8 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data
VL160X to VL1600 overcurrent trip units

with LCD display (LCD ETU)


Communication-capable

Technical specifications
Generator protection

Thermal-magnetic

Electronic trip unit


System protection

Motor protection

Thermal image

trip unit (ETU)


Phase failure

trip unit (TM)

Electronic

see Page
Function

Trip unit
Setting options
L S (i) S (t) I G
1) LI 1 10 TM 1) 4/13
1) LI 0,8-1 10 TM 1) 4/13
1) LI 0,8-1 5-10 TM 1) 4/13

LI
LI
0,4-1
0,4-1
1,25-11
1,25-11




ETU 10 M
ETU 10
4/14
4/13 4
LIG 0,4-1 1,25-11 In ETU 12 4/13
LSI 0,4-1 1,5-10 0-0,5 11 ETU 20 4/13
LSIG 0,4-1 1,5-10 0-0,5 11 In ETU 22 4/14
LI 0,4-1 1,25-11 ETU 30 M 4/14
LSI 0,4-1 1,5-10 0-0,5 1,25-11 LCD ETU 40 M 4/14
LI/LSI 0,4-1 1,5-10 0-0,5 1,25-11 LCD ETU 40 4/14
LSIG 0,4-1 1,5-10 0-0,5 1,25-11 adjustable LCD ETU 42 4/15
No rated current reduction up to 50 C A leading voltage can be applied to the undervoltage release of
Adjustable neutral conductor protection with LCD ETU 42 a circuit-breaker with leading auxiliary switches which makes the
1) TM up to 630 A circuit-breaker ready-to-close.
Internal accessories (auxiliary switches, undervoltage Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms
releases, shunt releases) (complete operating mechanisms)
The SENTRON VL circuit-breakers can be supplied with all the Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms and removable
internal accessories (e.g. auxiliary switches, undervoltage re- covers are available for circuit-breakers which are installed into
leases or shunt releases). The available versions can be found control cabinets and distribution boards. These are supplied as
in the tables with the Order No. prefixes. complete sets, including an articulated-shaft mechanism.
Fixed-mounting, plug-in or withdrawable version With regard to the switching status indication and the "RESET"
position, the same applies to the rotary operating mechanisms
The fixed-mounting circuit-breaker is the basic version. This can as to the toggle lever. The position of the operator lever (toggle)
be converted very easily into a plug-in or withdrawable version indicates the status.
with the aid of the appropriate mounting set. This set contains
blade contacts, a locking pin and terminal covers for the plug-in All rotary operating mechanisms can be locked in the OFF posi-
version. The set for the withdrawable version also contains side tion with the help of suitable padlocks. This means that all
covers and a moving mechanism. Even with the masking frame SENTRON VL circuit-breakers which have these operating
mounted, it is still possible to move using the handle with the mechanisms as well as the corresponding terminal covers can
door closed. be used as main switches.

Operating mechanisms
The basic versions of the SENTRON VL circuit-breakers are
equipped with a toggle lever as an operating mechanism which OFF
is also used as a position indicator. In addition to "ON" and "OFF", RESET
"Tripped" is also indicated.
ON
The toggle lever assumes the "tripped" position when the internal
tripping mechanism is activated by an overcurrent trip opera-
tion, e.g. an overload or short-circuit. The activation of an under-
voltage release or shunt release also causes the toggle lever to
NSE0_ 00038a

assume the "tripped" position. The toggle lever must be put into
Tripped
the "OFF/RESET" position before the circuit-breakers can be re-
closed. It will then be possible to reset the internal release mech-
anism and reclose the main contacts on the circuit-breaker (see
figure). Toggle lever operating mechanism positions
A toggle handle extension is supplied with the
SENTRON VL1250 and VL1600 circuit-breakers. This accessory
must be ordered separately for SENTRON VL400 to VL800
circuit-breakers, if required.
Front-operated rotary operating mechanisms
NSE0_00699

These operating mechanisms have been designed for direct


mounting to the circuit-breaker and change the toggle lever
movement from a linear to a rotary motion.

Rotary operating mechanism secured with a padlock

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/9


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data
Motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store a locking device for padlocks. Optional safety locks are also
available.
The SENTRON VL160X to VL1600 circuit-breakers (sizes 160 to
1600 A) can be equipped with motorized operating mechanisms These devices can be used to block the operating mechanism
for remote opening and closing during operation. electrically and mechanically. All remote-controlled mechanisms
are equipped with a manual operation option for maintenance
These motorized operating mechanisms with spring energy purposes.
stores for SENTRON VL160X to VL800 circuit-breakers have a
stored-energy feature (for synchronization) with a maximum ON
period of tE 100 ms. The SENTRON VL1250 and VL1600 cir-
cuit-breakers are motor driven (tE 5 s). In addition, they permit
remote opening of the circuit-breaker. The motorized operating
mechanisms with spring energy store are always supplied with
Main connections, basic equipment and options
SENTRON VL160X and VL160 circuit- SENTRON VL250 to VL1250 circuit- SENTRON VL1600 circuit-breakers

4 breakers breakers

NSE0_00702

NSE0_00701

NSE0_00700

Box terminal Connection with screw connection Connection to front busbar connecting For conductor cross-sections
for copper cables or busbars (available with direct cable lug connec- bars see Page 4/17
tion on VL160X, VL160, VL250, VL400)

Main connections
Circuit-breakers Connection overview and further options
Box terminals Connection with screw Circular conductor Rear-mounting Front-accessible
connection with metric terminal terminals connecting bars
thread (for Al/Cu cables)
VL160X o x x x x
VL160 o x x x x
VL250 x o x x x
VL400 x o x x x
VL630 o x x x
VL800 o x x x
VL1250 o x x x
VL1600 x x o
- = scope of supply
x = available
= not available

4/10 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data
Auxiliary releases and auxiliary switches
Undervoltage releases, leading auxiliary switches
If there is no voltage present, closing of the breaker is not possi- N 4th pole
Right accessory
Accessory Left accessory
ble. If voltage is not applied to the trip unit, operation of the compartment compartment compartment
circuit-breaker will result in no-load switching.
Max. Max. Max.
Frequent re-tripping should be avoided because of its adverse VL160X Max. Max.
3 HS 2 HS + U< 2 HS +
3VL1 3 HS 3 HS
effect on the service life of the circuit-breaker. 1 AS 1 AS
Max. Max.
VL160 Max. Max. Max.
All undervoltage releases have been designed and tested to fulfill 2 HS + U< 2 HS +
3VL2 3 HS 3 HS 3 HS
1 AS 1 AS
all applicable requirements in accordance with IEC 60947 Max. Max.
(release voltage 0.70 to 0.35 Ue, VL250 Max. Max. Max.
3 HS 2 HS + U< 2 HS +
3VL3 3 HS 3 HS
response voltage 0.85 to 1.10 Ue). 1 AS 1 AS
Max. Max.
VL400 Max. Max.
A leading voltage can be applied to the undervoltage release of 3VL4 3 HS 3 HS 2 HS + U<
3 HS
1 AS

4
a circuit-breaker with leading auxiliary switches which makes the
Max. Max.
circuit-breaker ready-to-close. VL630 Max. Max.
4 HS 2 HS + U<
3VL5 4 HS 4 HS
2 AS
For SENTRON VL circuit-breakers, the leading auxiliary switch Max.
VL800 Max. Max. Max.
can be supplied with the front rotary operating mechanism or 3VL6 4 HS 4 HS 2 HS + U<
4 HS
complete operating mechanism. For more detailed information 2 AS
Max.
please refer to the selection and ordering tables for accessories. VL1250 Max. Max.
2 HS + U<
Max.
3VL7 4 HS 4 HS 4 HS
2 AS

NSE0_00584d
Shunt release Max.
VL1600 Max. Max. Max.
4 HS 2 HS + U<
The shunt release is used for remote tripping of the circuit- 3VL8 4 HS
2 AS
4 HS
breaker.
Shunt trip or undervoltage
U<
The coil of the shunt release is designed for short-time operation release
VL160X with RCD:
Left accessory compartment HS one auxiliary switch 1 NO or 1 NC
only. A coil trip is implemented internally. AS one alarm switch 1 NO or 1 NC
is equipped with tripping solenoid
These devices operate in compliance with IEC 60947 (tripping Note:
VL160/VL 250 with electronic overcurrent Maximum 6 switching elements (HS)
voltage 0.70 to 1.10 Ue). release (ETU or LCD ETU): per circuit-breaker VL160X to VL400
Left accessory compartment Maximum 8 switching elements (HS)
It is not permissible to apply a continuous trip command to a is equipped with tripping solenoid per circuit-breaker VL630 to VL1600
shunt release to prevent closing when the circuit-breaker is
tripped. Possible complements for the insulated accessory subsections in the
A central tap is provided as standard for checking the conduc- SENTRON VL circuit-breakers
tivity of the coil. Before ordering, use the table above to check whether the required com-
Auxiliary switch bination of shunt releases, undervoltage releases and auxiliary/alarm
switches is feasible.
Auxiliary switches are used for indication and control. The differ-
ent combination options for the auxiliary switches are shown in RCD module
the diagram above. Easy mounting
Alarm switch Installation kit for lateral assembly to DIN 50023 for
SENTRON VL160X circuit-breakers under
The alarm switches (AS) are active when the circuit-breaker has Order No. 3VL9 112-5GB30/3VL9 112-5GB40
been tripped due to an overcurrent e.g. overload or short-circuit. A tripping button enables the function of the integrated RCD
However, they are also activated if the circuit-breaker has been module to be tested.
tripped by a shunt release or undervoltage release. Protruding reset/tripping button (prevents the circuit-breaker
from being reclosed before the reset/tripping button has been
Installing auxiliary/alarm switches reset)
(see diagram) Circuit for remote-controlled tripping of the circuit-breaker does
The configuration possibilities for circuit-breakers with auxiliary not require an additional external voltage supply
and alarm switches depend on the mounting position of the aux- (for SENTRON VL160 to VL400 circuit-breakers).
iliary/alarm switches on the circuit-breaker and on the accessory LED displays which enable visual monitoring of the RCD module
groups (1 or 2) of the circuit-breakers. - Green
25 % I of In
PLC control - Green + yellow
The auxiliary and alarm switches can be used to send signals to 25 % < I = 50 % of the set In
programmable controllers. These switches are part of the - Green + yellow + red
Siemens 3SB3 range. I 50 % of the set In
RCD alarm switch (changeover contact) for VL160 to VL400 to
Leading auxiliary switches indicate a tripping operation by the RCD module
The leading auxiliary switches OFF to ON or ON to OFF are avail- AC 690 V application
able as a retrofit set for rotary operating mechanisms. "Power disconnect" enables electrical testing without discon-
necting the cables
The functional properties of the circuit-breaker are not adversely
affected by the addition of the RCD module
Internal power supply, no external voltage.
(For diagrams see Page 4/16).

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/11


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data

Functions Direct detection of the ground-fault current via a current trans-


former in the grounded neutral point of the transformer (mea-
Current limitation surement method 2)

The SENTRON VL circuit-breakers utilize the design principle of The current transformer is installed directly in the grounded neu-
magnetic repulsion of the contacts. The contacts open before tral point of the transformer.
the anticipated peak value of the short-circuit current is
achieved. The current-limiting effects of the SENTRON VL L1
circuit-breakers provide effective protection for system compo- L2
nents against the thermal and dynamic effects of the short- 3VL
L3
circuit current in the event of an electrical fault.
N
Ground-fault protection
T6
Ground-fault releases "g" sense fault currents that flow to ground
and that can cause fire in the plant. Several circuit-breakers con- PE

4
NSE0_00688
nected in series can provide graduated discrimination by means
of the adjustable delay time.
The following measurement methods can be used to detect neu- Three-pole circuit-breakers, current transformers in the grounded neutral
point of the transformer.
tral conductor and ground-fault currents:
Vectorial summation current formation (measurement method 1) For RCD module, see Pages 4/44 and 4/45.
For external current transformer, see Page 4/55.
Ground-fault detection in symmetrically loaded systems
Transformer protection
The three phase currents are evaluated with the help of the vec-
torial summation current. The SENTRON VL circuit-breakers protect energy distribution
systems against overload and short-circuit on the low-voltage
side of the infeed transformer. The resulting requirements with re-
L1 spect to current-based and/or time-based discrimination are reli-
L2 ably fulfilled by the SENTRON VL circuit-breakers for system pro-
3VL tection (equipped with thermal-magnetic (TM) or electronic
L3
overcurrent trip units (ETU or LCD ETU).
PE
NSE0_00685

Ground-fault detection in asymmetrically loaded systems


The neutral conductor current is measured directly. For the
three-pole circuit-breakers this measurement is only evaluated
for ground-fault protection; for four-pole circuit-breakers it is also
evaluated for neutral conductor overload protection.
The overcurrent trip unit determines the ground-fault current for
the three phase currents and neutral conductor current by
means of vectorial summation current formation.
For 4-pole circuit-breakers, the fourth current transformer for the
neutral conductor is installed internally.

L1
3VL L2
L3
N
T5 PE
NSE0_00686

3-pole circuit-breaker, current transformer in the neutral conductor

L1
L2
3VL L3
N

PE
NSE0_00687

4-pole circuit-breaker, current transformer installed internally

4/12 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data
Thermal-magnetic overcurrent trip unit NSE-00539
Application: system protection TM ~=
OFF
63A
TM, LI/LIN function 50 C
CAT.A

L
Overload protection (fixed), short-circuit protection
I
(fixed); see selection table for VL160X (trip units
NSE0_00689 installed in the switch enclosure)
2 4 6

Application: system protection NSE-00540

TM, LI/LIN function TM ~=


OFF
63A
50 C
CAT.A
L Overload protection (adjustable IR = 0.8 to 1 In), 1.0 .8
x In IR

I short-circuit protection (fixed);


NSE0_00690
see selection tables for VL160X
(trip units installed in the switch enclosure)

4
2 4 6

Application: system protection NSE-00541


TM, LI/LIN function Ii
I n =160A
I R 16 DC
1.0

7 8
L Overload protection (adjustable 6 9
50 C
IR I i
x In
TM ~ x I n .8
I IR = 0.8 to 1 In), 5 10 = CAT.A

NSE0_00691
short-circuit protection (adjustable
Ii = 5 to 10 In, for VL160 to VL630)
2 4 6

Electronic overcurrent trip units ETU


For types General
VL160 to
VL1600 No auxiliary voltage for tripping unit Overload status (I > 1.05 IR) is indicated
required by continuous yellow LED (alarm)
All ETUs have a thermal image Integrated self-test function
Flashing green LED indicates faultless Female connector for test unit
operation of microprocessor

Application: system protection ETU10, NSE0_00542

LI/LIN function Alarm 1 R t R (S) 1 i


>1.05 1.0 .4 30 2.5 11 1.25
L Overload protection IR = 0.4; 0.45; 0.5 to 0.95; .95 .45 25 4 10 1.5
tR
.9 20 6 2
I 1 In, time-lag class tR = 2.5 to 30 .5 8
.8 17 8 6 3
X3 .7 .63 .6 14 10 5 4
NSE0_00691 Short-circuit protection (instantaneous) 25 AB x1 n 1R1 i x1 n Active
Ii = 1.25 to 11 In1)
CAT.A 1 n =250A ~ 25 AB
Application: system and generator protection NSE-00543
L ETU20, LSI/LSIN function Alarm IR Isd t sd(S)
>1.05 1.0 .4 10 1.5 .4 0 I2t
S Overload protection IR = 0.4; 0.45; 0.5 to 0.95; .95 .45 8 2
I t .3
2 .1
OFF
I 1 In, .9 .5
t sd
7 2.5 ON .2 .2
.6 6 xIR .3
.8 3 .1
NSE0_00920 Short-circuit protection (short-time delayed) X3 .7 .63 IR Isd 5 4 .5 .4
25 AE x In
Isd = 1.5 to 10 IR, tsd = 0 to 0.5 s, Active

2 CAT.A I n=250A ~ 25 AE
I t selectable on/off
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)
Ii = 11 In (fixed)1)

Application: system protection NSE-00544

ETU12, LIG/LING function Alarm t R(S)


R i 1.25
L >1.05 1.0 .4
.45 30 2.5 11
Overload protection IR = 0.4; 0.45; 0.5 to 0.95; .95 25 4 10 1.5
tR
G I 1 In, time-lag class tR = 2.5 to 30 .9 .5 20 6 8 2
.8 17 8 6 3
NSE0_00693
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous) X3 .7 .63 14 10 5 4
x R i x
I = 1.25 to 11 In1) 25 AD n n Active

25 AD
Ground-fault protection: CAT.A n =250A ~ n= n

Measurement method no. 1:


(GR) vectorial summation current formation for the
currents of the three phases/and neutral conductor
(four-conductor systems); In = In, versions "AC",
"AD", "BC", "BD" (for Order No. supplements see
Page 4/25 or 4/31)
Measurement method no. 2:
(GGND) direct detection of ground-fault current via
current transformer installed in grounded neutral
point, Ig = In (instantaneous); version "AJ"
(for Order No. supplements see Page 4/25)
1) Depending on size, see Page 4/23 (3-pole) and Page 4/30 (4-pole)
Siemens LV 30 2004 4/13
SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data
NSE-00545
L
Application: system and generator protection
ETU22, LSIG/LSING function Alarm IR Isd t sd(S) 2
>1.05 1.0 .4 10 1.5 .4 0 I t
S 8 2 2 .1
Overload protection IR = 0.4; 0.45; 0.5 to 0.95; .95 .45 I t .3 OFF
I .5 7 2.5 ON
G 1 In, .9 .2 .2
t
.8 .6 sd 6 3 x IR .1 .5 .4 .3
NSE0_00921 X3 .7 .63 5 4
Short-circuit protection (short-time delayed) x In IR Isd
25 AG Active
Isd = 1.5 to 10 IR, tsd = 0 to 0.5 s,
CAT.A I n = 250A~ I n= I n 25 AG
I2t selectable on/off
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous) Ii = 11 In
(fixed)1)
Ground-fault protection:
Measurement method no. 1:
(GR) vectorial summation current formation for the

4
currents of the three phases/and neutral conductor
(4-conductor systems);
In = In, versions "AG", "AH", "BG", "BH"
(for Order No. supplements see Page 4/25 or 4/31)
Measurement method no. 2:
(GGND) direct detection of ground-fault current via
current transformer, Ig = In (instantaneous); version
"AK" (for Order No. supplements see Page 4/25)
NSE-00546

L Application: motor protection ETU10M, Alarm IEC 60947-4


IR Ii
LI function >1.05 0.4 .10 .01 1.25
11 1.5
EN 60947-4
.09 .02 10
Overload protection adjustable in small steps 0.5 + .08 .03 8 2
I IR = 0.41; 0.42 to 0.98; 0.99; 1 In, 0.6 .04 xI
0.9 .07 6 3 n
X3 0.8 0.7 .06 .05 IR Ii 5 4
NSE0_00943 trip class tc = 10 (fixed) 25 AP
xIn
Active
Thermal image CAT.A I n =250A ~ 25 AP
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)
Ii = 1.25 to 11 In1)
with phase failure sensitivity
NSE0_01160
Application: motor protection ETU30M,
LI function Alarm
0.4 .10 .01 i =6x n
R TC 30 10
>1.05 .09 .02 20 20
L
Overload protection adjustable in small steps 0.5 .08 .03 10 30
I IR = 0.41; 0.9 0.6 .07 .04 10A 10 Active
0.8 0.7 x n 30 20
NSE0_00691 0.42 to 0.98; 0.99; 1 In, X3 .06 .05
25 AS i =11x n i =8x n
trip class tc = 10 A, 10, 20, 30
Thermal image
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)
Ii = 6 to 11 In with phase failure sensitivity
Electronic overcurrent trip units LCD ETU
General
No auxiliary voltage for trip unit User-friendly, menu-driven setting
required of protection parameters in absolute
ampere values via keys
Current indicator
Integrated self-test function
Illuminated LCD display indicates faultless
operation of microprocessor Female connector for test/programming device
Overload status (I > 105% IR) is indicated by For communication link to PROFIBUS DP
"overload" on the LCD display see Section 3 "Communication-capable
circuit-breakers".
L Application: system protection ETU40, LSI NSE-00547

functions and motor protection ETU40M,


LSI/LSIN function ESC

I
L1=178; L2=181
Overload protection IR = 0.4 to 1 In, L3=179; N=0
NSE0_00944 trip class tc = 2.5 to 30
On/off selectable thermal image CAT.A I n =250A ~ I n= I n
25 CL

Short-circuit protection (short-time delayed)


Isd = 1.5 to 10 IR, tsd = 0 to 0.5 s,
I2t selectable on/off
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)
Ii = 1.25 to 11 In1)
1) Depending on size, see Page 4/23 (3-pole) and Page 4/30 (4-pole)

4/14 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data

L Application: system protection Measurement method 2:


ETU42, LSIG/LSING function (GGND) direct detection of ground-fault current via
S current transformer, Ig = 0.4 to 1 In,
Overload protection IR = 0.4 to 1 x In, tg = 0.1 to 0.5 s; version "CM"
G I time-lag class tR = 2.5 to 30
NSE0_00697
(for Order No. supplements see Page 4/26)
On/off selectable thermal image NSE-00547

Short-circuit protection (short-time delayed) ESC


Isd = 1.5 to 10 IR, tsd = 0 to 0.5 s, L1=178; L2=181
I2t selectable on/off L3=179; N=0
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)
I n =250A ~ I n= I n
25 CL
Ii = 1.25 to 11 In1) CAT.A

Ground-fault protection:
Measurement method 1:
(GR) vectorial summation current formation for the
currents of the three phases/and neutral conductor 4
(4-conductor systems);
In = 0.4 to 1 In, versions "CL", "CM", "CN"
(for Order No. supplements see Page 4/26 or 4/32)
1) Depending on size, see Page 4/23 (3-pole) and Page 4/30 (4-pole)

Integration
Mounting
The SENTRON VL circuit-breakers are suitable for use in open
and enclosed switchboards and distribution systems. The rec-
ommended mounting positions for the SENTRON VL circuit-
breakers are shown in the diagrams under "Technical specifica-
tions, permissible mounting positions".

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/15


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data

Technical specifications
Type VL160X VL160 VL250 VL400 VL630 VL800 VL1250 VL1600
3VL1 3VL2 3VL3 3VL4 3VL5 3VL6 3VL7 3VL8
Max. rated current In A 160 160 250 400 630 800 1250 1600
depending on the version
Rated insulation voltage Ui to
IEC 60947-2
Main circuits AC V 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
Auxiliary circuits AC V 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
Main circuits kV 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Auxiliary circuits kV 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Rated operating voltage Ue, 50/60 Hz
IEC AC V 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690

4
NEMA AC V 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
Permissible ambient temperature C 25 ... +70 25 ... +70 25 ... +70 25 ... +70 25 ... +70 25 ... +70 25 ... +70 25 ... +70
Permissible load at various
ambient temperatures
close to the circuit-breaker, related to the
rated current of the circuit-breaker
Circuit-breakers for system protec- at 40 C % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
tion
at 50 C % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
at 60 C % 93 93 93 93 93 95 95 95
at 70 C % 86 86 86 86 86 86 86 80
Circuit-breakers for motor protection at 40 C % 100 100 100 100
at 50 C % 100 100 100 100
at 60 C % 93 93 93 93
at 70 C % 86 86 86 86
Circuit-breakers for starter at 40 C % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
combinations and non-automatic at 50 C % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
circuit-breakers
at 60 C % 93 93 93 93 93 95 95 95
at 70 C % 86 86 86 86 86 86 86 80
Rated short-circuit switching capacity (DC)
for SENTRON VL circuit-breakers with TM trip unit
Time constant t = 15 ms
1 current path 2 current paths 3 current paths
in series in series kA 30 30 30 30 30 1) 1) 1)
up to DC 250 V DC 440 V DC 600 V
NEMA
Time constant t = 8 ms
1 current path 2 current paths
in series
DC 250 V kA 30 30 30 30 30 1) 1) 1)
DC 250 V kA 30 30 30 30 30 1) 1) 1)
Weights of 3-pole circuit-breakers
Basic unit without overcurrent trip unit kg 1.5 1.6 4.2 7.8 14.2 21 27.3
Thermal-magnetic overcurrent trip unit kg 0.7 0.7 1.5 1.2
Electronic overcurrent trip unit kg 0.9 0.9 1.7 1.5 1.8 4.0 4.0
Basic unit
with thermal-magnetic overcurrent trip unit kg 2.0 2.2 2.3 5.7 9.0
with electronic overcurrent trip unit kg 2.4 2.5 5.9 9.3 16.0 25.0 31.3
Weights of 4-pole circuit-breakers
Basic unit without overcurrent trip unit kg 2.0 2.2 5.5 9.7 18.2 27.5 34.8
Thermal-magnetic overcurrent trip unit kg 1.0 1.0 1.9 1.5
Electronic overcurrent trip unit kg 1.1 1.1 2.1 2.0 2.3 6.0 6.0
Basic unit
with thermal-magnetic overcurrent trip unit kg 2.5 3.0 3.2 7.4 11.2
with electronic overcurrent trip unit kg 3.1 3.3 7.6 11.7 20.5 33.5 40.8
Rated short-circuit switching capacity For rated short-circuit switching capacity see table on page 4/21.
to IEC 60947-2 (at 50/60 Hz)
SENTRON VL160X SENTRON VL160X to VL400 with
with RCD module RCD module
mounted laterally on the circuit- mounted below the circuit-breaker
breaker (on left side)
NSE0_00582

NSE0_00583

1) Circuit-breaker cannot be used for direct current.

4/16 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data

Type VL160X VL160 VL250 VL400 VL630 VL800 VL1250 VL1600


3VL1 3VL2 3VL3 3VL4 3VL5 3VL6 3VL7 3VL8
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 20000 20000 20000 20000 10000 5000 3000 3000
Max. switching frequency 1/h 120 120 120 120 60 60 30 30
Conductor cross-sections and connection types box box flat flat flat flat flat flat
for main conductors (see Page 4/10) terminal terminal
Box terminal
Solid or stranded cable copper only mm2 2.5-70 2.5-70 25-150 50-240
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2.5-50 2.5-50 25-120 50-185
Busbar mm 12 10 12 10 17 10 25 10
Tightening torque for terminals Nm 4/8 4/8 12 25
Multiple feed-in terminal for cable
Solid or stranded cable Cu or Al mm2 10-95 10-95 25-185 50-240
Multiple feed-in terminal

Tightening torque for Al terminal


Cu or Al

Cu or Al
mm2

Nm 6/14

6/14

14/31
2 units
50-120
56/31
2 units
50-240
34
3 units
50-240
42
4 units
120-240
42


4
Tightening torque for fixing screw Nm 11 15/15 15 26 26
Direct connection of busbars Cu or Al mm 17 7 22 7 24 7 32 10 40 10 2 40 10 2 50 10 3 60 10
Screw for connection with screw terminal M5 M5 M8 M8 M6 M8 M8
Tightening torque for busbar connection piece Nm 5 5 11 15 15 26 26
Conductor cross-sections for control circuits with terminal connection or terminal strip
Solid mm2 0.75-1.5 0.75-1.5 0.75-1.5 0.75-1.5 0.75-1.5 0.75-1.5 0.75-1.5 0.75-1.5
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 0.75-1.0 0.75-1.0 0.75-1.0 0.75-1.0 0.75-1.0 0.75-1.0 0.75-1.0 0.75-1.0
Tightening torque for terminal screw Nm 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Power loss per circuit-breaker at max. rated current
System protection TM 0.8-1.0 W 12-70 15-48 32-80 60-175 85-230
System protection ETU or W 40 60 90 160 250 210 260
LCD ETU
for starter combinations or
non-automatic circuit-breakers W 40 40 60 90 160 250 210 260
for motor protection W 40 60 90 160
Permissible mounting position 30
90 90 90

NSE0_00026 NSE-00923

3SB34 00-0K and 3SB34 00-0J auxiliary and alarm switches


Conventional free-air thermal current Ith
A 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Rated making capacity A 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
AC (AC-15)
Rated operating voltage V 24 48 110 230 400 600
Rated operating current AC-12 A 10 10 10 10 10 10
AC-15 A 6 6 6 6 3 1
DC (DC-13)
Rated operating voltage V 24 48 110 230
Rated operating current DC-12 A 10 5 2.5 1
DC-13 A 3 1.5 0.7 0.3
Back-up fuse/ A 10 TDz / 10
miniature circuit-breaker
Leading auxiliary switch with rotary operating mechanism
Rated thermal current Ith A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Rated making capacity A 2 (ind. 0.5) 2 (ind. 0.5) 2 (ind. 0.5) 2 (ind. 0.5) 2 (ind. 0.5) 2 (ind. 0.5) 2 (ind. 0.5) 2 (ind. 0.5)
Rated operating voltage AC V 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230
Rated operating current A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Rated breaking capacity, induc., p.f.= 0.7 A 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Rated breaking capacity A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Back-up fuse, quick A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Position indicator switches
Conventional thermal current Ith A 16 16
Rated making capacity A 16 10
Rated operating voltage AC V 250 400
Rated operating current A 16 10
Rated breaking capacity, induc., p.f.= 0.7 A 4 4
Rated breaking capacity A 16 10
Back-up fuse, quick A 16 10

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/17


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data

Type VL160X VL160 VL250 VL400 VL630 VL800 VL1250 VL1600


3VL1 3VL2 3VL3 3VL4 3VL5 3VL6 3VL7 3VL8
3SB34 00-0K and 3SB34 00-0J auxiliary and alarm switches
Tripped indication switch in RCD module1)
Conventional thermal current Ith A 2
Rated making capacity A 2
Rated operating voltage AC V 250
Rated operating current A 2
Rated breaking capacity, induc., p.f.= 0.7 A 0.5
Rated breaking capacity A 2
Back-up fuse, quick A 2
Trip units Group 1: VL160X to VL400 Group 2: VL630 to VL1600
Undervoltage release

4 Response voltage:
Release (circuit-breaker is tripped) V 0.35-0.70 Us 0.35-0.70 Us
Pick-up (circuit-breaker can be closed) V 0.85-1.1 Us 0.85-1.1 Us
Power input (continuous duty) at:
AC 50/60 Hz 110-127 V VA 1.0 1.8
AC 50/60 Hz 220-250 V VA 1.0 1.8
AC 50/60 Hz 208 V VA 1.0 1.8
AC 50/60 Hz 277 V VA 1.0 1.8
AC 50/60 Hz 380-415 V VA 1.0 1.8
AC 50/60 Hz 440-480 V VA 1.0 1.8
AC 50/60 Hz 500-525 V VA 1.0 1.8
AC 50/60 Hz 600 V VA 1.0 1.8
DC 12 V W 0.8 1.5
DC 24 V W 0.8 1.5
DC 48 V W 0.8 1.5
DC 60 V W 0.8 1.5
DC 110-127 V W 0.8 1.5
DC 220-250 V W 0.8 1.5
Max. opening time ms 50 50
Shunt release
Operating voltage: Us Us
Pick-up (circuit-breaker is tripped) V 0.7-1.1 0.7-1.1
Power input (short time) at:
AC 50/60 Hz 48-60 V VA 158-200 300-480
AC 50/60 Hz 110-127 V VA 136-158 302-353
AC 50/60 Hz 208-277 V VA 274-350 330-349
AC 50/60 Hz 380-600 V VA 158-237 243-384
DC 12 V W 110 110
DC 24 V W 110 360
DC 48-60 V W 110-172 500-820
DC 110-127 V W 220-254 302-353
DC 220-250 V W 97-110 348-397
Max. opening time ms 50 50
Max. in-service period S interrupts automatically
1) Max. DC rated operating voltage 125 V, minimum load 50 mA at DC 5 V.

4/18 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data
o

Type VL160X VL160 VL250 VL400 VL630 VL800 VL1250 VL1600


3VL1 3VL2 3VL3 3VL4 3VL5 3VL6 3VL7 3VL8
- = Motorized operating mechanism x x x x x x , ,
x = With spring energy store (synchronizable)
Power input VA/W <500
Rated control supply voltage Us AC 50/60 Hz V 48 60 110127 220250
DC V 24 48 60 110127 220250

Back-up fuse or A 20 16 10 6 2
miniature circuit-breaker
(time-lag)
Operating range V 0.85-1.1
Minimum command duration at Us ms 50
Total make-time ms <100 <5000 <5000
Break-time
Charging time
S
S
<5
<5
4
Reclosure after approx. S 1 50 50
Max. permissible switching fre- 1/h 120 120 120 120 60 60 30 30
quency
Max. command duration ms Inching command and pushbutton command

Space requirements above arcing chambers

C Arcing spaces The specific installation instructions for the various


Minimum clearances from adjacent grounded sizes must be observed for plain conductors and
parts and from non-insulated live parts. busbars outside the arcing space.
A

Plain conductors and busbars must be insulated For installation instructions refer to the Internet
with interphase barriers within the arcing space. www.ad.siemens.de
D

NSE0_00740
B

Circuit-breaker Switching Minimum A A A B C D


capacity enclosure
volume 415 V >415 690 V >415 690 V 690 V 690 V 690 V
without without with
terminal cover terminal cover terminal cover
Type m3 (cover) (cover) (cover)
VL160X Standard
High 0.011 35 70 35 25 25 35
VL160 Standard
High 0.011 50 100 100 25 25 35
Very high
VL250 Standard
High 0.015 50 100 100 25 25 35
Very high
VL400 Standard
High 0.036 50 100 50 25 25 35
Very high
VL630 Standard
High 0.18 50 100 50 25 25 35
Very high
VL800 Standard
High 0.22 50 100 50 25 25 35
Very high
VL1250 Standard
High 0.22 70 100 70 30 30 50
Very high
VL1600 Standard
High 0.264 100 100 100 100 30 100
Very high
Definition of the permissible safety clearances
Clearance between
A: circuit-breaker and busbars (bare metal and grounded metal); terminal
cover required above AC 600 V, DC 500 V
B: circuit-breaker connection and floor
C: side of the circuit-breaker and the side walls (bare metal and grounded
metal)
D: circuit-breaker and non-conducting parts with an insulation thickness of at
least 3 mm (insulator, insulated busbar, painted plate)

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/19


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data
Correlation between short-circuit making capacity, short-circuit breaking capacity and
the corresponding power factor (to IEC 60947-2)
Short-circuit breaking capacity Power Minimum value for short-circuit making capacity Icm
Icu factor (n x short-circuit breaking capacity)
A p.f. n Icu
4 500 < Icu 6 000 0.7 1.5 Icu
6 000 < Icu 10 000 0.5 1.7 Icu
10 000 < Icu 20 000 0.3 2.0 Icu
20 000 < Icu 50 000 0.25 2.1 Icu
50 000 < Icu 0.2 2.2 Icu
e.g. VL250H (H r high switching capacity): Icu = 70 kA (AC 415 V)
Icm = 2.2 70 000 = 154 kA (AC 415 V)

4/20 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

General data
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics
Circuit-breakers for system protection and non-automatic circuit-breakers
Type VL160X VL160 VL250 VL400 VL630 VL800 VL1250 VL1600
Rated current In A 160 160 250 400 630 800 1250 1600
up to AC 220/240 V
Icu kA 65 100 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200
Ics kA 65 75 65 75 150 65 75 150 65 75 150 65 75 150 65 75 150 35 75 100 35 50 100
up to AC 380/415 V
Icu kA 40 70 40 70 100 40 70 100 45 70 100 45 70 100 50 70 100 50 70 100 50 70 100
Ics kA 40 70 40 70 75 40 70 75 45 70 75 45 70 75 50 70 75 25 35 50 25 35 50
up to AC 690 V
Icu
Ics
kA 81)
kA 41)
121)
61)
12
6
12
6
12 12
6 6
12
6
12 15
6 8
15
8
15 20
8 10
30
15
35 20
17 10
30
15
35 20
17 10
30
15
35 20
17 10
30
15
35
17
4
Circuit-breakers for motor protection and starter combinations
Type VL160 VL250 VL400 VL630
Rated current In A 160 250 400 630
up to AC 220/240 V
Icu kA 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200 65 100 200
Ics kA 65 75 150 65 75 150 65 75 150 65 75 150
up to AC 380/415 V
Icu kA 40 70 100 40 70 100 45 70 100 45 70 100
Ics kA 40 70 75 40 70 75 45 70 75 45 70 75
up to AC 690 V
Icu kA 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15 15 20 30 35
Ics kA 6 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 10 15 17

NEMA breaking capacity


Type VL160X VL160 VL250 VL400 VL630 VL800 VL1250 VL1600
Rated current In A 160 160 250 400 630 800 1250 1600
up to AC 480 V
NEMA kA 18 42 25 50 65 25 50 65 25 50 65 25 50 65 25 50 65 25 50 65 25 50 65
up to AC 600 V
NEMA kA 81) 121) 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15 15 20 30 35 20 30 35 20 30 35 20 30 35

The NEMA breaking capacity can be found on the rating plate of each
IEC circuit-breaker.

= standard switching capacity N

= high switching capacity H

= very high switching capacity L

1) For rated currents of 25 A and above. Rated currents of 16 A/20 A at


AC 690 V are not available for VL160 X.

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/21


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

3-pole

Selection and ordering data


Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers, VL160X to VL630, up to 630 A,
thermal-magnetic overcurrent trip units
Type Rated Setting Operating DT Standard switching DT High switching capacity H DT Very high switching capacity L
current current of current of capacity N 70 kA at 380/415 V AC 100 kA at 380/415 V AC
inverse-time instanta- 40/45/50 kA at 380/415 V AC
delayed neous see Page 4/21.
In overload short-cir- Order No. Weight Order No. Weight Order No. Weight
release "L" cuit release
IR "I" Order No. supplement per PU Order No. supple- per PU Order No. supplement per PU
required, approx. ment required, see approx. required, see Page 4/34 approx.
Ii
see Page 4/34 Page 4/34
A A A kg kg kg
Circuit-breakers for system protection, TM, LI function

4
with permanently set thermal overload releases, permanently set short-circuit releases

NSE0_00695

VL160X 16 16 300 B 3VL17 96-1DA33-.... 1.900 B 3VL17 96-2DA33-.... 1.900


20 20 300 B 3VL17 02-1DA33-.... 1.900 B 3VL17 02-2DA33-.... 1.900
25 25 300 B 3VL17 25-1DA33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 25-2DA33-.... 2.000
32 32 300 B 3VL17 03-1DA33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 03-2DA33-.... 2.000
40 40 600 B 3VL17 04-1DA33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 04-2DA33-.... 2.000
50 50 600 B 3VL17 05-1DA33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 05-2DA33-.... 2.000
63 63 600 B 3VL17 06-1DA33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 06-2DA33-.... 2.000
80 80 1000 B 3VL17 08-1DA33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 08-2DA33-.... 2.000
100 100 1000 B 3VL17 10-1DA33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 10-2DA33-.... 2.000
125 125 1000 B 3VL17 12-1DA33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 12-2DA33-.... 2.000
160 160 1500 B 3VL17 16-1DA33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 16-2DA33-.... 2.000
Circuit-breakers for system protection, TM, LI function
with adjustable thermal overload releases, permanently set short-circuit releases

NSE0_00703

VL160X 20 16- 20 300 B 3VL17 02-1DD33-.... 1.900 B 3VL17 02-2DD33-.... 1.900


32 25- 32 300 B 3VL17 03-1DD33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 03-2DD33-.... 2.000
40 32- 40 600 B 3VL17 04-1DD33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 04-2DD33-.... 2.000
50 40- 50 600 B 3VL17 05-1DD33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 05-2DD33-.... 2.000
63 50- 63 600 B 3VL17 06-1DD33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 06-2DD33-.... 2.000
80 63- 80 1000 B 3VL17 08-1DD33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 08-2DD33-.... 2.000
100 80-100 1000 B 3VL17 10-1DD33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 10-2DD33-.... 2.000
125 100-125 1000 B 3VL17 12-1DD33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 12-2DD33-.... 2.000
160 125-160 1500 B 3VL17 16-1DD33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 16-2DD33-.... 2.000
Circuit-breakers for system protection, TM, LI function
with adjustable thermal overload releases, adjustable short-circuit releases

NSE0_00704

VL160 50 40- 50 300- 600 B 3VL27 05-1DC33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 05-2DC33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 05-3DC33-.... 2.200
63 50- 63 300- 600 B 3VL27 06-1DC33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 06-2DC33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 06-3DC33-.... 2.200
80 63- 80 400- 800 B 3VL27 08-1DC33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 08-2DC33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 08-3DC33-.... 2.200
100 80-100 500-1000 B 3VL27 10-1DC33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 10-2DC33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 10-3DC33-.... 2.200
125 100-125 625-1250 B 3VL27 12-1DC33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 12-2DC33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 12-3DC33-.... 2.200
160 125-160 800-1600 B 3VL27 16-1DC33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 16-2DC33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 16-3DC33-.... 2.200
VL250 200 160-200 1000-2000 B 3VL37 20-1DC36-.... 2.300 B 3VL37 20-2DC36-.... 2.300 B 3VL37 20-3DC36-.... 2.300
250 200-250 1200-2500 B 3VL37 25-1DC36-.... 2.300 B 3VL37 25-2DC36-.... 2.300 B 3VL37 25-3DC36-.... 2.300
VL400 200 160-200 1000-2000 B 3VL47 20-1DC36-.... 5.700 B 3VL47 20-2DC36-.... 5.700 B 3VL47 20-3DC36-.... 5.700
250 200-250 1200-2500 B 3VL47 25-1DC36-.... 5.700 B 3VL47 25-2DC36-.... 5.700 B 3VL47 25-3DC36-.... 5.700
315 250-315 1575-3150 B 3VL47 31-1DC36-.... 5.700 B 3VL47 31-2DC36-.... 5.700 B 3VL47 31-3DC36-.... 5.700
400 320-400 2000-4000 B 3VL47 40-1DC36-.... 5.700 B 3VL47 40-2DC36-.... 5.700 B 3VL47 40-3DC36-.... 5.700
VL630 315 250-315 1575-3150 B 3VL57 31-1DC36-.... 9.000 B 3VL57 31-2DC36-.... 9.000 B 3VL57 31-3DC36-.... 9.000
400 315-400 2000-4000 B 3VL57 40-1DC36-.... 9.000 B 3VL57 40-2DC36-.... 9.000 B 3VL57 40-3DC36-.... 9.000
500 400-500 2500-5000 B 3VL57 50-1DC36-.... 9.000 B 3VL57 50-2DC36-.... 9.000 B 3VL57 50-3DC36-.... 9.000
630 500-630 3250-6300 B 3VL57 63-1DC36-.... 9.000 B 3VL57 63-2DC36-.... 9.000 B 3VL57 63-3DC36-.... 9.000
Pack size is one SENTRON VL circuit-breaker, i.e. 1 unit or a multiple thereof can be ordered.
For conversion into a plug-in or withdrawable version using the
plug-in base kit or the withdrawable version kit, see Pages 4/9,
4/40 to 4/43.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/46 to 4/49).

4/22 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

3-pole

Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers, VL160 to VL1600, up to 1600 A,


magnetic and electronic overcurrent trip units
Type Rated Setting Operating DT Standard switching DT High switching capacity H DT Very high switching capacity L
current current of current of capacity N 70 kA at 380/415 V AC 100 kA at 380/415 V AC
inverse-time instanta- 40/45/50 kA at 380/415 V AC
delayed neous short- see Page 4/21.
In overload circuit release Order No. Weight Order No. Weight Order No. Weight
release"L" "I" per PU per PU
IR Ii Order No. supple- Order No. supple- Order No. supplement per PU
ment required, see approx. ment required, see approx. required, see Page 4/34 approx.
Page 4/34 Page 4/34
A A A kg kg kg
Circuit-breaker for system and generator protection, ETU20, LSI function
for time-based discrimination
(S function: Isd = 1.5 to 10 x IR, tsd = 0 to 0.5 s)

NSE0_00922
4
VL160 63 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL27 06-1AE33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 06-2AE33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 06-3AE33-.... 2.400
100 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL27 10-1AE33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 10-2AE33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 10-3AE33-.... 2.400
160 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL27 16-1AE33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 16-2AE33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 16-3AE33-.... 2.400
VL250 200 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL37 20-1AE36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 20-2AE36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 20-3AE36-.... 2.500
250 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL37 25-1AE36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 25-2AE36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 25-3AE36-.... 2.500
VL400 315 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL47 31-1AE36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 31-2AE36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 31-3AE36-.... 5.900
400 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL47 40-1AE36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 40-2AE36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 40-3AE36-.... 5.900
VL630 630 0.4-1.0 In 10 In B 3VL57 63-1AE36-.... 9.300 B 3VL57 63-2AE36-.... 9.300 B 3VL57 63-3AE36-.... 9.300
VL800 800 0.4-1.0 In 8 In B 3VL67 80-1AE36-.... 16.000 B 3VL67 80-2AE36-.... 16.000 B 3VL67 80-3AE36-.... 16.000
VL1250 1000 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL77 10-1AE36-.... 25.000 B 3VL77 10-2AE36-.... 25.000 B 3VL77 10-3AE36-.... 25.000
1250 0.4-1.0 In 10 In B 3VL77 12-1AE36-.... 25.000 B 3VL77 12-2AE36-.... 25.000 B 3VL77 12-3AE36-.... 25.000
VL1600 1600 0.4-1.0 In 9 In B 3VL87 16-1AE30-.... 31.300 B 3VL87 16-2AE30-.... 31.300 B 3VL87 16-3AE30-.... 31.300
Circuit-breakers for motor/generator protection, ETU10M, LI function
with permanently set time-lag class tR = 10,
with phase failure sensitivity

NSE0_00705

VL160 63 25- 63 1.25-11 In B 3VL27 06-1AP33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 06-2AP33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 06-3AP33-.... 2.400
100 40-100 1.25-11 In B 3VL27 10-1AP33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 10-2AP33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 10-3AP33-.... 2.400
160 64-160 1.25-11 In B 3VL27 16-1AP33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 16-2AP33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 16-3AP33-.... 2.400
VL250 200 80-200 1.25-11 In B 3VL37 20-1AP36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 20-2AP36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 20-3AP36-.... 2.500
250 100-250 1.25-11 In B 3VL37 25-1AP36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 25-2AP36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 25-3AP36-.... 2.500
VL400 315 125-315 1.25-11 In B 3VL47 31-1AP36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 31-2AP36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 31-3AP36-.... 5.900
400 160-400 1.25-11 In B 3VL47 40-1AP36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 40-2AP36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 40-3AP36-.... 5.900
VL630 500 200-500 1.25-12.5 In B 3VL57 50-1AP36-.... 9.300 B 3VL57 50-2AP36-.... 9.300 B 3VL57 50-3AP36-.... 9.300
Circuit-breakers for motor protection, ETU30M, LI function
with adjustable time-lag class tR (10A, 10, 15, 20, 30),
with phase failure sensitivity

NSE0_00706

VL160 63 25- 63 6/8/11 In B 3VL27 06-1AS33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 06-2AS33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 06-3AS33-.... 2.400
100 40-100 6/8/11 In B 3VL27 10-1AS33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 10-2AS33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 10-3AS33-.... 2.400
160 63-160 6/8/11 In B 3VL27 16-1AS33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 16-2AS33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 16-3AS33-.... 2.400
VL250 200 80-200 6/8/11 In B 3VL37 20-1AS36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 20-2AS36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 20-3AS36-.... 2.500
250 100-250 6/8/11 In B 3VL37 25-1AS36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 25-2AS36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 25-3AS36-.... 2.500
VL400 315 125-315 6/8/11 In B 3VL47 31-1AS36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 31-2AS36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 31-3AS36-.... 5.900
400 160-400 6/8/11 In B 3VL47 40-1AS36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 40-2AS36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 40-3AS36-.... 5.900
VL630 500 200-500 6/8/12.5 In B 3VL57 50-1AS36-.... 9.300 B 3VL57 50-2AS36-.... 9.300 B 3VL57 50-3AS36-.... 9.300
Pack size is one SENTRON VL circuit-breaker, i.e. 1 unit or a multiple thereof can be ordered.
For conversion into a plug-in or withdrawable version using the
plug-in base kit or the withdrawable version kit, see Pages 4/9,
4/40 to 4/43.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/46 to 4/49).

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/23


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

3-pole

Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers, VL160X to VL1600, up to 1600 A,


magnetic and electronic overcurrent trip units
Type Rated Setting Operating DT Standard switching DT High switching capacity H DT Very high switching capacity L
current current of current of capacity N 70 kA at 380/415 V AC 100 kA at 380/415 V AC
In inverse-time instanta- 40/45/50 kA at 380/415 V AC
delayed neous see Page 4/21.
overload short-cir- Order No. Weight Order No. Weight Order No. Weight
release "L" cuit release
IR "I" Order No. supplement per PU Order No. supple- per PU Order No. supplement per PU
required, see Page approx. ment required, see approx. required, see Page 4/34 approx.
Ii
4/34 Page 4/34
A A A kg kg kg
Circuit-breakers for starter combinations, I function
without overload release, with adjustable short-circuit release

4 NSE0_00707

VL160 63 450- 900 B 3VL27 06-1DK33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 06-2DK33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 06-3DK33-.... 2.200
100 750-1500 B 3VL27 10-1DK33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 10-2DK33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 10-3DK33-.... 2.200
160 1250-2500 B 3VL27 16-1DK33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 16-2DK33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 16-3DK33-.... 2.200
VL250 250 1750-3500 B 3VL37 25-1DK36-.... 2.300 B 3VL37 25-2DK36-.... 2.300 B 3VL37 25-3DK36-.... 2.300
VL400 200 1250-2500 B 3VL47 20-1DK36-.... 5.700 B 3VL47 20-2DK36-.... 5.700 B 3VL47 20-3DK36-.... 5.700
250 2000-4000 B 3VL47 25-1DK36-.... 5.700 B 3VL47 25-2DK36-.... 5.700 B 3VL47 25-3DK36-.... 5.700
400 2750-5500 B 3VL47 40-1DK36-.... 5.700 B 3VL47 40-2DK36-.... 5.700 B 3VL47 40-3DK36-.... 5.700
VL630 315 2000-4000 B 3VL57 31-1DK36-.... 9.000 B 3VL57 31-2DK36-.... 9.000 B 3VL57 31-3DK36-.... 9.000
500 3250-6300 B 3VL57 50-1DK36-.... 9.000 B 3VL57 50-2DK36-.... 9.000 B 3VL57 50-3DK36-.... 9.000
Non-automatic circuit-breakers 1)
without overload release, with permanently set short-circuit releases (for intrinsic protection only)

NSE0_00708

VL160X 100 1800 B 3VL17 10-1DE33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 10-2DE33-.... 2.000


160 1800 B 3VL17 16-1DE33-.... 2.000 B 3VL17 16-2DE33-.... 2.000
VL160 100 2500 B 3VL27 10-1DE33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 10-2DE33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 10-3DE33-.... 2.200
160 2500 B 3VL27 16-1DE33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 16-2DE33-.... 2.200 B 3VL27 16-3DE33-.... 2.200
VL250 250 3500 B 3VL37 25-1DE36-.... 2.300 B 3VL37 25-2DE36-.... 2.300 B 3VL37 25-3DE36-.... 2.300
VL400 400 5500 B 3VL47 40-1DE36-.... 5.700 B 3VL47 40-2DE36-.... 5.700 B 3VL47 40-3DE36-.... 5.700
VL630 630 6500 B 3VL57 63-1DE36-.... 9.000 B 3VL57 63-2DE36-.... 9.000 B 3VL57 63-3DE36-.... 9.000
VL800 800 6500 B 3VL67 80-1DE36-.... 15.700 B 3VL67 80-2DE36-.... 15.700 B 3VL67 80-3DE36-.... 15.700
VL1250 1250 12000 B 3VL77 12-1DE36-.... 23.500 B 3VL77 12-2DE36-.... 23.500 B 3VL77 12-3DE36-.... 23.500
VL1600 1600 14400 B 3VL87 16-1DE30-.... 29.800 B 3VL87 16-2DE30-.... 29.800 B 3VL87 16-3DE30-.... 29.800
Pack size is one SENTRON VL circuit-breaker, i.e. 1 unit or a multiple thereof can be ordered.
For conversion into a plug-in or withdrawable version using the
base kit or the withdrawable version kit, see pages 4/9, 4/40 to
4/43.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/46 to 4/49).
For further versions, including for short-circuit and ground-fault
protection, see Pages 4/25 and 4/26.
1) See also 3K. switch disconnectors in Section 6. 3K. switch disconnectors
are also available with rear-mounting operating mechanism and leading
contacts.

4/24 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

3-pole

Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers, VL160 to VL1600, up to 1600 A,


electronic overcurrent trip units
Type Rated Setting current DT Standard switching DT High switching capacity H DT Very high switching capacity L
current of the inverse- capacity N 70 kA at 380/415 V AC 100 kA at 380/415 V AC
In time delayed 40/45/50 kA at 380/415 V AC
overload see Page 4/21.
release "L" Order No. Weight Order No. Weight Order No. Weight
IR per PU per PU
Order No. supple- Order No. supple- Order No. supplement per PU
ment required, see approx. ment required, see approx. required, see Page 4/34 approx.
Page 4/34 Page 4/34
A A kg kg kg
Circuit-breakers
with electronic overcurrent trip unit ETU
VL160 63 25- 63 B 3VL27 06-1@@33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 06-2@@33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 06-3@@33-.... 2.400
100
160
40- 100
64- 160
B
B
3VL27 10-1@@33-....
3VL27 16-1@@33-....
2.400
2.400
B
B
3VL27 10-2@@33-....
3VL27 16-2@@33-....
2.400
2.400
B
B
3VL27 10-3@@33-....
3VL27 16-3@@33-....
2.400
2.400 4
VL250 200 80- 200 B 3VL37 20-1@@36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 20-2@@36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 20-3@@36-.... 2.500
250 100- 250 B 3VL37 25-1@@36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 25-2@@36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 25-3@@36-.... 2.500
VL400 315 128- 315 B 3VL47 31-1@@36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 31-2@@36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 31-3@@36-.... 5.900
400 160- 400 B 3VL47 40-1@@36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 40-2@@36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 40-3@@36-.... 5.900
VL630 5003) 200- 500 B 3VL57 50-1@@36-.... 9.300 3) B 3VL57 50-2@@36-.... 9.300 3) B 3VL57 50-3@@36-.... 9.300 3)
6305) 252- 630 B 3VL57 63-1@@36-.... 9.300 5) B 3VL57 63-2@@36-.... 9.300 5) B 3VL57 63-3@@36-.... 9.300 5)
VL800 800 320- 800 B 3VL67 80-1@@36-.... 16.000 B 3VL67 80-2@@36-.... 16.000 B 3VL67 80-3@@36-.... 16.000
VL1250 1000 400-1000 B 3VL77 10-1@@36-.... 25.000 B 3VL77 10-2@@36-.... 25.000 B 3VL77 10-3@@36-.... 25.000
1250 500-1250 B 3VL77 12-1@@36-.... 25.000 B 3VL77 12-2@@36-.... 25.000 B 3VL77 12-3@@36-.... 25.000
VL1600 1600 640-1600 B 3VL87 16-1@@30-.... 31.300 B 3VL87 16-2@@30-.... 31.300 B 3VL87 16-3@@30-.... 31.300
Order No. Order No. Order No.
supple- supple- supple-
ETU trip unit, 3-pole version ments ments ments
L Motor protection with
LI function, ETU10M
up to 500 A (VL160 to VL630) A P 4) AP 4)
AP 4)

I System protection with LI function, AB AB


ETU10 AB
NSE0_00943

System protection with LIG function,


ETU12
L for 3-wire three-phase systems2) AC AC AC
for 4-wire three-phase systems1)2) AD AD AD
G I
System protection with LIG function,
NSE0_00693
ETU12
for direct detection of the ground-fault
current in the neutral point of the
transformer1) AJ AJ AJ
System and generator protection
L
with LSI function, ETU20 AE AE AE
S
I
NSE0_00692

L System and generator protection


with LSIG function, ETU22
S for 3-wire three-phase systems2) AG AG AG
for 4-wire three-phase systems1)2) AH AH AH
G I
NSE0_00694
System and generator protection
with LSIG function, ETU22
for direct detection in the neutral point
of the transformer1) AK AK AK
Motor protection with LI function
ETU30M
L up to 500 A (VL160 to VL630) AS AS AS
I
NSE0_00691

L = overload 1) External current transformer required in addition, see Pages 4/12 and 4/55.
S = short-circuit protection, short-time delayed 2) Vectorial summation current formation of the currents
I = short-circuit protection, instantaneous 3) Only for motor protection.
G = ground-fault protection 4) Not for VL800, VL1250, VL1600.
5) Not for motor protection.
Pack size is one SENTRON VL circuit-breaker, i.e. 1 unit or a multiple thereof can be ordered.
For conversion into a plug-in or withdrawable version using the For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
plug-in base kit or the withdrawable version kit, see Pages 4/9, mended in addition (see Pages 4/46 to 4/49).
4/40 to 4/43.

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/25


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

3-pole

Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers, VL160 to VL1600, up to 1600 A,


electronic overcurrent trip units
Type Rated Setting current DT Standard switching DT High switching capacity H DT Very high switching capacity L
current of the inverse- capacity N 70 kA at 380/415 V AC 100 kA at 380/415 V AC
In time delayed 40/45/50 kA at 380/415 V AC
overload see Page 4/21.
release "L" Order No. Weight Order No. Weight Order No. Weight
IR per PU per PU
Order No. supple- Order No. supple- Order No. supplement per PU
ment required, see approx. ment required, see approx. required, see Page 4/34 approx.
Page 4/34 Page 4/34
A A kg kg kg
Circuit-breakers
with electronic trip unit ETU
VL160 63 25- 63 B 3VL27 06-1@@33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 06-2@@33-.... 2.400 B 3VL27 06-3@@33-.... 2.400

4 100
160
40- 100
64- 160
B
B
3VL27 10-1@@33-....
3VL27 16-1@@33-....
2.400
2.400
B
B
3VL27 10-2@@33-....
3VL27 16-2@@33-....
2.400
2.400
B
B
3VL27 10-3@@33-....
3VL27 16-3@@33-....
2.400
2.400
VL250 200 80- 200 B 3VL37 20-1@@36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 20-2@@36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 20-3@@36-.... 2.500
250 100- 250 B 3VL37 25-1@@36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 25-2@@36-.... 2.500 B 3VL37 25-3@@36-.... 2.500
VL400 315 128- 315 B 3VL47 31-1@@36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 31-2@@36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 31-3@@36-.... 5.900
400 160- 400 B 3VL47 40-1@@36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 40-2@@36-.... 5.900 B 3VL47 40-3@@36-.... 5.900
VL630 5003) 250- 500 B 3VL57 50-1@@36-.... 9.300 3) B 3VL57 50-2@@36-.... 9.300 3) B 3VL57 50-3@@36-.... 9.300 3)
6305) 252- 630 B 3VL57 63-1@@36-.... 9.300 5) B 3VL57 63-2@@36-.... 9.300 5) B 3VL57 63-3@@36-.... 9.300 5)
VL800 800 320- 800 B 3VL67 80-1@@36-.... 16.000 B 3VL67 80-2@@36-.... 16.000 B 3VL67 80-3@@36-.... 16.000
VL1250 1000 400-1000 B 3VL77 10-1@@36-.... 25.000 B 3VL77 10-2@@36-.... 25.000 B 3VL77 10-3@@36-.... 25.000
1250 500-1250 B 3VL77 12-1@@36-.... 25.000 B 3VL77 12-2@@36-.... 25.000 B 3VL77 12-3@@36-.... 25.000
VL1600 1600 640-1600 B 3VL87 16-1@@30-.... 31.300 B 3VL87 16-2@@30-.... 31.300 B 3VL87 16-3@@30-.... 31.300
Order No. Order No. Order No.
supple- supple- supple-
ments ments ments
LCD ETU trip unit, 3-pole version

Motor protection with LI


L
function, ETU40M,
up to 500 A (VL160 to VL630) C P 4) C P 4) C P 4)
S
System protection with LI/LS/LSI
I function, ETU40 CH CH CH
NSE0_00696

System protection with LSIG function,


L
ETU42
S
for 3-wire three-phase systems2) CL CL CL
1 2
G I for 4-wire three-phase systems ) ) CM CM CM
NSE0_00697

L = overload 1) External current transformer required in addition, see Pages 4/12 and 4/55.
S = short-circuit protection, short-time delayed 2) Vectorial summation current formation of the currents
I = short-circuit protection, instantaneous 3) Only for motor protection.
G = ground-fault protection 4) Not for VL800, VL1250, VL1600.
5) Not for motor protection.
Pack size is one SENTRON VL circuit-breaker, i.e. 1 unit or a multiple thereof can be ordered.
For conversion into a plug-in or withdrawable version using the
base kit or the withdrawable version kit, see Pages 4/9, 4/40 to
4/43.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/46 to 4/49).

4/26 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

3-pole

Contact units (only in combination with overcurrent trip unit see below)
VL160 to VL1600, up to 1600 A
Type Rated current DT Standard switching capacity N DT High switching capacity H DT Very high switching capacity L
range 40/45/50 kA at 380/415 V AC 70 kA at 380/415 V AC 100 kA at 380/415 V AC
In see Page 4/21.
Order No. Weight Order No. Weight Order No. Weight
per PU per PU per PU
approx. approx. approx.
A kg kg kg
VL160 25- 160 B 3VL27 16-1AA31-0AA0 1.500 B 3VL27 16-2AA31-0AA0 1.500 B 3VL27 16-3AA31-0AA0 1.500
VL250 80- 250 B 3VL37 25-1AA34-0AA0 1.600 B 3VL37 25-2AA34-0AA0 1.600 B 3VL37 25-3AA34-0AA0 1.600
VL400 126- 400 B 3VL47 40-1AA34-0AA0 4.200 B 3VL47 40-2AA34-0AA0 4.200 B 3VL47 40-3AA34-0AA0 4.200
VL630 252- 630 B 3VL57 63-1AA36-0AA0 7.800 B 3VL57 63-2AA36-0AA0 7.800 B 3VL57 63-3AA36-0AA0 7.800
VL800 320- 800 B 3VL67 80-1AA36-0AA0 14.200 B 3VL67 80-2AA36-0AA0 14.200 B 3VL67 80-3AA36-0AA0 14.200
VL1250
VL1600
400-1250
640-1600
B
B
3VL77 12-1AA36-0AA0 21.000 B
3VL87 16-1AA30-0AA0 27.300 B
3VL77 12-2AA36-0AA0 21.000 B
3VL87 16-2AA30-0AA0 27.300 B
3VL77 12-3AA36-0AA0 21.000
3VL87 16-3AA30-0AA0 27.300
4
Overcurrent trip units (only in combination with contact unit see above)
ETU trip unit
For trip functions see 10th digit of the circuit-breaker Order No. on the previous pages.
For Setting current of the DT Order No.
circuit- inverse-time delayed
breakers overload release "L" IR
Type A
VL160 25- 63 B 3VL9 206-6@@32 x x x x x x x x x x
40- 100 B 3VL9 210-6@@32 x x x x x x x x x x
64- 160 B 3VL9 216-6@@32 x x x x x x x x x x
VL250 80- 200 B 3VL9 320-6@@35 x x x x x x x x x x
100- 250 B 3VL9 325-6@@35 x x x x x x x x x x
VL400 126- 315 B 3VL9 431-6@@35 x x x x x x x x x x
160- 400 B 3VL9 440-6@@35 x x x x x x x x x x
VL630 200- 500 B 3VL9 550-6@@30 x x
252- 630 B 3VL9 563-6@@30 x x x x x x x x
VL800 320- 800 B 3VL9 680-6@@30 x x x x x x x x
VL1250 400-1000 B 3VL9 710-6@@30 x x x x x x x x
500-1250 B 3VL9 712-6@@30 x x x x x x x x
VL1600 640-1600 B 3VL9 816-6@@30 x x x x x x x x

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
AP ) AB ) AC ) AD ) AJ ) AE ) AG ) AH ) AK ) AS 1)
Trip unit ETU10M ETU10 ETU12 ETU12 ETU12 ETU20 ETU22 ETU22 ETU22 ETU30M

LCD ETU trip unit


For trip functions see 10th digit of the circuit-breaker Order No. on the previous pages.
For circuit- Setting current of the DT Order No. When the overcurrent trip unit has
breakers inverse-time delayed been installed in the circuit-breaker, it
overload release "L" IR is recommended that it is tested
Type A using the manual testing unit for elec-
tronic trip units (see Pages 4/50 to
VL160 25- 63 B 3VL9 206-6@@32 x x x x 4/53).
40- 100 B 3VL9 210-6@@32 x x x x For conversion into a plug-in or with-
64- 160 B 3VL9 216-6@@32 x x x x drawable version using the base kit
or the withdrawable version kit,
VL250 80- 200 B 3VL9 320-6@@35 x x x x see Pages 4/9, 4/40 to 4/43.
100- 250 B 3VL9 325-6@@35 x x x x For degree of protection IP30, termi-
VL400 126- 315 B 3VL9 431-6@@35 x x x x nal covers are recommended in addi-
tion (see Pages 4/46 to 4/49).
160- 400 B 3VL9 440-6@@35 x x x x
When ordering trip units, insert the
VL630 200- 500 B 3VL9 550-6@@30 x
function specification in the Order
252- 630 B 3VL9 563-6@@30 x x x No.
VL800 320- 800 B 3VL9 680-6@@30 x x x
VL1250 400-1000 B 3VL9 710-6@@30 x x x
500-1250 B 3VL9 712-6@@30 x x x
VL1600 640-1600 B 3VL9 816-6@@30 x x x

1) CH1) CL1) CM 1)
CP
Trip unit ETU40M ETU40 ETU42 ETU42
x available
not available
Pack size is one SENTRON VL circuit-breaker, i.e. 1 unit or a multiple thereof can be ordered.
1) For description see Pages 4/13 to 4/15.

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/27


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

4-pole

Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers, VL160X to VL630, up to 630 A,


thermal-magnetic and electronic overcurrent trip units
Type Rated Setting Operating DT Standard switching DT High switching capacity H DT Very high switching capacity L
current current of current of capacity N 70 kA at 380/415 V AC 100 kA at 380/415 V AC
In inverse-time instanta- 40/45/50 kA at 380/415 V AC
delayed neous short- see Page 4/21.
overload circuit Order No. Weight Order No. Weight Order No. Weight
release "L" release "I"
IR Ii Order No. supplement per PU Order No. supple- per PU Order No. supplement per PU
required, see Page approx. ment required, see approx. required, see Page approx.
4/34 Page 4/34 4/34
A A A kg kg kg
Circuit-breakers for system protection, TM, LI function
with permanently set thermal overload releases, permanently set short-circuit releases,
without overload and short-circuit releases in the 4th pole (N)

4 NSE0_00695

VL160X 16 16 300 B 3VL17 96-1EH43-.... 2.300 B 3VL17 96-2EH43-.... 2.300


20 20 300 B 3VL17 02-1EH43-.... 2.300 B 3VL17 02-2EH43-.... 2.300
25 25 300 B 3VL17 25-1EH43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 25-2EH43-.... 2.500
32 32 300 B 3VL17 03-1EH43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 03-2EH43-.... 2.500
40 40 600 B 3VL17 04-1EH43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 04-2EH43-.... 2.500
50 50 600 B 3VL17 05-1EH43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 05-2EH43-.... 2.500
63 63 600 B 3VL17 06-1EH43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 06-2EH43-.... 2.500
80 80 1000 B 3VL17 08-1EH43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 08-2EH43-.... 2.500
100 100 1000 B 3VL17 10-1EH43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 10-2EH43-.... 2.500
125 125 1000 B 3VL17 12-1EH43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 12-2EH43-.... 2.500
160 160 1500 B 3VL17 16-1EH43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 16-2EH43-.... 2.500
Circuit-breakers for system protection, TM, LI function
with adjustable thermal overload releases, adjustable short-circuit releases,
without overload and short-circuit releases in the 4th pole (N)

NSE0_00704

VL160 50 40- 50 300- 600 B 3VL27 05-1EJ43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 05-2EJ43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 05-3EJ43-.... 3.000
63 50- 63 300- 600 B 3VL27 06-1EJ43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 06-2EJ43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 06-3EJ43-.... 3.000
80 63- 80 400- 800 B 3VL27 08-1EJ43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 08-2EJ43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 08-3EJ43-.... 3.000
100 80-100 500-1000 B 3VL27 10-1EJ43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 10-2EJ43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 10-3EJ43-.... 3.000
125 100-125 625-1250 B 3VL27 12-1EJ43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 12-2EJ43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 12-3EJ43-.... 3.000
160 125-160 800-1600 B 3VL27 16-1EJ43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 16-2EJ43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 16-3EJ43-.... 3.000
VL250 200 160-200 1000-2000 B 3VL37 20-1EJ46-.... 3.200 B 3VL37 20-2EJ46-.... 3.200 B 3VL37 20-3EJ46-.... 3.200
250 200-250 1250-2500 B 3VL37 25-1EJ46-.... 3.200 B 3VL37 25-2EJ46-.... 3.200 B 3VL37 25-3EJ46-.... 3.200
VL400 200 160-200 1000-2000 B 3VL47 20-1EJ46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 20-2EJ46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 20-3EJ46-.... 7.400
250 200-250 1250-2500 B 3VL47 25-1EJ46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 25-2EJ46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 25-3EJ46-.... 7.400
315 250-315 1575-3150 B 3VL47 31-1EJ46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 31-2EJ46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 31-3EJ46-.... 7.400
400 320-400 2000-4000 B 3VL47 40-1EJ46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 40-2EJ46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 40-3EJ46-.... 7.400
VL630 315 250-315 1575-3150 B 3VL57 31-1EJ46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 31-2EJ46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 31-3EJ46-.... 11.200
400 320-400 2000-4000 B 3VL57 40-1EJ46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 40-2EJ46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 40-3EJ46-.... 11.200
500 400-500 2500-5000 B 3VL57 50-1EJ46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 50-2EJ46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 50-3EJ46-.... 11.200
630 500-630 3250-6300 B 3VL57 63-1EJ46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 63-2EJ46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 63-3EJ46-.... 11.200
Pack size is one SENTRON VL circuit-breaker, i.e. 1 unit or a multiple thereof can be ordered.
For conversion into a plug-in or withdrawable version using the
base kit or the withdrawable version kit, see Pages 4/9, 4/40 to
4/43.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/46 to 4/49).

4/28 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

4-pole

Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers, VL160X to VL630, up to 630 A,


thermal-magnetic overcurrent trip units
Type Rated Setting Operating DT Standard switching DT High switching capacity H DT Very high switching capacity L
current current of current of capacity N 70 kA at 380/415 V AC 100 kA at 380/415 V AC
In inverse-time instanta- 40/45/50 kA at 380/415 V AC
delayed neous see Page 4/21.
overload short-cir- Order No. Weight Order No. Weight Order No. Weight
release "L" cuit release per PU per PU
IR "I" Order No. supple- Order No. supple- Order No. supplement per PU
ment required, see approx. ment required, see approx. required, see Page 4/34 approx.
Ii
Page 4/34 Page 4/34
A A A kg kg kg
Circuit-breakers for system protection, TM, LIN function
with permanently set thermal overload releases, permanently set short-circuit releases,
with "N" overload and short-circuit releases

NSE0_00695
4
VL160X 16 16 300 B 3VL17 96-1EA43-.... 2.300 B 3VL17 96-2EA43-.... 2.300
20 20 300 B 3VL17 02-1EA43-.... 2.300 B 3VL17 02-2EA43-.... 2.300
25 25 300 B 3VL17 25-1EA43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 25-2EA43-.... 2.500
32 32 300 B 3VL17 03-1EA43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 03-2EA43-.... 2.500
40 40 600 B 3VL17 04-1EA43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 04-2EA43-.... 2.500
50 50 600 B 3VL17 05-1EA43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 05-2EA43-.... 2.500
63 63 600 B 3VL17 06-1EA43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 06-2EA43-.... 2.500
80 80 1000 B 3VL17 08-1EA43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 08-2EA43-.... 2.500
100 100 1000 B 3VL17 10-1EA43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 10-2EA43-.... 2.500
125 125 1000 B 3VL17 12-1EA43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 12-2EA43-.... 2.500
160 160 1500 B 3VL17 16-1EA43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 16-2EA43-.... 2.500
Circuit-breakers for system protection, TM, LIN function
with adjustable thermal overload releases, adjustable short-circuit releases,
with "N" overload and short-circuit releases

NSE0_00704

VL160 50 40- 50 300- 600 B 3VL27 05-1EC43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 05-2EC43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 05-3EC43-.... 3.000
63 50- 63 300- 600 B 3VL27 06-1EC43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 06-2EC43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 06-3EC43-.... 3.000
80 63- 80 400- 800 B 3VL27 08-1EC43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 08-2EC43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 08-3EC43-.... 3.000
100 80-100 500-1000 B 3VL27 10-1EC43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 10-2EC43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 10-3EC43-.... 3.000
125 100-125 625-1250 B 3VL27 12-1EC43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 12-2EC43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 12-3EC43-.... 3.000
160 125-160 800-1600 B 3VL27 16-1EC43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 16-2EC43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 16-3EC43-.... 3.000
VL250 200 160-200 1000-2000 B 3VL37 20-1EC46-.... 3.200 B 3VL37 20-2EC46-.... 3.200 B 3VL37 20-3EC46-.... 3.200
250 200-250 1200-2500 B 3VL37 25-1EC46-.... 3.200 B 3VL37 25-2EC46-.... 3.200 B 3VL37 25-3EC46-.... 3.200
VL400 200 160-200 1000-2000 B 3VL47 20-1EC46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 20-2EC46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 20-3EC46-.... 7.400
250 200-250 1200-2500 B 3VL47 25-1EC46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 25-2EC46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 25-3EC46-.... 7.400
315 250-315 1575-3150 B 3VL47 31-1EC46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 31-2EC46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 31-3EC46-.... 7.400
400 320-400 2000-4000 B 3VL47 40-1EC46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 40-2EC46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 40-3EC46-.... 7.400
VL630 315 250-315 1575-3150 B 3VL57 31-1EC46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 31-2EC46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 31-3EC46-.... 11.200
400 320-400 2000-4000 B 3VL57 40-1EC46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 40-2EC46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 40-3EC46-.... 11.200
500 400-500 2500-5000 B 3VL57 50-1EC46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 50-2EC46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 50-3EC46-.... 11.200
630 500-630 3250-6300 B 3VL57 63-1EC46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 63-2EC46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 63-3EC46-.... 11.200

N = 100 % protection for In 100 A

N = 60 % protection for In 125 A

Pack size is one SENTRON VL circuit-breaker, i.e. 1 unit or a multiple thereof can be ordered.
For conversion into a plug-in or withdrawable version using the
base kit or the withdrawable version kit, see Pages 4/9, 4/40 to
4/43.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/46 to 4/49).

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/29


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

4-pole

Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers, VL160X to VL1600, up to 1600 A,


magnetic and electronic overcurrent trip units
Type Rated Setting Operating DT Standard switching DT High switching capacity H DT Very high switching capacity L
current current of current of capacity N 70 kA at 380/415 V AC 100 kA at 380/415 V AC
In inverse-time instanta- 40/45/50 kA at 380/415 V AC
delayed neous see Page 4/21.
overload short-cir- Order No. Weight Order No. Weight Order No. Weight
release "L" cuit release per PU per PU per PU
IR "I" Order No. supple- Order No. supple- Order No. supplement
ment required, see approx. ment required, see approx. required, see Page 4/34 approx.
Ii
Page 4/34 Page 4/34

A A A kg kg kg
Circuit-breakers for system and generator protection, ETU20, LSI function
for time-based discrimination (S function: Isd = 1.5 to 10 IR, tsd = 0 to 0.5 s),
without overload and short-circuit releases in the 4th pole (N)

4
NSE0_00922

VL160 63 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL27 06-1BE43-.... 3.100 B 3VL27 06-2BE43-.... 3.100 B 3VL27 06-3BE43-.... 3.100
100 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL27 10-1BE43-.... 3.100 B 3VL27 10-2BE43-.... 3.100 B 3VL27 10-3BE43-.... 3.100
160 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL27 16-1BE43-.... 3.100 B 3VL27 16-2BE43-.... 3.100 B 3VL27 16-3BE43-.... 3.100
VL250 200 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL37 20-1BE46-.... 3.300 B 3VL37 20-2BE46-.... 3.300 B 3VL37 20-3BE46-.... 3.300
250 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL37 25-1BE46-.... 3.300 B 3VL37 25-2BE46-.... 3.300 B 3VL37 25-3BE46-.... 3.300
VL400 315 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL47 31-1BE46-.... 7.600 B 3VL47 31-2BE46-.... 7.600 B 3VL47 31-3BE46-.... 7.600
400 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL47 40-1BE46-.... 7.600 B 3VL47 40-2BE46-.... 7.600 B 3VL47 40-3BE46-.... 7.600
VL630 630 0.4-1.0 In 10 In B 3VL57 63-1BE46-.... 11.700 B 3VL57 63-2BE46-.... 11.700 B 3VL57 63-3BE46-.... 11.700
VL800 800 0.4-1.0 In 8 In B 3VL67 80-1BE46-.... 20.500 B 3VL67 80-2BE46-.... 20.500 B 3VL67 80-3BE46-.... 20.500
VL1250 1000 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL77 10-1BE46-.... 33.500 B 3VL77 10-2BE46-.... 33.500 B 3VL77 10-3BE46-.... 33.500
1250 0.4-1.0 In 10 In B 3VL77 12-1BE46-.... 33.500 B 3VL77 12-2BE46-.... 33.500 B 3VL77 12-3BE46-.... 33.500
VL1600 1600 0.4-1.0 In 9 In B 3VL87 16-1BE40-.... 40.800 B 3VL87 16-2BE40-.... 40.800 B 3VL87 16-3BE40-.... 40.800
Circuit-breakers for system and generator protection, ETU20, LSIN function
for time-based discrimination (S function: Isd = 1.5 to 10 IR, tsd = 0 to 0.5 s),
with overload and short-circuit releases in the 4th pole (N): 50 %

NSE0_00922

VL160 63 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL27 06-1BF43-.... 3.100 B 3VL27 06-2BF43-.... 3.100 B 3VL27 06-3BF43-.... 3.100
100 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL27 10-1BF43-.... 3.100 B 3VL27 10-2BF43-.... 3.100 B 3VL27 10-3BF43-.... 3.100
160 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL27 16-1BF43-.... 3.100 B 3VL27 16-2BF43-.... 3.100 B 3VL27 16-3BF43-.... 3.100
VL250 200 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL37 20-1BF46-.... 3.300 B 3VL37 20-2BF46-.... 3.300 B 3VL37 20-3BF46-.... 3.300
250 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL37 25-1BF46-.... 3.300 B 3VL37 25-2BF46-.... 3.300 B 3VL37 25-3BF46-.... 3.300
VL400 315 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL47 31-1BF46-.... 7.600 B 3VL47 31-2BF46-.... 7.600 B 3VL47 31-3BF46-.... 7.600
400 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL47 40-1BF46-.... 7.600 B 3VL47 40-2BF46-.... 7.600 B 3VL47 40-3BF46-.... 7.600
VL630 630 0.4-1.0 In 10 In B 3VL57 63-1BF46-.... 11.700 B 3VL57 63-2BF46-.... 11.700 B 3VL57 63-3BF46-.... 11.700
VL800 800 0.4-1.0 In 8 In B 3VL67 80-1BF46-.... 20.500 B 3VL67 80-2BF46-.... 20.500 B 3VL67 80-3BF46-.... 20.500
VL1250 1000 0.4-1.0 In 11 In B 3VL77 10-1BF46-.... 33.500 B 3VL77 10-2BF46-.... 33.500 B 3VL77 10-3BF46-.... 33.500
1250 0.4-1.0 In 10 In B 3VL77 12-1BF46-.... 33.500 B 3VL77 12-2BF46-.... 33.500 B 3VL77 12-3BF46.... 33.500
VL1600 1600 0.4-1.0 In 9 In B 3VL87 16-1BF40-.... 40.800 B 3VL87 16-2BF40-.... 40.800 B 3VL87 16-3BF40-.... 40.800
Non-automatic circuit-breakers 1)
without overload release, with permanently set short-circuit release (for intrinsic protection only)

NSE0_00708

VL160X 100 1800 B 3VL17 10-1EE43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 10-2EE43-.... 2.500


160 1800 B 3VL17 16-1EE43-.... 2.500 B 3VL17 16-2EE43-.... 2.500
VL160 100 2500 B 3VL27 10-1EE43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 10-2EE43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 10-3EE43-.... 3.000
160 2500 B 3VL27 16-1EE43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 16-2EE43-.... 3.000 B 3VL27 16-3EE43-.... 3.000
VL250 250 3500 B 3VL37 25-1EE46-.... 3.200 B 3VL37 25-2EE46-.... 3.200 B 3VL37 25-3EE46-.... 3.200
VL400 400 5500 B 3VL47 40-1EE46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 40-2EE46-.... 7.400 B 3VL47 40-3EE46-.... 7.400
VL630 630 6300 B 3VL57 63-1EE46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 63-2EE46-.... 11.200 B 3VL57 63-3EE46-.... 11.200
VL800 800 6300 B 3VL67 80-1EE46-.... 19.900 B 3VL67 80-2EE46-.... 19.900 B 3VL67 80-3EE46-.... 19.900
VL1250 1250 12000 B 3VL77 12-1EE46-.... 31.000 B 3VL77 12-2EE46-.... 31.000 B 3VL77 12-3EE46-.... 31.000
VL1600 1600 14400 B 3VL87 16-1EE40-.... 38.300 B 3VL87 16-2EE40-.... 38.300 B 3VL87 16-3EE40-.... 38.300
Pack size is one SENTRON VL circuit-breaker, i.e. 1 unit or a multiple thereof can be ordered.
For conversion into a plug-in or withdrawable version using the 1) See also 3K. switch disconnectors in Section 6. 3K. switch disconnectors
base kit or the withdrawable version kit, see Pages 4/9, 4/40 to are also available with rear-mounting operating mechanism and leading
contacts.
4/43.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/46 to 4/49).

4/30 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

4-pole

Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers, VL160 to VL1600, VL1600 A,


electronic overcurrent trip units
Type Rated Setting current of DT Standard switching DT High switching capacity H DT Very high switching
current the inverse-time capacity N 70 kA at 380/415 V AC capacity L
In delayed overload 40/45/50 kA at 380/415 V AC 100 kA at 380/415 V AC
release "L" see Page 4/21.
IR Order No. Weight Order No. Weight Order No. Weight
Order No. supplement per PU Order No. supple- per PU Order No. supplement per PU
required, see Page approx. ment required, see approx. required, see Page approx.
4/34 Page 4/34 4/34
A A kg kg kg
Circuit-breakers
with electronic overcurrent trip unit ETU
VL160 63 25- 63 B 3VL27 06-1@@43-.... 3.100 B 3VL27 06-2@@43-.... 3.100 B 3VL27 06-3@@43-.... 3.100
100
160
40- 100
64- 160
B
B
3VL27 10-1@@43-....
3VL27 16-1@@43-....
3.100 B
3.100 B
3VL27 10-2@@43-....
3VL27 16-2@@43-....
3.100 B
3.100 B
3VL27 10-3@@43-....
3VL27 16-3@@43-....
3.100
3.100 4
VL250 200 80- 200 B 3VL37 20-1@@46-.... 3.300 B 3VL37 20-2@@46-.... 3.300 B 3VL37 20-3@@46-.... 3.300
250 100- 250 B 3VL37 25-1@@46-.... 3.300 B 3VL37 25-2@@46-.... 3.300 B 3VL37 25-3@@46-.... 3.300
VL400 315 128- 315 B 3VL47 31-1@@46-.... 7.600 B 3VL47 31-2@@46-.... 7.600 B 3VL47 31-3@@46-.... 7.600
400 160- 400 B 3VL47 40-1@@46-.... 7.600 B 3VL47 40-2@@46-.... 7.600 B 3VL47 40-3@@46-.... 7.600
VL630 630 252- 630 B 3VL57 63-1@@46-.... 11.700 B 3VL57 63-2@@46-.... 11.700 B 3VL57 63-3@@46-.... 11.700
VL800 800 320- 800 B 3VL67 80-1@@46-.... 20.500 B 3VL67 80-2@@46-.... 20.500 B 3VL67 80-3@@46-.... 20.500
VL1250 1000 400-1000 B 3VL77 10-1@@46-.... 33.500 B 3VL77 10-2@@46-.... 33.500 B 3VL77 10-3@@46-.... 33.500
1250 500-1250 B 3VL77 12-1@@46-.... 33.500 B 3VL77 12-2@@46-.... 33.500 B 3VL77 12-3@@46-.... 33.500
VL1600 1600 640-1600 B 3VL87 16-1@@40-.... 40.800 B 3VL87 16-2@@40-.... 40.800 B 3VL87 16-3@@40-.... 40.800
Order No. Order No. Order No.
supple- supple- supple-
ETU trip unit, 4-pole version ments ments ments
System protection with LI/LIN
function, ETU10
N pole not protected against overcurrent BB BB BB
L N pole protected against overcurrent (50 %) BA BA BA
I
NSE0_00691

System protection with LIG/LING


function, ETU12
Residual current for 4-wire three-phase
L
systems BC BC
I N pole not protected against overcurrent BC BD BD
G
N pole protected against overcurrent (50 %) BD
NSE0_00693

System protection with LSI/LSIN


L function, ETU20
N pole not protected against overcurrent BE BE BE
S N pole protected against overcurrent (50 %) BF BF BF
I
NSE0_00692

System protection with LSIG/LSING


L function, ETU22
Residual current for 4-wire three-phase
S systems
G I N pole not protected against overcurrent BG BG BG
N pole protected against overcurrent (50 %) BH BH BH
NSE0_00694

Pack size is one SENTRON VL circuit-breaker, i.e. 1 unit or a multiple thereof can be ordered.
For conversion into a plug-in or withdrawable version using the
base kit or the withdrawable version kit, see Pages 4/9, 4/40 to
4/43.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/46 to 4/49).

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/31


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

4-pole

Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers, VL160 to VL1600, up to 1600 A,


electronic overcurrent trip units
Type Rated Setting current of DT Standard switching DT High switching capacity H DT Very high switching
current the inverse-time capacity N 70 kA at 380/415 V AC capacity L
In delayed overload 40/45/50 kA at 380/415 V AC 100 kA at 380/415 V AC
release "L" see Page 4/21.
IR Order No. Weight Order No. Weight Order No. Weight
Order No. supplement per PU Order No. supple- per PU Order No. supplement per PU
required, see Page approx. ment required, see approx. required, see Page approx.
4/34 Page 4/34 4/34
A A kg kg kg
Circuit-breakers
with electronic overcurrent trip unit ETU
VL160 63 25- 63 B 3VL27 06-1@@43-.... 3.100 B 3VL27 06-2@@43-.... 3.100 B 3VL27 06-3@@43-.... 3.100

4 100
160
40- 100
64- 160
B
B
3VL27 10-1@@43-....
3VL27 16-1@@43-....
3.100 B
3.100 B
3VL27 10-2@@43-....
3VL27 16-2@@43-....
3.100 B
3.100 B
3VL27 10-3@@43-....
3VL27 16-3@@43-....
3.100
3.100
VL250 200 80- 200 B 3VL37 20-1@@46-.... 3.300 B 3VL37 20-2@@46-.... 3.300 B 3VL37 20-3@@46-.... 3.300
250 100- 250 B 3VL37 25-1@@46-.... 3.300 B 3VL37 25-2@@46-.... 3.300 B 3VL37 25-3@@46-.... 3.300
VL400 315 128- 315 B 3VL47 31-1@@46-.... 7.600 B 3VL47 31-2@@46-.... 7.600 B 3VL47 31-3@@46-.... 7.600
400 160- 400 B 3VL47 40-1@@46-.... 7.600 B 3VL47 40-2@@46-.... 7.600 B 3VL47 40-3@@46-.... 7.600
VL630 630 252- 630 B 3VL57 63-1@@46-.... 11.700 B 3VL57 63-2@@46-.... 11.700 B 3VL57 63-3@@46-.... 11.700
VL800 800 320- 800 B 3VL67 80-1@@46-.... 20.500 B 3VL67 80-2@@46-.... 20.500 B 3VL67 80-3@@46-.... 20.500
VL1250 1000 400-1000 B 3VL77 10-1@@46-.... 33.500 B 3VL77 10-2@@46-.... 33.500 B 3VL77 10-3@@46-.... 33.500
1250 500-1250 B 3VL77 12-1@@46-.... 33.500 B 3VL77 12-2@@46-.... 33.500 B 3VL77 12-3@@46-.... 33.500
VL1600 1600 640-1600 B 3VL87 16-1@@40-.... 40.800 B 3VL87 16-2@@40-.... 40.800 B 3VL87 16-3@@40-.... 40.800
Order No. Order No. Order No.
supple- supple- supple-
ments ments ments
LCD ETU trip unit, 4-pole version
System protection with LI/LSI/LIN/LSIN
L function, ETU40 CJ CJ CJ
N pole: protection adjustable
S (50 100 %) or
I disconnectable (0 %)
Factory preset at 50 %
NSE0_00696

System protection with LSIG/LSING


L function, ETU42 CN CN CN
for 4-wire three-phase systems
S N pole: protection adjustable
(50 100 %) or
G I
disconnectable (0 %)
NSE0_00697 Factory preset at 50 %
Pack size is one SENTRON VL circuit-breaker, i.e. 1 unit or a multiple thereof can be ordered.
For conversion into a plug-in or withdrawable version using the
base kit or the withdrawable version kit, see Pages 4/9, 4/40 to
4/43.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/46 to 4/49).

4/32 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

4-pole

Contact units (only in combination with overcurrent trip unit see below)
VL160 to VL1600, up to 1600 A
Type Rated current DT Standard switching capacity N DT High switching capacity H DT Very high switching capacity L
In 40/45/50 kA at 380/415 V AC 70 kA at 380/415 V AC 100 kA at 380/415 V AC
see Page 4/21.
Switching all poles Weight Switching all poles Weight Switching all poles Weight
Order No. per PU Order No. per PU Order No. per PU
approx. approx. approx.
A kg kg kg
VL160 25- 160 B 3VL27 16-1AA41-0AA0 2.000 B 3VL27 16-2AA41-0AA0 2.000 B 3VL27 16-3AA41-0AA0 2.000
VL250 80- 250 B 3VL37 25-1AA44-0AA0 2.200 B 3VL37 25-2AA44-0AA0 2.200 B 3VL37 25-3AA44-0AA0 2.200
VL400 128- 400 B 3VL47 40-1AA44-0AA0 5.500 B 3VL47 40-2AA44-0AA0 5.500 B 3VL47 40-3AA44-0AA0 5.500
VL630 252- 630 B 3VL57 63-1AA46-0AA0 9.700 B 3VL57 63-2AA46-0AA0 9.700 B 3VL57 63-3AA46-0AA0 9.700

4
VL800 320- 800 B 3VL67 80-1AA46-0AA0 18.200 B 3VL67 80-2AA46-0AA0 18.200 B 3VL67 80-3AA46-0AA0 18.200
VL1250 400-1250 B 3VL77 12-1AA46-0AA0 27.500 B 3VL77 12-2AA46-0AA0 27.500 B 3VL77 12-3AA46-0AA0 27.500
VL1600 640-1600 B 3VL87 16-1AA40-0AA0 34.800 B 3VL87 16-2AA40-0AA0 34.800 B 3VL87 16-3AA40-0AA0 34.800

Overcurrent trip units


(only in combination with contact unit see above)
ETU trip unit
For trip functions see 10th digit of the circuit-breaker Order No. on the previous pages.
For circuit- Setting current of the DT Order No.
breakers inverse-time delayed
overload release "L" IR
Type A left pole = N
VL160 25- 63 B 3VL9 206-6@@42 x x x x x x x x
40- 100 B 3VL9 210-6@@42 x x x x x x x x
64- 160 B 3VL9 216-6@@42 x x x x x x x x
VL250 80- 200 B 3VL9 320-6@@45 x x x x x x x x
100- 250 B 3VL9 325-6@@45 x x x x x x x x
VL400 126- 315 B 3VL9 431-6@@45 x x x x x x x x
160- 400 B 3VL9 440-6@@45 x x x x x x x x
VL630 252- 630 B 3VL9 563-6@@40 x x x x x x x x
VL800 320- 800 B 3VL9 680-6@@40 x x x x x x x x
VL1250 400-1000 B 3VL9 710-6@@40 x x x x x x x x
500-1250 B 3VL9 712-6@@40 x x x x x x x x
VL1600 640-1600 B 3VL9 816-6@@40 x x x x x x x x

1)
BB BA 1) BC 1) BD1) BE 1) BF1) BG 1) BH 1)
Trip unit ETU10 ETU10 ETU12 ETU12 ETU20 ETU20 ETU22 ETU22

LCD ETU trip unit


For trip functions see 10th digit of the circuit-breaker Order No. on the previous pages.
For circuit- Setting current of the DT Order No. When the overcurrent trip unit has been
breakers inverse-time delayed installed in the circuit-breaker, it is recom-
overload release "L" IR mended that it is tested using the manual
Type A left pole = N testing unit for electronic trip units (see
Pages 4/50 to 4/53).
VL160 25- 63 B 3VL9 206-6@@42 x x
For conversion into a plug-in or withdraw-
40- 100 B 3VL9 210-6@@42 x x able version using the base kit or the with-
64- 160 B 3VL9 216-6@@42 x x drawable version kit, see Pages 4/9, 4/40 to
4/43.
VL250 80- 200 B 3VL9 320-6@@45 x x
For degree of protection IP30, terminal cov-
100- 250 B 3VL9 325-6@@45 x x ers are recommended in addition
VL400 126- 315 B 3VL9 431-6@@45 x x (see Pages 4/46 to 4/49).
160- 400 B 3VL9 440-6@@45 x x When ordering trip units, insert the function
specification in the Order No.
VL630 252- 630 B 3VL9 563-6@@40 x x
ETU N-pole trip unit set to
VL800 320- 800 B 3VL9 680-6@@40 x x
100 % IR = 26 A to 100 A and
VL1250 400-1000 B 3VL9 710-6@@40 x x 50 % 110 A to 1600 A
500-1250 B 3VL9 712-6@@40 x x LCD trip unit N protection selectable
VL1600 640-1600 B 3VL9 816-6@@40 x x On/Off factory preset: 50 %

CJ1) CN1)
Trip unit ETU40 ETU42
x available
not available
Pack size is one SENTRON VL circuit-breaker, i.e. 1 unit or a multiple thereof can be ordered.
1) For description see Pages 4/13 to 4/15.

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/33


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Options

Selection and ordering data


1st Order No. supplement:
undervoltage or shunt releases,
wiring directly to accessories
Rated control supply voltage Order No. supplement Circuit-breaker
Us/frequency Type
AC 50/60 Hz 3VL . . . . - . . . . . -@@. . VL160X VL160/VL2501) VL400 VL630 to VL1600
DC

Without auxiliary release 0A x x x x


With undervoltage release
right pole only
AC V DC V

4

12
24
2N
2P
x
x
x1)
x1)
x
x
x
x
48 2U x x1) x x
60 2V x x1) x x
110-127 2R x x1) x x
220-250 2S x x1) x x
110-127 2G x x1) x x
220-250 2H x x1) x x
208 2M x x1) x x
277 2Q x x1) x x
380-415 2J x x1) x x
440-480 2K x x1) x x
500-525 2L x x1) x x
600 2T x x1) x x
With shunt release
right pole only
AC V DC V
24 8C x x1) x x
48-60 8J x x1) x x
110-127 8K x x1) x x
220-250 8Q x x1) x x
48-60 8M x x1) x x
110-127 8R x x1) x x
208-277 8T x x1) x x
380-600 8V x x1) x x

2nd Order No. supplement:


auxiliary switches (HS) and alarm switches (AS),
left/right pole,
wiring directly to accessories
Complement Order No. supplement Circuit-breaker
Type
HS = 1 NO or 1 NC switching ele- 3VL . . . . - . . . . . -. . @@ VL160X VL160/VL250 VL400 VL630 to VL1600
ment
AS = 1 NO switching element

Without auxiliary/alarm switch A0 x x x x


2 HS (1 NO/1 NC) B1 x2) x2) x
4 HS (2 NO/2 NC) C1 x
1 AS (1 NO) G1 x2) x2) x
2 HS (1 NO/1 NC) + 1 AS (1 NO) D1 x2) x2) x
2 HS (1 NO/1 NC) + 1 AS (1 NO) E1 x
x available
not available
1) For VL160/VL250 circuit-breakers with electronic overcurrent trip units, the
only option is one undervoltage release or shunt release, or one auxil-
iary/alarm switch combination.
2) Except for mounting in the left accessory sub-section of the SENTRON
VL160X circuit-breakers with RCD module and the SENTRON VL160,
VL250 circuit-breakers with electronic overcurrent trip units, since this sub-
section is occupied by the tripping solenoid.
On the right-hand side it is only possible to install an auxiliary release or an
auxiliary/alarm switch combination (see also Page 4/11). For this applica-
tion only, a 3SB adapter can be installed in the N pole (for 4-pole circuit-
breakers only).

4/34 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Options

When ordering, add "Z" to the complete Order No. Order code Order No. with "Z"
and add the relevant order code(s). 1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3VL . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z
and additional order code(s)
@@@ + . . . + . . .
Identification code for
further versions Z
For fixed-mounted circuit-breakers (wired in factory)
Wiring for internal accessories VL160X to VL1600
(auxiliary switches, alarm switches, auxiliary
releases not included in scope of supply) @@@


with connecting leads (2 m long)
brought out at the rear
Wiring for motorized operating mecha- VL160X to VL1600
nism

4
(motorized operating mechanism nor @@@


included in scope of supply, to order see
Pages 4/40 to 4/43) with connecting leads
(2 m long), brought out at the top on VL160X
to VL400, or brought out at the right on
VL630 to VL1600
Motorized operating mechanism VL160X, VL160, VL250
(AC/DC 220-250 V) VL400
mounted on the circuit-breaker VL630, VL800


(motorized operating mechanism included VL1250, VL1600 @@@
in scope of supply)
Wiring for internal accessories of the cir-
cuit-breaker (auxiliary switches, alarm
switches, auxiliary releases not included in
scope of supply) with connecting leads (2 m
long) brought out at the rear

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/35


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

Selection and ordering data


Wiring directly at accessories DT For VL160X to VL400 DT For VL630 to VL1600
Order No. PS* Weight Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.

3- or 4-pole kg kg
Auxiliary switches and auxiliary releases
For retrofitting (for possible complements see figure on Page 4/11)
Auxiliary switches (HS) and alarm
switches (AS)
for retrofitting
Kits Mounting side

4
2 HS (1 NO + 1 NC) N, left1), right B 3VL9 400-2AB00 1 unit 0.073
4 HS (2 NO + 2 NC) N, left, right B 3VL9 800-2AC00 1 unit 0.094
2 HS (1 NC + 1 NO) left, right3) B 3VL9 400-2AD00 1 unit 0.111
NSE0_00684
+ 1 AS (1 NO)
(kit) left B 3VL9 800-2AE00 1 unit 0.092
1 AS left1), right3) B 3VL9 400-2AG00 1 unit 0.071
(1 NC + 1 NO)4)
Additional switching elements For Group 1 see Page 4/37. For Group 2 see Page 4/37.
Shunt releases 2)
for retrofitting
AC V DC V
24 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1SC00 1 unit 0.120 B 3VL9 800-1SC00 1 unit 0.175
48-60 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1SJ00 1 unit 0.116 B 3VL9 800-1SJ00 1 unit 0.180
110-127 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1SK00 1 unit 0.119 B 3VL9 800-1SK00 1 unit 0.177
220-250 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1SQ00 1 unit 0.133 B 3VL9 800-1SQ00 1 unit 0.163
48-60 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1SM00 1 unit 0.124 B 3VL9 800-1SM00 1 unit 0.162
110-127 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1SR00 1 unit 0.116 B 3VL9 800-1SR00 1 unit 0.196
208-277 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1ST00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VL9 800-1ST00 1 unit 0.183
380-600 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1SV00 1 unit 0.138 B 3VL9 800-1SV00 1 unit 0.181
Undervoltage releases
for retrofitting
NSE0_00678

AC V DC V
12 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1UN00 1 unit 0.128 B 3VL9 800-1UN00 1 unit 0.169
24 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1UP00 1 unit 0.118 B 3VL9 800-1UP00 1 unit 0.147
48 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1UU00 1 unit 0.135 B 3VL9 800-1UU00 1 unit 0.170
60 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1UV00 1 unit 0.131 B 3VL9 800-1UV00 1 unit 0.166
110-127 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1UG00 1 unit 0.138 B 3VL9 800-1UG00 1 unit 0.160
110-127 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1UR00 1 unit 0.129 B 3VL9 800-1UR00 1 unit 0.168
208 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1UM00 1 unit 0.120 B 3VL9 800-1UM00 1 unit 0.178
220-250 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1UH00 1 unit 0.121 B 3VL9 800-1UH00 1 unit 0.132
220-250 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1US00 1 unit 0.136 B 3VL9 800-1US00 1 unit 0.172
277 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1UQ00 1 unit 0.131 B 3VL9 800-1UQ00 1 unit 0.166
380-415 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1UJ00 1 unit 0.119 B 3VL9 800-1UJ00 1 unit 0.158
440-480 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1UK00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VL9 800-1UK00 1 unit 0.172
500-525 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1UL00 1 unit 0.120 B 3VL9 800-1UL00 1 unit 0.172
600 right pole only B 3VL9 400-1UT00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VL9 800-1UT00 1 unit 0.168
Time-delay device for
undervoltage release
(DC 220-250 V)
Rated control supply voltage Us
AC/DC 220 V250 V
Delay time
> 200 ms A 3TX4 701-0AN1 1 unit 0.169 A 3TX4 701-0AN1 1 unit 0.169
1) Except for mounting in the left accessory sub-section of the SENTRON
VL160X circuit-breakers with RCD module and the SENTRON VL160,
VL250 circuit-breakers with electronic overcurrent trip units, since this sub-
section is occupied by the tripping solenoid.
For this application only, a 3SB adapter can be installed in the N pole (for
4-pole circuit-breakers only).
2) In the case of VL160X to VL400:
shunt release with disconnection contact (3SB3 for ON/OFF position) not
isolated (see Page 4/128).
3) In the case of VL400:
unsuitable for mounting in the right-hand accessory sub-section.
The 3VL9 400-2AB00 installation kit with auxiliary switches only is recom-
mended.
4) A switching element can be mounted.

4/36 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts
3SB adapters and 3SB switching elements
For circuit- Maximum DT For fitting PS* Weight DT For fitting PS* Weight DT For fitting in the PS* Weight
breakers combination of in the N-pole of per PU in the left pole of per PU right pole of a per PU
auxiliary a circuit-breaker approx. a circuit-breaker approx. circuit-breaker approx.
switches (HS)
Type and alarm Order No. kg Order No. kg Order No. kg
switches (AS)
Mounting adapters for auxiliary and alarm switch combinations
VL160X, up to 3 HS1) B 3VL9 400-2AH00 1 unit 0.073 B 3VL9 400-2AH00 1 unit 0.073 B 3VL9 400-2AH00 1 unit 0.073
VL160,
VL250 2 HS + 1 AS1) 2) B 3VL9 400-2AJ10 1 unit 0.073 B 3VL9 400-2AJ202) 1 unit 0.056
VL400
VL630, up to 4 HS B 3VL9 816-2AL00 1 unit 0.075 B 3VL9 816-2AL00 1 unit 0.075 B 3VL9 816-2AL00 1 unit 0.075
VL800,
VL1250,
VL1600 2 HS + 2 AS B 3VL9 816-2AN10 1 unit 0.072
1) Except for mounting in the left pole for SENTRON VL160X circuit-breakers
with RCD module and SENTRON VL160, VL250 circuit-breakers with elec-
4
tronic overcurrent trip unit.
On the right-hand side it is only possible to install an auxiliary release or an
auxiliary/alarm switch combination (see also Page 4/11).
For this application only, a 3SB adapter can be installed in the N pole (for
4-pole circuit-breakers only).
2) In the case of VL400: 3VL9 400-2AJ20 unsuitable for mounting in the right-
hand accessory sub-section.

For auxiliary/alarm switches DT Circuit-breaker PS* Weight


Type per PU
approx.
VL160X to VL1600
Order No. kg
Switching elements for auxiliary and alarm switch combinations
1 NO B 3SB34 00-0J 1 unit 0.010
1 NC B 3SB34 00-0K 1 unit 0.010

For auxiliary switch or alarm switch combinations not included in Note:


the kits provided as standard, the mounting adapters specified a maximum of 6 switching elements (HS)
in the above table can be ordered separately together with the per circuit-breaker (VL160X, VL160, VL250, VL400)
required switching elements: and a maximum of 8 switching elements (HS)
1 HS or 1 AS with NO contact 3SB34 00-0J per circuit-breaker (VL630, VL800, VL1250, VL1600)
1 HS or 1 AS with NC contact 3SB34 00-0K are possible.
4 3SB3 auxiliary switching elements and one mounting adapter
(right), suitable for VL630, VL800, VL1250, VL1600 circuit-break-
ers.

NSE0_00684

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/37


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL160X to VL250


DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU
approx.

3- or 4-pole kg
Operating mechanisms
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism1)
for direct mounting on the circuit-breaker,
NSE0_00679

without leading auxiliary switch,


degree of protection IP302), black,
max. 3 padlocks B 3VL9 300-3HA00 1 unit 0.618
EMERGENCY-STOP version
red knob, yellow indicator plate B 3VL9 300-3HC00 1 unit 0.618
Safety locks for installation by the

4
customer, see Pages 4/50 to 4/53.

Door-coupling rotary mechanism, complete1)


Installation in doors and covers
Degree of protection IP65, incl. black
selector switch with masking frame, indicator plate,
removable door coupling,
NSE0_00711 300 mm extension shaft and front-operated rotary operat-
ing mechanism for the relevant
circuit-breaker, lockable with up to
3 padlocks, with door interlocking B 3VL9 300-3HF04 1 unit 0.965
EMERGENCY-STOP version
red selector switch, yellow indicator plate,
without leading auxiliary switches B 3VL9 300-3HG04 1 unit 0.980
Safety locks for installation by the
customer, see Pages 4/50 to 4/53.

Leading auxiliary switches


for installation in a front-operated rotary mechanism or
NSE0_00712

door-coupling rotary operating mechanism


Standard or EMERGENCY-STOP version
"OFF after ON"
leading auxiliary switch when switching on
1 changeover contact with 1.5 m long leads B 3VL9 300-3AS10 1 unit 0.070
2 changeover contacts with 1.5 m long leads B 3VL9 300-3AT10 1 unit 0.120
"ON after OFF"
leading auxiliary switch when switching off
1 changeover contact with 1.5 m long leads B 3VL9 300-3AU10 1 unit 0.080
2 changeover contacts with 1.5 m long leads B 3VL9 300-3AW10 1 unit 0.130

Retaining bracket B 3VL9 300-3HP02 1 unit 0.435


Retaining bracket is mounted on the operating mecha-
nism, recommended for extension shafts >250 mm

Rotary operating mechanism with shaft end, B 3VL9 300-3HE00 1 unit 0.537
without selector switch
without leading auxiliary switch,
for auxiliary switches see above

1) Not possible on VL160X with RCD module.


2) IP40 with additional masking frame mounted on the door cut-out.

4/38 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL400 For VL630 to VL800 For VL1250 to VL1600


DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU per PU
approx. approx. approx.
kg kg kg

B 3VL9 400-3HA00 1 unit 0.618 B 3VL9 600-3HA00 1 unit 1.370 B 3VL9 800-3HA00 1 unit 1.370

B 3VL9 400-3HC00 1 unit 0.618 B 3VL9 600-3HC00 1 unit 1.360 B 3VL9 800-3HC00 1 unit 1.370

B 3VL9 400-3HF04 1 unit 0.965 B 3VL9 600-3HF04 1 unit 2.460 B 3VL9 800-3HF04 1 unit 4.100

B 3VL9 400-3HG04 1 unit 1.100 B 3VL9 600-3HG04 1 unit 2.460 B 3VL9 800-3HG04 1 unit 4.100

B 3VL9 400-3AS10 1 unit 0.070 B 3VL9 600-3AS10 1 unit 0.097 B 3VL9 800-3AS10 1 unit 0.090
B 3VL9 400-3AT10 1 unit 0.120 B 3VL9 600-3AT10 1 unit 0.146 B 3VL9 800-3AT10 1 unit 0.145

B 3VL9 400-3AU10 1 unit 0.070 B 3VL9 600-3AU10 1 unit 0.082 B 3VL9 800-3AU10 1 unit 0.098
B 3VL9 400-3AW10 1 unit 0.120 B 3VL9 600-3AW10 1 unit 0.143 B 3VL9 800-3AW10 1 unit 0.143

B 3VL9 400-3HP02 1 unit 0.435 B 3VL9 600-3HP02 1 unit 0.570 B 3VL9 800-3HP02 1 unit 0.723

B 3VL9 400-3HE00 1 unit 0.618 B 3VL9 600-3HE00 1 unit 1.250 B 3VL9 800-3HE00 1 unit 2.760

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/39


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL160X to VL250


DT Order No. PS* Weight per
PU approx.
3- or 4-pole kg
Operating mechanisms
Motorized operating mechanism1) with spring
Degree of protection IP30, with locking device energy store
for 3 padlocks t E < 100 ms
AC 50/60 Hz V DC V
NSE0_00716

24 B 3VL9 300-3MJ00 1 unit 2.510


42-48 42-48 B 3VL9 300-3ML00 1 unit 2.500
60 60 B 3VL9 300-3MS00 1 unit 2.530
110-127 110-127 B 3VL9 300-3MN00 1 unit 2.530
220-250 220-250 B 3VL9 300-3MQ00 1 unit 2.530

4
with integrated safety lock2)
24 B 3VL9 321-3MK00 1 unit 2.530
42-48 42-48 B 3VL9 321-3MM00 1 unit 2.570
60 60 B 3VL9 321-3MT00 1 unit 2.530
110-127 110-127 B 3VL9 321-3MP00 1 unit 2.530
220-250 220-250 B 3VL9 321-3MR00 1 unit 2.560

For VL160X For VL160


DT Order No. PS* Weight per DT Order No. PS* Weight per
PU approx. PU approx.
3- or 4-pole kg kg
Plug-in version/withdrawable version
Plug-in base installation kit
complete with baseplate, base, blade con-
tacts for switches, terminal covers for degree
of protection IP20, fixing screws, locking pin
Rear terminals
NSE0_00717

3-pole B 3VL9 100-4PA30 1 unit 2.610 B 3VL9 200-4PA30 1 unit 2.660


3-pole with RCD module B 3VL9 100-4PB30 1 unit 3.000 B 3VL9 200-4PB30 1 unit 2.990
4-pole B 3VL9 100-4PA40 1 unit 3.270 B 3VL9 200-4PA40 1 unit 3.290
4-pole with RCD module B 3VL9 100-4PB40 1 unit 3.790 B 3VL9 200-4PB40 1 unit 3.750
90 angle connecting adapter
for rear connection, 3-pole B 3VL9 300-4PE30 1 unit 0.391 B 3VL9 300-4PE30 1 unit 0.391
for rear connection, 4-pole B 3VL9 300-4PE40 1 unit 0.515 B 3VL9 300-4PE40 1 unit 0.515
Front-accessible terminals
3-pole B 3VL9 100-4PC30 1 unit 2.410 B 3VL9 200-4PC30 1 unit 2.450
3-pole with RCD module B 3VL9 100-4PD30 1 unit 2.810 B 3VL9 200-4PD30 1 unit 2.480
4-pole B 3VL9 100-4PC40 1 unit 2.940 B 3VL9 200-4PC40 1 unit 3.000
4-pole with RCD module B 3VL9 100-4PD40 1 unit 3.500 B 3VL9 200-4PD40 1 unit 3.490
NSE00581 Withdrawable version installation kit
Upgrade of the plug-in base kit to
Withdrawable version 3-pole B 3VL9 300-4WF30 1 unit 2.730
including side walls 3-pole with RCD B 3VL9 300-4WG30 1 unit 2.740
and racking mecha- 4-pole B 3VL9 300-4WF40 1 unit 2.740
nism. 4-pole with RCD B 3VL9 300-4WG40 1 unit 3.550
Withdrawable version
Same as plug-in base kit, with additional side
NSE0_00719

walls and racking mechanism


Rear terminals
3-pole B 3VL9 200-4WA30 1 unit 5.230
3-pole with RCD module B 3VL9 200-4WB30 1 unit 6.300
4-pole B 3VL9 200-4WA40 1 unit 5.830
4-pole with RCD module B 3VL9 200-4WB40 1 unit 6.910
Front-accessible terminals
3-pole B 3VL9 200-4WC30 1 unit 4.980
3-pole with RCD module B 3VL9 200-4WD30 1 unit 6.040
NSE0_00683

4-pole B 3VL9 200-4WC40 1 unit 5.560


4-pole with RCD module B 3VL9 200-4WD40 1 unit 6.730
Auxiliary circuit plug connection for plug-in
base
Accessory connections for plug-in circuit-
breakers (factory-wired connectors) and for
plug-in bases or withdrawable version (cou-
3 3
pling with screw connection) ) )
8 positions B 3VL9 300-4PJ00 1 unit 0.285 B 3VL9 300-4PJ00 1 unit 0.285
Position signaling switch
(connected/disconnected position)
for plug-in/withdrawable base, 1 changeover
contact, max. 2 signaling switches possible B 3VL9 000-4WL00 1 unit 0.040 B 3VL9 000-4WL00 1 unit 0.040
1) Not possible on VL160X with RCD module.
2) For safety lock as an installation kit for retrofitting, see Pages 4/50
to 4/53.
3) It is recommended to use a maximum of 2 auxiliary circuit plug-in systems
per circuit-breaker (16 positions).

4/40 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL400
DT Order No. PS* Weight per
PU approx.
kg

with spring energy


store
t E < 100 ms

B 3VL9 400-3MJ00 1 unit 2.510


B 3VL9 400-3ML00 1 unit 2.510
B 3VL9 400-3MS00 1 unit 2.510
B 3VL9 400-3MN00 1 unit 2.510
B 3VL9 400-3MQ00 1 unit 2.510

B
B
3VL9 415-3MK00
3VL9 415-3MM00
1 unit
1 unit
2.530
2.530
4
B 3VL9 415-3MT00 1 unit 2.530
B 3VL9 415-3MP00 1 unit 2.530
B 3VL9 415-3MR00 1 unit 2.530

For VL250 For VL400


DT Order No. PS* Weight per DT Order No. PS* Weight per
PU approx. PU approx.
kg kg

B 3VL9 300-4PA30 1 unit 3.400 B 3VL9 400-4PA30 1 unit 3.400


B 3VL9 300-4PB30 1 unit 3.120 B 4)
B 3VL9 300-4PA40 1 unit 3.400 B 3VL9 400-4PA40 1 unit 3.400
B 3VL9 300-4PB40 1 unit 3.890 B 3VL9 400-4PB40 1 unit 3.890

B 3VL9 300-4PE30 1 unit 0.391 B


B 3VL9 300-4PE40 1 unit 0.515 B

B 3VL9 300-4PC30 1 unit 2.550 B 3VL9 400-4PC30 1 unit 2.450


B 3VL9 300-4PD30 1 unit 2.970 B 4)
B 3VL9 300-4PC40 1 unit 2.660 B 3VL9 400-4PC40 1 unit 3.000
B 3VL9 300-4PD40 1 unit 3.650 B 3VL9 400-4PD40 1 unit 3.490

B 3VL9 300-4WF30 1 unit 2.730 B 3VL9 400-4WF30 1 unit 2.730


B 3VL9 300-4WG30 1 unit 2.740 B 4)
B 3VL9 300-4WF40 1 unit 2.740 B 3VL9 400-4WF40 1 unit 2.740
B 3VL9 300-4WG40 1 unit 3.550 B 3VL9 400-4WG40 1 unit 3.550

B 3VL9 300-4WA30 1 unit 5.190 B 3VL9 400-4WA30 1 unit 5.230


B 3VL9 300-4WB30 1 unit 9.800 B 4)
B 3VL9 300-4WA40 1 unit 6.040 B 3VL9 400-4WA40 1 unit 5.830
B 3VL9 300-4WB40 1 unit 7.490 B 3VL9 400-4WB40 1 unit 6.910

B 3VL9 300-4WC30 1 unit 5.100 B 3VL9 400-4WC30 1 unit 4.980


B 3VL9 300-4WD30 1 unit 6.240 B 4)
B 3VL9 300-4WC40 1 unit 5.710 B 3VL9 400-4WC40 1 unit 5.560
B 3VL9 300-4WD40 1 unit 6.890 B 3VL9 400-4WD40 1 unit 6.730

3 5
) )

B 3VL9 300-4PJ00 1 unit 0.285 B 3VL9 400-4PJ00 1 unit on req.

B 3VL9 000-4WL00 1 unit 0.040 B 3VL9 000-4WL00 1 unit 0.040


4) For 3-pole applications please use 4-pole withdrawable version 5) It is recommended to use a maximum of 3 auxiliary circuit plug-in systems per
with 4-pole RCD module. circuit-breaker (24 positions).

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/41


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL630 to VL800


DT Order No. PS* Weight per
PU approx.
3- or 4-pole kg
Operating mechanisms
Motorized operating mechanism1) with spring
Degree of protection IP30, with locking energy store
device for 3 padlocks t E < 100 ms
NSE0_00716

AC 50/60 Hz V DC V
24 B 3VL9 600-3MJ00 1 unit 5.480
42-48 42-48 B 3VL9 600-3ML00 1 unit 5.480

4
60 60 B 3VL9 600-3MS00 1 unit 5.470
110-127 110-127 B 3VL9 600-3MN00 1 unit 5.470
220-250 220-250 B 3VL9 600-3MQ00 1 unit 5.460
with integrated safety lock2)
24 B 3VL9 615-3MK00 1 unit 5.620
42-48 42-48 B 3VL9 615-3MM00 1 unit 5.600
60 60 B 3VL9 615-3MT00 1 unit 5.570
110-127 110-127 B 3VL9 615-3MP00 1 unit 5.580
220-250 220-250 B 3VL9 615-3MR00 1 unit 5.640

For VL630 For VL800


DT Order No. PS* Weight per DT Order No. PS* Weight per
PU approx. PU approx.
3- or 4-pole kg kg
Plug-in version/withdrawable version
Plug-in base installation kit
complete with baseplate, base, blade con-
tacts for switches, terminal covers for degree
of protection IP20, fixing screws, locking pin
Rear terminals
NSE0_00717

3-pole B 3VL9 500-4PA30 1 unit 8.530


3-pole with RCD module
4-pole B 3VL9 500-4PA40 1 unit 12.400
4-pole with RCD module
90 angle connecting adapter
for rear connection, 3-pole
for rear connection, 4-pole
Front-accessible terminals
3-pole B 3VL9 500-4PC30 1 unit 8.510
3-pole with RCD module
4-pole B 3VL9 500-4PC40 1 unit 10.900
4-pole with RCD module
NSE00581 Withdrawable version installation kit
Upgrade of the plug-in base kit to
Withdrawable version 3-pole B 3VL9 500-4WF30 1 unit 5.200
including side walls 3-pole with RCD
and racking mecha- 4-pole B 3VL9 500-4WF40 1 unit 5.290
nism. 4-pole with RCD
Withdrawable version
Same as plug-in base kit, with additional side
walls and racking mechanism
NSE0_00719

Rear terminals
3-pole B 3VL9 500-4WA30 1 unit 15.300 B 3VL9 600-4WA30 1 unit 34.300
3-pole with RCD module
4-pole B 3VL9 500-4WA40 1 unit 14.300 B 3VL9 600-4WA40 1 unit 43.800
4-pole with RCD module
Front-accessible terminals
3-pole B 3VL9 500-4WC30 1 unit 15.300 B 3VL9 600-4WC30 1 unit 38.400
3-pole with RCD module
NSE0_00683

4-pole B 3VL9 500-4WC40 B 3VL9 600-4WC40 1 unit 43.200


4-pole with RCD module
Aux. circ. plug connection for plug-in base
Accessory connections for plug-in circuit-
breakers (factory-wired connectors) and for
plug-in bases or withdrawable version (cou-
3 3
pling with screw connection) ) )
8 positions B 3VL9 600-4PJ00 1 unit 0.276 B 3VL9 600-4PJ00 1 unit 0.276
Position signaling switch
(connected/disconnected position)
for plug-in/withdrawable base, 1 changeover
contact, max. 2 signaling switches possible B 3VL9 000-4WL00 1 unit 0.040 B 3VL9 000-4WL00 1 unit 0.040
1) Not possible on VL160X with RCD module. 3) It is recommended to use a maximum of 3 auxiliary circuit plug-in systems
2) For safety lock as an installation kit for retrofitting, see Pages 4/50 to 4/53. per circuit-breaker (24 positions).

4/42 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL1250 to VL1600


DT Order No. PS* Weight per
PU approx.
kg

Motorized oper.
mech. without
spring energy
store (not for syn-
chronization)
tE < 5 s

B 3VL9 800-3MJ00 1 unit 7.540


B 3VL9 800-3ML00 1 unit 7.540

4
B 3VL9 800-3MS00 1 unit 7.540
B 3VL9 800-3MN00 1 unit 0.750
B 3VL9 800-3MQ00 1 unit 7.580

B 3VL9 815-3MK00 1 unit 7.540


B 3VL9 815-3MM00 1 unit 7.540
B 3VL9 815-3MT00 1 unit 7.540
B 3VL9 815-3MP00 1 unit 7.540
B 3VL9 815-3MR00 1 unit 7.730

For VL1250 For VL1600


DT Order No. PS* Weight per DT Order No. PS* Weight per
PU approx. PU approx.
kg kg

B 3VL9 800-4WA30 1 unit 30.300 B 3VL9 800-4WA30 1 unit 30.300



B 3VL9 800-4WA40 1 unit 28.400 B 3VL9 800-4WA40 1 unit 28.400

B 3VL9 800-4WC30 1 unit 41.800 B 3VL9 800-4WC30 1 unit 41.800



B 3VL9 800-4WC40 1 unit 41.100 B 3VL9 800-4WC40 1 unit 41.100

3)
3)

B 3VL9 800-4PJ00 1 unit 0.289 B 3VL9 800-4PJ00 1 unit 0.289

B 3VL9 000-4WL00 1 unit 0.040 B 3VL9 000-4WL00 1 unit 0.040

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/43


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts
RCD module
Circuit-breakers Rated Residual Delay td Rated operat- DT Circuit-breaker PS* Weight DT Circuit-breaker PS* Weight
for system protection, current currents I adjustable ing voltage 3-pole per PU 4-pole per PU
only for TM, starters, In adjustable Ue approx. approx.
disconnectors
3- and 4-pole A A S AC V Order No. kg Order No. kg
VL160X 0.03 instanta-
neous
(Bottom mounting1) 160 0.10 0.06 127-480 B 3VL9 112-5GA30 1 unit 1.510 B 3VL9 112-5GA40 1 unit 1.840
(Mounting kit for left 0.30 0.10 B 3VL9 112-5GB30 1 unit 1.960 B 3VL9 112-5GB40 1 unit 2.340
side, without RCD)1)2) 0.50 0.25
VL160 160 1.00 0.50 127-480 B 3VL9 216-5GC30 1 unit 1.430 B 3VL9 216-5GC40 1 unit 1.740
3.00 1.00 230-690 B 3VL9 216-5GD30 1 unit 1.440 B 3VL9 216-5GD40 1 unit 1.750
VL250 250 127-480 B 3VL9 325-5GE30 1 unit 1.500 B 3VL9 325-5GE40 1 unit 1.800

4 VL400 400
230-690
127-480
B 3VL9 325-5GF30

1 unit 1.490 B
B
3VL9 325-5GF40
3VL9 440-5GG40
1 unit
1 unit
1.820
3.320
230-690 B 3VL9 440-5GH40 1 unit 3.320
1) Only the right-hand accessory compartment and the neutral conductor
(4-pole) accessory compartment can be used for the installation of acces-
sories, see Page 4/11.
2) The installation kit consists of the mounting plate, wiring and covers for
switches and RCD module (for 75 mm standard mounting rail).
The RCD module (3VL9 112-5GA30/-5GA40) must be ordered separately.

4/44 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts
Circuit-breakers with RCD module
Circuit-breakers for system pro- Rated Residual Delay td Rated operat- Circuit-breaker Circuit-breaker
tection, only for TM, starters, current In currents I adjustable ing voltage Ue 3-pole 4-pole
disconnectors adjustable
Order No. with "Z" Order No. with "Z"
3VL. . . . - . D . . . - . . . . 3VL. . . . - . E . . . - . . . .
-Z -Z
and additional and additional order
order code code
3- and 4-pole A A S AC V @@@ @@@

VL160X 0.03 instantaneous
(bottom mounting) 160 0.10 0.06 127-480 A 0 11) A 0 11)
0.30 0.10
0.50 0.25
VL160 160 1.00
3.00
0.50
1.00
127-480
230-690
A01
A02
A01
A02
4
VL250 250 127-480 A01 A01
230-690 A02 A02

VL400 400 127-480 A01


230-690 A02
1) Only the right-hand accessory compartment and the neutral conductor
(4-pole) accessory compartment can be used for the installation of acces-
sories, see Page 4/11.

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/45


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL160X For VL160


DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.

3- or 4-pole kg kg
Connection parts for fixed-mounted circuit-breakers
Front connecting bars
Terminal with screw connection
required, see Page 4/10.
NSE0_00702 Phase barriers included.
Standard
1
1 set = 3 units 3-pole B 3VL9 200-4EC30 1 unit 0.251 ) B 3VL9 200-4EC30 1 unit 0.251
1 set = 4 units 4-pole B 3VL9 200-4EC40 1 unit 0.336 1) B 3VL9 200-4EC40 1 unit 0.336

4
For increased pole spacing
1
1 set = 3 units 3-pole B 3VL9 200-4ED30 1 unit 0.233 ) B 3VL9 200-4ED30 1 unit 0.233
1 set = 4 units 4-pole B 1
NSE0_00722 3VL9 200-4ED40 1 unit 0.402 ) B 3VL9 200-4ED40 1 unit 0.402
Rear-mounting terminals
Short terminal (1 unit) B 3VL9 100-4RA00 1 unit 0.152 B 3VL9 200-4RA00 1 unit 0.151
Long terminal (1 unit) B 3VL9 100-4RB00 1 unit 0.250 B 3VL9 200-4RB00 1 unit 0.268
Terminal kit (2 short + 1 long)
3-pole B 3VL9 100-4RC30 1 unit 0.525 B 3VL9 200-4RC30 1 unit 0.514
NSE0_00723 Terminal kit (2 short + 2 long)
4-pole B 3VL9 100-4RF40 1 unit 0.791 B 3VL9 200-4RF40 1 unit 0.774
Short flat connector (1 unit) B 3VL9 100-4RK00 1 unit 0.121 B 3VL9 200-4RK00 1 unit 0.120
Long flat connector (1 unit) B 3VL9 100-4RL00 1 unit 0.223 B 3VL9 200-4RL00 1 unit 0.231
Flat connector kit (2 short + 1 long)
NSE0_00724 3-pole B 3VL9 100-4RM30 1 unit 0.456 B 3VL9 200-4RM30 1 unit 0.462
Flat connector kit (2 short + 2 long)
4-pole B 3VL9 100-4RN40 1 unit 0.671 B 3VL9 200-4RN40 1 unit 0.682
NSE0_00725

Flat connecting bar (1 unit)


Flat connecting bar
Set = 3 units, 3-pole
Flat connecting bar
Set = 4 units, 4-pole
Box terminal
Connection for flexible flat copper busbar
or cable, see Page 4/10.
1 set = 3 units B 3VL9 100-4TC30 1 unit 0.103 B 3VL9 200-4TC30 1 unit 0.130
NSE0_00700 1 set = 4 units B 3VL9 100-4TC40 1 unit 0.135 B 3VL9 200-4TC40 1 unit 0.161
Multiple feed-in terminal
NSE0_00727 Only for cables (Al or Cu)
Aluminum terminal (tinned)
1 set = 3 units B 3VL9 100-4TD30 1 unit 0.099 B 3VL9 200-4TD30 1 unit 0.110
1 set = 4 units B 3VL9 100-4TD40 1 unit 0.127 B 3VL9 200-4TD40 1 unit 0.144
Terminal with screw connection -
metric thread
with insulator (for rear) for use with
busbars and cable lugs,
NSE0_00701
see Page 4/10.
1 set = 3 units B 3VL9 100-4TA30 1 unit 0.102 B 3VL9 200-4TA30 1 unit 0.123
1 set = 4 units B 3VL9 100-4TA40 1 unit 0.136 B 3VL9 200-4TA40 1 unit 0.164
Terminal covers
(connection covers) for circuit-breakers
NSE0_00681
Degree of protection IP30 for main terminals
1 set = 2 units
Extended 3-pole B 3VL9 300-8CA30 1 unit 0.304 B 3VL9 300-8CA30 1 unit 0.304
Standard 3-pole B 3VL9 300-8CB30 1 unit 0.083 B 3VL9 300-8CB30 1 unit 0.083
NSE0_00730 Extended 4-pole B 3VL9 300-8CA40 1 unit 0.328 B 3VL9 300-8CA40 1 unit 0.328
Standard 4-pole B 3VL9 300-8CB40 1 unit 0.078 B 3VL9 300-8CB40 1 unit 0.078
Phase barriers for circuit-breakers, fixed-
mounting, plug-in or withdrawable
versions
NSE0_00731
1 set = 2 units B 3VL9 300-8CE00 1 unit 0.038 B 3VL9 300-8CE00 1 unit 0.038
1) Screw terminal connections are required for SENTRON VL160X and VL160
circuit-breakers, see Page 4/10.
2) Round cable terminal with 2 holes for 2 copper or aluminum cables, each
with 2 50-120 mm2
1 unit: 3VL9 4004TF00
3 units: 3VL9 4004TF30
4 units: 3VL9 4004TF40

4/46 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL250 For VL400


DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.
kg kg

B 3VL9 300-4EC30 1 unit 0.318 B 3VL9 400-4EC30 1 unit 0.318


B 3VL9 300-4EC40 1 unit 0.440 B 3VL9 400-4EC40 1 unit 0.440

B
B
3VL9 300-4ED30
3VL9 300-4ED40
1 unit
1 unit
0.319 B
0.514 B
3VL9 400-4ED30
3VL9 400-4ED40
1 unit
1 unit
0.319
0.514
4
B 3VL9 300-4RA00 1 unit 0.161 B 3VL9 400-4RA00 1 unit 0.151
B 3VL9 300-4RB00 1 unit 0.256 B 3VL9 400-4RB00 1 unit 0.268

B 3VL9 300-4RC30 1 unit 0.494 B 3VL9 400-4RC30 1 unit 0.514

B 3VL9 300-4RF40 1 unit 0.774 B 3VL9 400-4RF40 1 unit 0.774


B 3VL9 300-4RK00 1 unit 0.130 B 3VL9 400-4RK00 1 unit 0.129
B 3VL9 300-4RL00 1 unit 0.229 B 3VL9 400-4RL00 1 unit 0.231

B 3VL9 300-4RM30 1 unit 0.459 B 3VL9 400-4RM30 1 unit 0.462

B 3VL9 300-4RN40 1 unit 0.675 B 3VL9 400-4RN40 1 unit 0.682


B 3VL9 300-4TC30 1 unit 0.285 B 3VL9 400-4TC30 1 unit 0.124


B 3VL9 300-4TC40 1 unit 0.283 B 3VL9 400-4TC40 1 unit 0.161

B 3VL9 300-4TD30 1 unit 0.164 B 3VL9 400-4TD30 1 unit 0.110 2)


2
B 3VL9 300-4TD40 1 unit 0.227 B 3VL9 400-4TD40 1 unit 0.144 )

B 3VL9 300-4TA30 1 unit 0.168 B 3VL9 400-4TA30 1 unit 0.105


B 3VL9 300-4TA40 1 unit 0.224 B 3VL9 400-4TA40 1 unit 0.140

B 3VL9 300-8CA30 1 unit 0.304 B 3VL9 400-8CA30 1 unit 0.304


B 3VL9 300-8CB30 1 unit 0.083 B 3VL9 400-8CB30 1 unit 0.083
B 3VL9 300-8CA40 1 unit 0.328 B 3VL9 400-8CA40 1 unit 0.966
B 3VL9 300-8CB40 1 unit 0.078 B 3VL9 400-8CB40 1 unit 0.078

B 3VL9 300-8CE00 1 unit 0.038 B 3VL9 600-8CE00 1 unit 0.061

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/47


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL630 For VL800


DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.

3- or 4-pole kg kg
Connection parts for fixed-mounted circuit-breakers
Front connecting bars
Terminal with screw connection
required, see Page 4/10.
NSE0_00702 Phase barriers included.
Standard
1 set = 3 units 3-pole B 3VL9 500-4EC30 1 unit 1.170 B 3VL9 600-4EC30 1 unit 1.810
1 set = 4 units 4-pole B 3VL9 500-4EC40 1 unit 1.550 B 3VL9 600-4EC40 1 unit 2.380

4
For increased pole spacing
1 set = 3 units 3-pole B 3VL9 500-4ED30 1 unit 1.200 B 3VL9 600-4ED30 1 unit 1.840
NSE0_00722 1 set = 4 units 4-pole B 3VL9 500-4ED40 1 unit 1.570 B 3VL9 600-4ED40 1 unit 2.400
Rear-mounting terminals
Short terminal (1 unit)
Long terminal (1 unit)
Terminal kit (2 short + 1 long)
3-pole
NSE0_00723 Terminal kit (2 short + 2 long)
4-pole
Short flat-type terminal (1 unit)
Long flat-type terminal (1 unit)
Flat connector kit (2 short + 1 long)
NSE0_00724 3-pole
Flat connector kit (2 short + 2 long)
4-pole
NSE0_00725

Flat connecting bar (1 unit) B 3VL9 500-4RG00 1 unit 0.372 B 3VL9 600-4RG00 1 unit 1.730
Flat connecting bar
Set = 3 units, 3-pole B 3VL9 500-4RH30 1 unit 1.540 B 3VL9 600-4RH30 1 unit 6.870
Flat connecting bar
Set = 4 units, 4-pole B 3VL9 500-4RH40 1 unit 1.540 B 3VL9 600-4RH40 1 unit 6.870
Box terminal
Connection for flexible flat copper busbar
or cable, see Page 4/10.
1 set = 3 units
NSE0_00700 1 set = 4 units
Multiple feed-in terminal
NSE0_00727
Only for cables (Al or Cu)
aluminum terminal (tinned)
1 set = 3 units B 3VL9 500-4TG30 1 unit 0.570 B 3VL9 600-4TG30 1 unit 1.090
1 set = 4 units B 3VL9 500-4TG40 1 unit 0.720 B 3VL9 600-4TG40 1 unit 1.410
Terminal with screw connection
metric thread
with insulator (for rear) for use with
NSE0_00701 busbars and cable lugs,
see Page 4/10.
1 set = 3 units B 3VL9 500-4TA30 1 unit 0.195 B 3VL9 600-4TA30 1 unit 0.357
1 set = 4 units B 3VL9 500-4TA40 1 unit 0.260 B 3VL9 600-4TA40 1 unit 0.476
Terminal covers
(connection covers) for circuit-breakers
NSE0_00681
Degree of protection IP30 for main terminals
1 set = 2 units
Extended 3-pole B 3VL9 600-8CA30 1 unit 0.864 B 3VL9 600-8CA30 1 unit 0.864
Standard 3-pole B 3VL9 600-8CB30 1 unit 0.261 B 3VL9 600-8CB30 1 unit 0.261
NSE0_00730 Extended 4-pole B 3VL9 600-8CA40 1 unit 1.230 B 3VL9 600-8CA40 1 unit 1.230
Standard 4-pole B 3VL9 600-8CB40 1 unit 0.327 B 3VL9 600-8CB40 1 unit 0.327
Phase barriers for circuit-breakers, fixed-
mounting, plug-in or withdrawable
versions
NSE0_00731
1 set = 2 units B 3VL9 600-8CE00 1 unit 0.061 B 3VL9 600-8CE00 1 unit 0.061

4/48 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL1250 For VL1600


DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.
kg kg

B 3VL9 800-4EC30 1 unit 3.520 B 3VL9 800-4EC30 1 unit 3.520


B 3VL9 800-4EC40 1 unit 4.630 B 3VL9 800-4EC40 1 unit 4.630


B 3VL9 700-4RG00 1 unit 6.900 B 3VL9 800-4RG00 1 unit 1.640

B 3VL9 700-4RH30 1 unit 5.300 B 3VL9 800-4RH30 1 unit 4.680

B 3VL9 700-4RH40 1 unit 6.800 B 3VL9 800-4RH40 1 unit 6.210

B 3VL9 700-4TG30 1 unit 2.340


B 3VL9 700-4TG40 1 unit 2.960

B 3VL9 700-4TA30 1 unit 0.378 B 3VL9 800-4TA30 1 unit 0.378


B 3VL9 700-4TA40 1 unit 0.504 B 3VL9 800-4TA40 1 unit 0.504

B 3VL9 800-8CA30 1 unit 1.420 B 3VL9 800-8CA30 1 unit 1.420


B 3VL9 800-8CB30 1 unit 0.514 B 3VL9 800-8CB30 1 unit 0.514
B 3VL9 800-8CA40 1 unit 1.700 B 3VL9 800-8CA40 1 unit 1.700
B 3VL9 800-8CB40 1 unit 0.490 B 3VL9 800-8CB40 1 unit 0.490

B 3VL9 800-8CE00 1 unit 0.147 B 3VL9 800-8CE00 1 unit 0.147

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/49


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL160X For VL160


DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.

3- or 4-pole kg kg
Interlocks
Locking device for toggle handle
for locking the circuit-breaker in the OFF
position. Up to 3 padlocks with diameter
from 5 to 8 mm can be used.
Removable (padlocks not included)
NSE0_00732
B 3VL9 300-3HL00 1 unit 0.075 B 3VL9 300-3HL00 1 unit 0.075
Rear interlocking module
for the mechanical interlocking of

4
two adjacent circuit-breakers. The circuit-
breakers must be of the same
installation type and size. (mounting plate
not within scope of supply)
Fixed-mounting circuit-breakers B 3VL9 300-8LC00 1 unit 0.386 B 3VL9 300-8LC00 1 unit 0.386
Plug-in/withdrawable circuit-breakers B 3VL9 300-8LD00 1 unit 0.436 B 3VL9 300-8LD00 1 unit 0.436
NSE0_00733
Interlocking module for Bowden wire Combinations of next size up/down possible
interlocking 1) (see Order No.)
for the mechanical interlocking of two
circuit-breakers.
Interlocking module for one
circuit-breaker B 3VL9 300-8LA00 1 unit 0.182 B 3VL9 300-8LA00 1 unit 0.182
NSE0_00734

Bowden wire for Bowden wire


interlocking1)
Wire length 0.5 m B 3VL9 000-8LH10 1 unit 0.367 B 3VL9 000-8LH10 1 unit 0.367
Wire length 1.0 m B 3VL9 000-8LH20 1 unit 0.478 B 3VL9 000-8LH20 1 unit 0.478
Wire length 1.5 m B 3VL9 000-8LH30 1 unit 0.646 B 3VL9 000-8LH30 1 unit 0.646
Safety lock installation kits2)
Key can be removed with the circuit-
breaker in the OFF position
For front-operated rotary operating mech-
anisms
Lock types
Ronis B 3VL9 715-8HA00 1 unit 0.309 B 3VL9 715-8HA00 1 unit 0.309
CES B 3VL9 711-8HA00 1 unit 0.210 B 3VL9 711-8HA00 1 unit 0.210
For motorized operating mechanism with
NSE0_00680 spring energy store
Lock types
Ronis
Filli Giussani B 3VL9 321-8HA00 1 unit 0.053 B 3VL9 321-8HA00 1 unit 0.053
Set of fixing screws
(metric thread)
including the screws, washers and nuts
required to secure a 3- or 4-pole circuit-
breaker to a prepared surface
Set with 4 screws B 3VL9 300-8SA40 1 unit 0.045 B 3VL9 300-8SA40 1 unit 0.045
Transparent cover for trip unit,
sealable
To prevent access by unqualified person-
nel and unauthorized changes to settings
(seal not included)
Electronic overcurrent trip unit B 3VL9 700-8BL00 1 unit 0.011
Thermal-magnetic B 3VL9 300-8BM00 1 unit 0.052 B 3VL9 300-8BM00 1 unit 0.052
Manual tester for electronic trip units
(battery-operated)
for ETU/LCD ETU trip units, also
interface with laptop or PC 3VL9 000-8AK00 1 unit 0.660
Universal power supply
(AC 50/60 Hz 120240 V)
Adapter unit required if the battery
power for the manual tester is not used
B 3VL9 000-8AL00 1 unit 0.605

NSE-00573

1) Two interlocking modules and one Bowden wire are required. Cannot be
used in conjunction with motorized operating mechanism.
2) Assembled safety lock in motorized operating mechanism, see Pages 4/40
to 4/43.

4/50 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL250 For VL400


DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.
kg kg

B 3VL9 300-3HL00 1 unit 0.075 B 3VL9 400-3HL00 1 unit 0.075

4
B 3VL9 300-8LC00 1 unit 0.386 B 3VL9 400-8LC00 1 unit 0.386
B 3VL9 300-8LD00 1 unit 0.436 B 3VL9 400-8LD00 1 unit 0.436

B 3VL9 300-8LA00 1 unit 0.182 B 3VL9 400-8LA00 1 unit 0.182

B 3VL9 000-8LH10 1 unit 0.367


B 3VL9 000-8LH20 1 unit 0.478 B 3VL9 000-8LH20 1 unit 0.478
B 3VL9 000-8LH30 1 unit 0.646 B 3VL9 000-8LH30 1 unit 0.646

B 3VL9 715-8HA00 1 unit 0.309 B 3VL9 715-8HA00 1 unit 0.309


B 3VL9 711-8HA00 1 unit 0.210 B 3VL9 711-8HA00 1 unit 0.210

B 3VL9 715-8HA00 1 unit 0.309

B 3VL9 321-8HA00 1 unit 0.053

B 3VL9 300-8SA40 1 unit 0.045 B 3VL9 500-8SA40 1 unit 0.096

B 3VL9 700-8BL00 1 unit 0.011 B 3VL9 700-8BL00 1 unit 0.011


B 3VL9 300-8BM00 1 unit 0.052 B 3VL9 400-8BM00 1 unit 0.052

B 3VL9 000-8AK00 1 unit 0.660 B 3VL9 000-8AK00 1 unit 0.660

B 3VL9 000-8AL00 1 unit 0.605 B 3VL9 000-8AL00 1 unit 0.605

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/51


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL630 For VL800


DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.

3- or 4-pole kg kg
Interlocks
Locking device for toggle handle
for locking the circuit-breaker in the OFF
position. Up to 3 padlocks with diameter
from 5 to 8 mm can be used.
NSE0_00732
Removable (padlocks not included)
B 3VL9 600-3HL00 1 unit 0.184 B 3VL9 600-3HL00 1 unit 0.184
Rear interlocking module
for the mechanical interlocking of

4
two adjacent circuit-breakers. The circuit-
breakers must be of the same
installation type and size.
Fixed-mounting circuit-breakers B 3VL9 600-8LC00 1 unit 1.900 B 3VL9 600-8LC00 1 unit 1.900
Plug-in/withdrawable circuit-breakers B 3VL9 600-8LD00 1 unit 5.070 B 3VL9 600-8LD00 1 unit 5.070
NSE0_00733 Interlocking module for Bowden wire Combinations of next size up/down possible
interlocking 1) (see Order No.)
for the mechanical interlocking of two
circuit-breakers.
Interlocking module for one
circuit-breaker B 3VL9 600-8LA00 1 unit 0.256 B 3VL9 600-8LA00 1 unit 0.256
NSE0_00734

Bowden wire for Bowden wire


interlocking1)
Wire length 0.5 m
Wire length 1.0 m B 3VL9 000-8LH20 1 unit 0.478 B 3VL9 000-8LH20 1 unit 0.478
Wire length 1.5 m B 3VL9 000-8LH30 1 unit 0.646 B 3VL9 000-8LH30 1 unit 0.646
Safety lock installation kits2)
Key can be removed with the circuit-
breaker in the OFF position
For front-operated rotary operating mech-
anisms
Lock types
Ronis B 3VL9 715-8HA00 1 unit 0.309 B 3VL9 715-8HA00 1 unit 0.309
CES B 3VL9 711-8HA00 1 unit 0.210 B 3VL9 711-8HA00 1 unit 0.210
For motorized operating mechanism with
NSE0_00680 spring energy store
Lock types
Ronis B 3VL9 715-8HA00 1 unit 0.309 B 3VL9 715-8HA00 1 unit 0.309
Filli Giussani
Set of fixing screws
(metric thread)
including the screws, washers and nuts
required to secure a 3 or 4-pole circuit-
breaker to a prepared surface

Set with 4 screws B 3VL9 500-8SA40 1 unit 0.096 B 3VL9 600-8SA40 1 unit 0.107
Transparent cover for trip unit,
sealable
To prevent access by unqualified person-
nel and unauthorized changes to settings
(seal not included)
Electronic overcurrent trip unit B 3VL9 700-8BL00 1 unit 0.011 B 3VL9 700-8BL00 1 unit 0.011
Thermal-magnetic B 3VL9 600-8BM00 1 unit 0.026
Manual tester for electronic trip units
(battery-operated)
for ETU/LCD ETU trip unit, also
interface with laptop or PC B 3VL9 000-8AK00 1 unit 0.660 B 3VL9 000-8AK00 1 unit 0.660
Universal power supply
(AC 50/60 Hz 120240 V)
Adapter unit required if the battery
power for the manual tester is not used
B 3VL9 000-8AL00 1 unit 0.605 B 3VL9 000-8AL00 1 unit 0.605

NSE-00573

1) Two interlocking modules and one Bowden wire are required.


Cannot be used in conjunction with motorized operating mechanism.
2) Assembled safety lock in motorized operating mechanism, see Pages 4/40
to 4/43.

4/52 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL1250 For VL1600


DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.
kg kg

B 3VL9 800-3HL00 1 unit 0.240 B 3VL9 800-3HL00 1 unit 0.240

4
B 3VL9 800-8LC00 1 unit 2.930 B 3VL9 800-8LC00 1 unit 2.930
B 3VL9 800-8LD00 1 unit 3.820 B 3VL9 800-8LD00 1 unit 3.820

B 3VL9 800-8LA00 1 unit 0.287 B 3VL9 800-8LA00 1 unit 0.287



B 3VL9 000-8LH30 1 unit 0.646 B 3VL9 000-8LH30 1 unit 0.646

B 3VL9 715-8HA00 1 unit 0.309 B 3VL9 715-8HA00 1 unit 0.309


B 3VL9 711-8HA00 1 unit 0.210 B 3VL9 711-8HA00 1 unit 0.210

B 3VL9 715-8HA00 1 unit 0.309 B 3VL9 715-8HA00 1 unit 0.309

B 3VL9 800-8SA40 1 unit 0.102 B 3VL9 800-8SA40 1 unit 0.102

B 3VL9 700-8BL00 1 unit 0.011 B 3VL9 700-8BL00 1 unit 0.011


B 3VL9 000-8AK00 1 unit 0.660 B 3VL9 000-8AK00 1 unit 0.660

B 3VL9 000-8AL00 1 unit 0.605 B 3VL9 000-8AL00 1 unit 0.605

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/53


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

Busbar adapter systems with 40 mm or 60 mm busbar center-to-center distance with components for busbar runs, For further information
adapters and supports for individual configuration possibilities, devices with an integrated adapter, as well as accessories and see Section 8.
busbar copper. Observe the short-circuit strength of the busbar system. Short-circuit strength greater than 50 kA on request.
Busbar adapter systems
Version DT Order No. PS* Weight per PU
approx.
kg
40 mm system
to DIN 43870 Part 2 for Cu busbars with up to 160 A
sharp (DIN 1759) or rounded Busbar adapter, length 175 mm
(DIN 46 433) edges, with plug connection tags, 3-pole
width 12 mm or 15 mm, with terminal cover (degree of protection IP10)1)
thickness 5 mm or 10 mm. for 1 VL160X circuit-breaker 108 mm wide A 8US10 114SL01 1 unit 0.585
60 mm system
for Cu busbars up to 160 A
with sharp (DIN 1759) or rounded Busbar adapter, length 175 mm
(DIN 46433) edges, width 12 mm to with plug connection tags, 3-pole
30 mm, thickness 5 mm or 10 mm, with terminal cover (degree of protection IP10)1)
also for T and I special profiles for 1 VL160X/VL160 circuit-breaker 108 mm wide A 8US12 114SL01 1 unit 0.597
up to 250 A
Busbar adapter, length 175 mm
with plug connection tags, 3-pole
with terminal cover (degree of protection IP10)1)
for 1 VL250 circuit-breaker 108 mm wide A 8US12 114SL00 1 unit 0.662
up to 400 A
Busbar adapter, length 320 mm
with threaded inserts M 4, M 6 and M 8
for various types of switchgear, 3-pole
without connecting leads,
8US12 114SL00 with M 10 terminal screws at top and bottom1)
Adapter 185 mm wide A 8US12 104AF00 1 unit 2.760
Mounting plate for 8US12 104AF00 A 8US19 274AF01 1 unit 0.575
for VL400 circuit-breaker
(also possible for VL160X+RCD, VL160, VL250
circuit-breakers)

The connecting lead between adapter and switching device


should be manufactured in accordance with the rated current as
a round cable, e.g. H07V-R, with a cable lug or as a flat conduc-
tor for bolt-type connection M 10 (adapter).

8US12 104AF00
1) For degree of protection IP30, the terminal covers on pages 4/46 to 4/49
should be ordered. Connecting leads to the adapter/switching device must
be provided by the customer as round cables, e.g. H07V-R with a cable
lug, or as flat conductors for bolt-type connection M10, depending on the
rated current.

4/54 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts
Other accessories
Type Rated current In DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU
approx.
A kg
Current transformers for neutral conductor/grounded neutral point of the transformer
for ground-fault protection in 4-conductor three-phase systems 1)
VL160 63 B 3VL9 280-8TC00 1 unit 0.500
100 B 3VL9 210-8TC00 1 unit 0.450
160 B 3VL9 216-8TC00 1 unit 0.485
VL250 200 B 3VL9 320-8TC00 1 unit 0.445
250 B 3VL9 325-8TC00 1 unit 0.493
VL400 315 B 3VL9 440-8TC00 1 unit 0.493

NSE-00572 VL630
400
630
B
B
3VL9 440-8TC00
3VL9 563-8TC00
1 unit
1 unit
0.493
0.760 4
VL800 800 B 3VL9 680-8TC00 1 unit 0.778
VL1250 1000 B 3VL9 712-8TC00 1 unit 2.080
1250 B 3VL9 712-8TC00 1 unit 2.080
VL1600 1600 B 3VL9 816-8TC00 1 unit 2.110
1) Please note the rated current of the circuit-breaker.

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/55


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL160X For VL160


DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.

3- or 4-pole kg kg
Other accessories
A Masking frame (cover frame)
for door cut-out
A Fixed-mounted or plug-in circuit-
IP40 breaker B 3VL9 300-8BC00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VL9 300-8BC00 1 unit 0.140
B Circuit-breaker with front-operated
IP40 rotary operating mechanism or
NSE-00574 motorized operating mechanism B 3VL9 300-8BG00 1 unit 0.099 B 3VL9 300-8BG00 1 unit 0.099

4
B C Withdrawable circuit-breaker with
IP20 toggle lever actuation. Installation
kit contains masking frame and
extended escutcheon (cannot be
used together with a motorized
operating mechanism/rotary oper- B 3VL9 300-8BH00 1 unit 0.267
ating mechanism)
NSE-00575
D Fixed-mounted or plug-in circuit-
IP40 breaker
RCD switch masking frame B 3VL9 300-8BD00 1 unit 0.047 B 3VL9 300-8BD00 1 unit 0.047
C RCD masking frame B 3VL9 300-8BD00 1 unit 0.047 B 3VL9 300-8BD00 1 unit 0.047
E 1) Circuit-breaker with
IP40 RCD module and
NSE0_000924

front-operated rotary operating


mechanism. Installation kit con-
tains masking frame and extended B 3VL9 300-8BH00 1 unit 0.267
escutcheon
Circuit-breaker with
RCD module and
motorized operating mechanism.
Installation kit contains masking
D frame and extended escutcheon B 3VL9 300-8BJ00 1 unit 1.040

Toggle lever extension

NSE-00577

NSE-00578

1) For withdrawable version IP20.

4/56 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL250 For VL400


DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.
kg kg

B 3VL9 300-8BC00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VL9 400-8BC00 1 unit 0.057

B 3VL9 300-8BG00 1 unit 0.099 B 3VL9 400-8BG00 1 unit 0.145

4
B 3VL9 300-8BH00 1 unit 0.267 B 3VL9 400-8BH00 1 unit 0.267

B 3VL9 300-8BD00 1 unit 0.047 B 3VL9 400-8BC00 1 unit 0.057


B 3VL9 300-8BD00 1 unit 0.047 B 3VL9 400-8BD00 1 unit 0.047

B 3VL9 300-8BH00 1 unit 0.267 B 3VL9 400-8BH00 1 unit 0.267

B 3VL9 300-8BJ00 1 unit 1.040 B 3VL9 400-8BJ00 1 unit 1.040

B 3VL9 400-3HN00 1 unit 0.038

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/57


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL630 For VL800


DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.
3 or 4-pole kg kg
Other accessories
A Masking frame (cover frame)
for door cut-out
A Fixed-mounted or plug-in circuit-
IP40 breaker B 3VL9 600-8BC00 1 unit 0.062 B 3VL9 600-8BC00 1 unit 0.062
B Circuit-breaker with front-operated
IP40 rotary operating mechanism or
NSE-00574
motorized operating mechanism B 3VL9 600-8BG00 1 unit 0.177 B 3VL9 600-8BG00 1 unit 0.177

4
C Withdrawable circuit-breaker with
B IP20 toggle lever actuation. Installation
kit contains masking frame and
extended escutcheon (cannot be
used together with a motorized
operating mechanism/rotary oper- B 3VL9 600-8BH00 1 unit 0.575 B 3VL9 600-8BH00 1 unit 0.575
ating mechanism)
NSE-00575 D Fixed-mounted or plug-in circuit-
IP40 breaker
RCD switch masking frame
C RCD masking frame
E 1) Circuit-breaker with
IP40 RCD module and
NSE0_000924

front-operated rotary operating


mechanism. Installation kit con-
tains masking frame and extended
escutcheon
Circuit-breaker with
RCD module and
motorized operating mechanism.
Installation kit contains masking
D frame and extended escutcheon

Toggle lever extension B 3VL9 600-3HN00 1 unit 0.038 B 3VL9 600-3HN00 1 unit 0.038

NSE-00577

NSE-00578

1) For withdrawable version IP20.

4/58 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Accessories/spare parts

For VL1250 For VL1600


DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.
kg kg

B 3VL9 800-8BC00 1 unit 0.050 B 3VL9 800-8BC00 1 unit 0.050

B 3VL9 800-8BG00 1 unit 0.254 B 3VL9 800-8BG00 1 unit 0.254

4
B 3VL9 800-8BH00 1 unit 0.805 B 3VL9 800-8BH00 1 unit 0.805

B 3VL9 800-3HN00 1 unit 0.244 B 3VL9 800-3HN00 1 unit 0.244

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/59


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids

Characteristics
Tripping characteristics
The indicated tripping values for the inverse-time delayed over- 10 000
NSE-00548a
current trip units (thermal overload releases, "L" trip units) are 5 000
mean values taken from the spread of all setting ranges from the 2 000
cold state and under even load conditions on the conducting 1 000

t[s]
paths. 500
200
The tripping characteristics of the instantaneous (electromag- 100
netic) short-circuit releases ("I" trip units) are based on the phase 50
rated current In, which also represents the upper value of the 20
setting range on circuit-breakers with adjustable thermal over- 10
load release. With a lower operating current there is a corre- 5
spondingly higher multiple for the tripping current of the
4
2
"I" trip unit. 1
.5
"L" thermal overload release
.2
"I" instantaneous (electromagnetic) short-circuit release .1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 1 000 2 000
x In

SENTRON VL160X circuit-breaker


Tripping characteristic for system protection circuit-breaker,
Icu 70 kA max. at 415 V; "I" trip unit with fixed setting

10 000 10 000
NSE-00549a NSE-00550a
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
t[s]

t[s]

500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 1 000 2 000 1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 1 000 2 000
x In x In

SENTRON VL160 circuit-breaker SENTRON VL250 circuit-breaker


Tripping characteristic for system protection circuit-breaker, Tripping characteristic for system protection circuit-breaker,
Icu 100 kA max. at 415 V; adjustable "I" trip unit Icu 100 kA max. at 415 V; adjustable "I" trip unit

4/60 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids

10 000
10 000 NSE-00552a
NSE-00551a 5 000
5 000
2 000
2 000
1 000

t[s]
1 000
t[s]

500
500
200
200
100
100
50
50
20
20
10
10
5
5
2
2
1
1
.5
.5
.2

4
.2
.1
.1
.05
.05
.02
.02
.01
.01
.005
.005
.002
.002
.001
.001 1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100
1 2 4 6 10 200 400 1 000 2 000
20 40 60 100 200 400 1 000 2 000
x In x In

SENTRON VL400 circuit-breaker SENTRON VL630 circuit-breaker


Tripping characteristic for system protection circuit-breaker, Tripping characteristic for system protection circuit-breaker,
Icu 100 kA max. at 415 V; adjustable "I" trip unit Icu 100 kA max. at 415 V; adjustable "I" trip unit

10 000
NSE 00553 10 000
NSE-00554a
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
t [s]

1,25x 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 11x


1 000
t[s]

1 000
500 500
200
200
100
100 50
50
20
20 10 30s
5 25
10 20
5 2 17
 t (ms) 1 14
2 .5 10
1000
1 8
500 .2 6
.5 .1 4
250
2,5
.2 100 .05
.1 60 .02
.05 .01
.005
.02 0
.002
.01
.1 .2 .4 .6 1 2 4 6 10 20 40 100 200 .001
1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200
RCD In x In

RCD module ETU with system protection


Tripping characteristic for RCD, td and In adjustable Tripping characteristic for circuit-breaker with electronic overload release,
Icu 100 kA max. at 415 V; the end of the curve is determined by the applica-
tion

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/61


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids

10 000 10 000
NSE-00555a NSE-00556a
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000

t[s]
1 000 1 000
t[s]

1,25x 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 11x 1,25x 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 11x


500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
.5 0.5s .5
0.4 0.4s
.2 0.3 .2

4
0.3
.1 0.2 .1 0.2
0.1 0.1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200
x In x In
ETU with LSI, I2t OFF ETU with LSI, I2t ON
Tripping characteristic for circuit-breaker with electronic overcurrent trip unit, Tripping characteristic for circuit-breaker with electronic overcurrent trip unit,
Icu 100 kA max. at 415 V; the end of the curve is determined by the applica- Icu 100 kA max. at 415 V; the end of the curve is determined by the applica-
tion tion

10 000 10 000
NSE-00557a NSE-00558a
5 000 5 000
1,25x 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 11x
2 000 2 000
1,25x 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 11x
1 000 1 000
t[s]
t[s]

500 500
200 200
30s
100 100
25
50 50
20
20 20 17
14
10 10
10
5 5 8
6
2 2
4
1 1
0.5s 2,5
.5 .5
0.4 0,4s
.2 0.3 .2 0,2s
0.2 0,2
.1 0.1 .1
0,1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200
x In x In
LCD ETU with LSI, I2t OFF LCD ETU with LSI, I2t ON
Tripping characteristic for circuit-breaker with electronic overcurrent Tripping characteristic for circuit-breaker with electronic overcurrent
trip unit, Icu 100 kA max. at 415 V; the end of the curve is determined trip unit, Icu 100 kA max. at 415 V; the end of the curve is determined
by the application by the application

4/62 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids

10 000 10 000
NSE-00559b NSE-00560a
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000

t[s]
t[s]

500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
.5 0.5s .5
0.4
.2 0.3 .2

4
0.4s
.1 0.2 .1 0.3
0.1 .05 0.2
.05 0.1
ETU bei 4s
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 1 000 2 000 1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 1 000 2 000
x In x In

2 2
LCD ETU and ETU (td = 400 ms only) with ground-fault protection, I t OFF LCD ETU with ground-fault protection, I t ON
Tripping characteristic for circuit-breaker with electronic overcurrent trip unit, Tripping characteristic for circuit-breaker with electronic overcurrent trip unit,
Icu 100 kA max. at 415 V Icu 100 kA max. at 415 V;

Tripping characteristics of the SENTRON VL160, VL250, VL400


and VL630 circuit-breakers for motor/generator protection with
electronic overcurrent trip unit.
The tripping times of the inverse-time delayed overcurrent trip
units apply to the non-preloaded (cold) state. In the operat- 1

NSE0_00745
Cold Cold
ing/warm state (after application of a load at the rated current),
the tripping times are reduced to approx. 33 %. After a tripping
Tripping time

operation due to overcurrent, the tripping times are reduced in Temperature drop
2
accordance with the dynamic tripping response (see diagram), 3
Warm Temperature rise
as a result of which a cooling time of a few minutes is required
before the next motor start.
Warm
1
3
0 1 5 min 10
t

Dynamic tripping response (thermal image)

10 000 10 000
NSE-00561a NSE-00562a
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1,25x 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 11x
1 000 1 000
t[s]

t[s]

500 500
1,25x 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 11x
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
TC=30
5 TC=20 5
TC=15 TC=10
2 TC=10 2
1 TC=5
1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 2 000 1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 1 000 2 000
x In x In

LCD ETU with time-lag class 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 ETU with time-lag class 10
Tripping characteristic for circuit-breaker with electronic overcurrent trip Tripping characteristic for circuit-breaker with electronic overcurrent trip
unit, Icu 100 kA max. at 415 V unit, Icu 100 kA max. at 415 V

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/63


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids

10 000 10 000
NSE-00563a NSE-00564a
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
t[s]

1 000 1 000

t[s]
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2

4 .1
.05
.1
.05
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 1 000 2 000 1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 1 000 2 000
x In x In
SENTRON VL160 circuit-breaker SENTRON VL250 circuit-breaker
Tripping characteristic for circuit-breaker for starter combinations, Tripping characteristic for circuit-breaker for starter combinations,
Icu 40/70/100 kA Icu 40/70/100 kA

10 000 NSE-00565a
10 000
NSE-00566a
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
t[s]
t[s]

500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 1 000 2 000 1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 1 000 2 000
x In x In
SENTRON VL400 circuit-breaker SENTRON VL630/VL800 circuit-breaker
Tripping characteristic for circuit-breaker for starter combinations, Tripping characteristic for circuit-breaker for starter combinations,
Icu 100 kA max. at 415 V Icu 100 kA max. at 415 V

4/64 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids

109 109 A NSE-00747


NSE-00746
5 5
160A
2 2

A2s
t value A2s

108 108
160A
5 5 50A

t value
2 2
107 63A 107
2

2
5 5
16A 160A
2 2
106 106
16A
5 5

2 2
105 105
5 5

2 2
104 104
5
2
5
2
103
4
103
5 5

2 2
102 102
101 2 5 10 2 2 5 10 3 2 5 10 4 2 5 10 5 2 101 2 5 102 2 5 103 2 5 104 2 5 105 2
Short-circuit current A Short-circuit current S rms A
S rms

SENTRON VL160X circuit-breaker, 16 A to 160 A at 415 V SENTRON VL160 circuit-breaker, 50 A to 160 A at 415 V
Thermal-magnetic overcurrent trip unit Thermal-magnetic overcurrent trip unit

109 1010
250A A NSE-00748 ANSE-00749
5 5
400A
2 2
t value A2s

125A 109
t value A2s

108 200A
5 5

2 2
107 108
2
2

5 5

2 2
106 107
5 5

2 2
105 106
5 5

2 2
104 105
5 5

2 2
103 104
5 5

2 2
102 103
101 2 5 102 2 5 103 2 5 104 2 5 105 2 101 2 5 102 2 5 103 2 5 104 2 5 105 2
Short-circuit current S rms A Short-circuit current S rms A

SENTRON VL250 circuit-breaker, 125 A to 250 A at 415 V SENTRON VL400 circuit-breaker, 200 A to 400 A at 415 V
Thermal-magnetic overcurrent trip unit Thermal-magnetic overcurrent trip unit

1010 109 ANSE-00751


NSE-00750
5 5
630A
2 2
t value A2s
t value A2s

109 315A 108


5 5
t R (s)
2 2 30
108 107
2
2

5 5
2.5
2 2
107 106
5 5
2 2
106 105
5 5
2 2
L 1.5 ... 11 x I
105 104
5 5
2 2
104 103
5 5
2 2
103 102
101 2 5 10 2 2 5 10 3 2 5 10 4 2 5 10 5 2 101 2 5 102 2 5 103 2 5 104 2 5 105 2
Short-circuit current I S rms A Short-circuit current S rms A

SENTRON VL630 circuit-breaker, 315 A to 630 A at 415 V SENTRON VL160 circuit-breaker, 63 A to 160 A
Thermal-magnetic overcurrent trip unit Electronic overcurrent trip unit
Characteristics for IR = 160 A at 415 V, LSI with I2t OFF

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/65


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids

109 109 NSE-00753


NSE-00752
5 5

2 2
t R (s)

t value A2s
108
t value A2s

108 30
t R (s) 5
5
30
2 2
107 107 2.5

2
2

5 2.5 5

2 2
106 L 1.5 ... 11 x I 106
5 5
L 1.5 ... 11 x I
2 2
105 105
5 5

2 2
104 104

4 5
2
103
5
2
103
5 5

2 2
102 102
101 2 5 10 2 2 5 10 3 2 5 10 4 2 5 10 5 2 101 2 5 102 2 5 103 2 5 104 2 5 105 2
Short-circuit current S rms A Short-circuit current S rms A
SENTRON VL250 circuit-breaker, 200 A to 250 A SENTRON VL400 circuit-breaker, 315 A to 630 A
Electronic overcurrent trip unit Electronic overcurrent trip unit
Characteristics for IR = 250 A at 415 V, LSI with I2t OFF Characteristics for IR = 400 A at 415 V, LSI with I2t OFF
1011 1011 NSE-00755
NSE-00754
5 5
2 2
1600A
t value A2s
t value A2s

1010 1010
1250A
5 5
t R (s)
2 2 30
630A 800A
109 109
2
2

5 t R (s) 5
30 2 2.5
2
108 108
5 5
2.5 L 1.5 ... 11 x I
2 2
L 1.5 ... 11 x I
107 107
5 5
2 2
106 106
5 5
2 2
105 105
5 5
2 2
104 104
102 2 5 103 2 5 104 2 5 105 2 5 106 2 102 2 5 103 2 5 104 2 5 105 2 5 106 2
Short-circuit current S rms A Short-circuit current S rms A
SENTRON VL630/VL800 circuit-breaker, 630 A to 800 A SENTRON VL1250/VL1600 circuit-breaker, 1000 A to 1600 A
Electronic overcurrent trip unit Electronic overcurrent trip unit
Characteristics for IR = 630 and IR = 800 A at 415 V, LSI with I2t OFF Characteristics for IR = 1250 and IR = 1600 A at 415 V, LSI with I2t OFF
109 109 NSE-00757
NSE0_00756
5 5
160A 250A 400A
2 2
t value A2s
t value A2s

108 108 Tc = 30
5 Tc = 30 5 Tc = 10
2 Tc = 30 Tc = 10 2 Tc = 5
107 Tc = 10 107
Tc = 5
2
2

5 5
Tc = 5 L 1.5 ... 11 x I
2 2
106 106
L 1.5 ... 11 x I 5
5
2 2
105 105
5 5

2 2
104 104
5 5

2 2
103 103
5 5

2 2
102 102
101 2 5 102 2 5 103 2 5 104 2 5 105 2 101 2 5 102 2 5 103 2 5 104 2 5 105 2

Short-circuit current I S rms A Short-circuit current S rms A

SENTRON VL160/VL250 circuit-breaker, 63 A to 250 A SENTRON VL400 circuit-breaker, 315 A to 400 A


Motor/generator protection with electronic overcurrent trip unit Motor/generator protection with electronic overcurrent trip unit
Characteristics for IR = 160 A and IR = 250 A at 415 V, Tc = 0.5 to 30 Characteristics for IR = 400 A at 415 V, Tc = 0.5 to 30

4/66 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids

100 1000
kA kA

D rms
D rms

p.f. = 0,25

Let-through current
Let-through current

3VL5
3VL6 3VL4
p.f. = 0,2
p.f. = 0,3 3VL8
100
3VL7
p.f. = 0,25

3VL3

3VL2
3VL1
4
NSE0_00862 NSE0_00863
10 10
10 kA 100 10 kA 100
Short-circuit current S rms Short-circuit current S rms

Current limiting characteristics for SENTRON VL160X (3VL1) Current limiting characteristics for SENTRON VL1250 (3VL7)
to VL800 (3VL6), AC 50/60 Hz 415 V and VL1600 (3VL8), AC 50/60 Hz 415 V

100 100
kA kA
D rms

D rms

p.f. = 0,25
p.f. = 0,3
Let-through current
Let-through current

3VL6
3VL5
3VL1 p.f. = 0,3
3VL4
10
3VL3
3VL2

NSE0_00864 NSE0-00865
1 10
1 10 kA 100 1 10 kA 100
Short-circuit current S rms Short-circuit current S rms

Current limiting characteristics for SENTRON VL160X (3VL1), Current limiting characteristics for SENTRON VL160 (3VL2)
AC 50/60 Hz 690 V to VL800 (3VL6), AC 50/60 Hz 690 V

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/67


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids

Dimension drawings
VL160X, VL160 and VL250, 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A
Circuit-breakers
SENTRON VL160X circuit-breakers Circuit-breaker installation instructions
1 0 6 .5
Z
9 0 .5
8 7 Y
2 .3 (2 5 -1 6 0 A ) 8 1 .5 Y 1 7 .5
1 .2 (1 6 -2 0 A ) 1 9 3 5 (3 P )
3 5 3 5 3 5
1 9
1 6
9 .5

7 1 .5
8 4

O N I

6 5
5 8

X X X
3 1 .5

4
1 0 1 .5

1 3 3

1 1 4 .5
6 3 .5

1 5 7 .5

O F F O

9 .5
2 .5

2 4
1 6
1 9

5 2 .5 (4 P )
3 5 .2 4
1 2 7 0 (4 P ) 2 X 5 .5 (3 P )
1 2

1 9
2 0 4 X 5 .5 (4 P )
5 2 .5
1 0 4 .5 (3 P )
1 3 9 .5 (4 P )
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 7 1 a

1 6
3 2
X

SENTRON VL160/VL250 circuit- SENTRON VL160 circuit-breakers SENTRON VL250 circuit-breakers SENTRON VL160 and
breakers VL250 circuit-breakers
Installation instructions
1 0 6 .5
9 0 .5
8 7 Z Y
Y Y
8 1 .5 1 7 .5 1 7 .5
1 7 .5
5 .5

4 -(2 5 0 )
1 5 .5

3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5
2 .5 -(1 6 0 ) 3 5 3 5 3 5 6 X 5 .2 6 X 8 .4 (3 P )
8 8 .5
8 8 .5

7 5 .5

1 7 4 .5

7 5 .5
1 1

1 7 4 .5

6 5
5 8

X X X X
3 1 .5

1 3 1 .5
1 2 0 .5
6 3 .5

1 4 9
1 4 9

1 8 5 .5
1 1 .5

1 9 .5
1 1

7
1 3

1 3
5 .5
2 4

4 1 2
1 9 1 8 7 0 (4 P ) 2 X 5 .5 (3 P )
2 4 .5 (8 ) 2 4 .5 4 X 5 .5 (4 P )
5 2 .5 5 2 .5
1 0 4 .5 1 0 4 .5
1 3 9 .5
1 3 9 .5

Y Y
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 7 3
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 7 2

(8 )

1 6 1 6
3 2 3 2

Note:
The 5.5 mm extension at each end of the SENTRON VL250 circuit-breaker only
applies when using box terminals or round cable terminals (8).

4/68 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160X, VL160 and VL250, 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A
Operating mechanisms
Motorized operating mechanism
with spring energy store
1 7 3 2 5 8
1 0 4 .5 (4 ) 8 6 .5 1 4 1 .5
5 2 Y Z
Y
(7 )
(7 )

(7 )
(7 )

1 4
I I
6 3
5 8

O N O N
(5 ) 8 8 .5

CL
9 8 .5

1 7 1 .5
O O
O F F
O F F

X X X
(1 )

7 4 .5
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 7 4 a

(4 )

1 - 3
4 7 .5
(5 ) 9 5 2 2 8
(6 )

Front-operated rotary operating


mechanism
1 0 4 .5 1 7 3 2 0 1
(4 ) 8 6 .5
5 2 Z 4 0
Y
(2 )
(1 ) (2 )
(2 )
(2 )

1 4
6 2
5 8

(5 ) 8 8 .5

T R IP P E D T R IP P E D
CL
1 7 1 .5
9 7 .5

X X X
7 4 .5
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 7 5 a

(3 )
(4 )
1 - 3
4 7 .5 Y
(5 ) 9 5 1 2 6 .5 (6 )
1 4 0

(1) Safety locks


(2) Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(3) Padlock
(4) Masking frame for door cut-out (for circuit-breaker
with operating mechanism)
(5) Step for cover
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store
(8) Terminal insulation

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/69


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160X, VL160 and VL250, 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A
Terminals and phase barriers
Z

3 5 3 5 3 5 8 7
L 4 4 .5 4 4 .5 4 4 .5
(4 P ) Y (1 ) (4 P ) Y (1 )
(1 )

F
B

H
C

X X X
E

4
A

G
D

(2 )

(6 )
(2 ) K
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 6 3 K
6 .5 (1 0 ) 9 .5 J
J 2 9 1 9

(7 )

A B C D E F G H J K L (1) Phase barrier


VL160X 242 126 116 222 266.5 138.5 222 116 20 7 27 (2) Front connecting bars
(3) Terminal covers (standard)
VL160 258 130 120 238 283.5 143 238 120 20 7 27 (4) Rear terminals, threaded pin (long)
VL250 263.5 133 120 238 283.5 143 238 120 22 11 29 (5) Rear terminals, threaded pin (short)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
(8) Rear flat connector, (long)
(9) Rear flat connector, (short)
(10) Flared front busbar connecting bars

Circuit-breaker with rear terminals


long and short
139 (4P)
120.5
(3) (3) Z
104 (3P)
123 108 52
1-3 38 X
(8)
C
4

6
A
A

X X X
(4)
D
B

11
25.5

(5)
M 12x1.75

38
NSE0_01249
81.5 66 81.5 51 (9)
(3)
Z (7) (7) 63
1-3

A B C D
VL160X 71.5 133 96 182
VL160 75.5 149 101 199
VL250 75.5 149 101 199

4/70 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160X, VL160 and VL250, 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A
Terminal covers
Terminal covers, standard
1 3 9 (4 P )
1 0 4 (3 P )
5 2
Y Z (2 )
A

X
B

X
(1) Front connecting bars
(2) Terminal covers (standard)
(3) Terminal covers (extended)
(4) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with toggle lever)
4
(5) Outside surface of cabinet door
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 6 6 a
(6) Installation level
8 1 .5
(2 )
(6 )

A B C D
VL160X 96 182 326.5 168.5
VL160 101 199 343 173
VL250 101 199 343 173

Extended terminal covers


1 3 9 (4 P )
1 0 4 (3 P ) Z
9 5 .5
5 2 8 7
Y 8 1 .5

(1 )
(1 )

(4 )
D

X X
C

(4 )

(5 )

(3 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 6 7 a 1 - 3
(3 )
(6 )

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/71


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160X, VL160 and VL250, 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A
Accessories
Circuit-breaker with door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
Z
4 3 9 M A X - 2 2 2 M IN (2 9 1 M IN W IT H (1 0 ))
2 7 7 M A X - 6 0 M IN 1 5 7 .5
1 4 4
1 3 6 .5

(6 ) (5 )

(2 )
2 2 5 8

4 (1 2 )
2 .5

(1 1 )

N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 7 6 2 2 2 8
(1 0 )

1 .5 - 3
(5 )

(7 )
8 6 .5
2 6 7
Masking frame for door cut-out for circuit-breaker with toggle lever
1 0 1 .5 Z
5 1 1 - 3
Y 9

(6 )
6 1 .5

X
1 3 8 .5

(4 )
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 7 7

(4 )

9 5 .5

Masking frame for door cut-out for circuit-breaker with operating mechanism
1 7 3
8 6 .5
Y

(2) Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism


(3) Masking frame for door cut-out
1 7 1 .5

(for circuit-breaker with operating mechanism)


X
(4) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with toggle lever)
7 4 .5

(5) Terminal covers


(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 7 8 (10) Support bracket
(3 ) (11) Extension
(12) Center line of operating shaft

4/72 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160X, VL160 and VL250, 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A
Door cut-outs
Door cut-out for toggle lever Door cut-out for front-operated rotary operating Door cut-out for
(without masking frame) mechanism and motorized operating mechanism door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
with spring energy store (without masking frame)
Y 9 7 6 5
4 8 .5 3 2 .5
4 X 4 .5 3
X Y
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 7 9 a
3 4

5 9
X

2 .5
6 8

9 0 .5
X

3 2 .5
6 5
1 8
3 6 N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 8 0 4 2 -5 0
Y N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 8 1

4
Door cut-out for toggle lever Door cut-out for front-operated rotary operating Hole pattern and cut-out for plug-in base
(with masking frame) mechanism, motorized operating mechanism with rear connecting bars
with spring energy store and extended escutch-
eon (with masking frame)
9 2 .5 1 6 0 .5 7 0 (4 P ) - 3 5 (3 P )
4 X 5 .5 4 6 6 X 5 .5 8 0 1 7 .5
Y Y 4 X 5 .5
5 2
5 5

7 9 .5

8 1

3 8
1 0 5

9 8
X
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 8 2
1 2 7

5 0
1 4 4 .5
1 5 9

3 6 .5
7 0
1 9 4
1 1

1 4

1 3 5 (4 P ) - 1 0 0 (3 P )
4 1 .5
8 3 N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 8 3 a

3 8
7 3 .5
1 2 N S E 0 _ 0 0 5 6 7 a

1 4 7 .5
Y

Hole pattern and cut-out Door


for rear terminals hinge Y
P point
1 0 5 (4 P )
Note:
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 8 5 a

7 0 (3 P ) A minimum distance between


3 5 reference point Y and the door
D
8 X 2 6 (4 P )
1 3

Y hinge is required for the door


6 X 2 6 (3 P )
cut-outs.
C
B

X
A

N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 8 6

D > A from table + (P x 5)

2 X 5 .5 (3 P ) 1 7 .5
4 X 5 .5 (4 P ) 3 5 (3 P )
7 0 (4 P ) A
Circuit-breaker only 100
A B C D Circuit-breaker + plug-in base 100
+ motorized operating mechanism with
VL160X 114.5 65 71.5 133 spring energy store
VL160 131.5 65 75.5 149 Circuit-breaker + plug-in base 200
VL250 131.5 65 75.5 149 + front-operated rotary operating
mechanism
Circuit-breaker + withdrawable version 200

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/73


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160X, VL160 and VL250, 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A
Plug-in bases and accessories
Plug-in base with front Hole pattern for plug-in base
connecting bars with front connecting bars
Z
1 7 4
1 6 5 .5 1 3 3 .5 (4 P )
7 8 .5 9 9 (3 P )
7 3 .5 3 5 4 9 .5
(9 )
3 8 .5 Y
(9 ) (1 0 )

(8 ) 7 0 (4 P )
3 5 (3 P )

4 1 7 .5

4 X 5 .5
2 1 6

(6 )
Y

1 2 8 .5

9 8
X X X

1 9 4
4 2 9 .5

2 5 4

(4 )
1 2 .5

(5 )
2 8 .5

1 - 3
5 6

(9 )

N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 6 8 a
(8 )
5 2 5 .5

(7 )

Plug-in base with rear flat bar connection

1 6 5 .5 1 3 3 .5 (4 P )
7 8 .5 9 9 (3 P )
6 1 .5 5 8 .5 4 9 .5
Z (1 ) Y
(2 )
5

1 1 3 .5

X X
5 3

2 2 3 .5
1 0 3 .5
5

(2 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 6 9 a

(3 )
(5 ) (1 ) (7 )
1 - 3 (1) Plug-in base with rear terminal covers
Z (2) Plug-in base
(7 ) 4 5 .5 (3) Plug-in base with rear flat bar connection
1 2 .5
(4) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with toggle lever)
X (5) Terminal covers (standard)
3 5

(6) Outside surface of cabinet door


7 0
1 0 5

(7) Installation level


(8) Plug-in base with front connecting bars
(9) Plug-in base with terminal covers
2 5 .5

on the front
(2 ) (3 ) 8 X 1 1 (10) Interphase barriers

4/74 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160X, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A
Plug-in bases and accessories
SENTRON VL160X circuit-breakers with motorized operating mechanism with
spring energy store, mounted on plug-in base
(1) Plug-in base with terminal covers
Z
3 3 7 (2) Plug-in base
3 0 7 (3) Circuit-breaker
2 2 8 6 1 .5
1 4 0 (1 ) (4) Masking frame for door cut-out
(2 )
(4 ) (for circuit-breaker with operating mechanism)
(3 ) (5) Terminal covers (standard)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
( 8 ) CL
(8) Motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store
1 4

4
X
(9) Front-operated rotary operating mechanism

1 - 3
(6 ) (5 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 7 0 a

(7 )

SENTRON VL160X circuit-breakers with front-operated rotary operating mechanism


mounted on plug-in base

Z
2 8 0
2 1 8 .5
2 0 5
1 1
1 2 6 .5 6 1 .5
4 2 (1 )
(2 )

(3 )

( 9 ) CL

X
1 4

(4 )

(6 )

1 - 3 (5 ) N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 7 1 a

(7 )

90 angle connecting adapter


25.5 2 x 9
Z 33
35.5
48
17.5

Z 45.5
12.5
5

X
25.5

NSE-00593

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/75


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160 and VL250, 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A
Withdrawable version and accessories
SENTRON VL160 and VL250 circuit-breakers with SENTRON VL160 and VL250 circuit-breakers with
motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store
(connected position) (disconnected position)
Z

N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 7 2 b
Z

N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 7 3 b
3 6 4
3 3 7 3 0 7
3 0 3 0 7 5 7 2 2 8 6 1 .5
2 2 8 6 1 .5 2 0 1
1 4 1 .5 (2 ) (1 ) (1 )
1 1 4
(4 )
(4 ) (2 )
(3 ) (3 )

(8 ) CL ( 8 ) CL

4 X X
1 4

1 4
(1 1 )
1 - 3 (1 1 ) 1 - 3

(5 ) (5 )
(1 0 ) (6 ) (1 0 )
(6 ) (7 ) (7 )

SENTRON VL160 and VL250 circuit-breakers with SENTRON VL160 and VL250 circuit-breakers with
front-operated rotary operating mechanism (connected position) front-operated rotary operating mechanism (disconnected position)
Z Z
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 7 4 a

N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 7 5 a
2 8 0 3 0 7
2 1 8 .5 2 4 6
2 0 5 .5 2 0 5 .5
1 3 1 2 6 .5
6 1 .5 4 0 .5 6 1 .5
1 2 6 .5 9 9
4 5 (1 ) 1 8 (1 )
(2 )
(3 ) (2 )
(3 )

( 9 ) CL ( 9 ) CL

X X
1 4
1 4

(4 ) (4 )

(1 1 )
1 - 3 1 - 3
(6 ) (5 ) (5 )
(1 0 ) (6 ) (1 0 )
(7 ) (7 )

(1) Plug-in base with terminal covers


(2) Plug-in base
(3) Circuit-breaker
(4) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with operating mechanism)
(5) Terminal covers (standard)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
(8) Motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store
(9) Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(10) Locking device for racking mechanism
(11) Racking mechanism

4/76 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160 and VL250, 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A
Withdrawable version and accessories
SENTRON VL160 and VL250 circuit-breakers with SENTRON VL160 and VL250 circuit-breakers with
extended escutcheon (connected position) extended escutcheon (disconnected position)
Z Z
2 1 8

N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 7 6 b

N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 7 7 a
2 4 5 .5
2 0 5 .5 4 0 2 0 5 .5
1 3
1 2 6 .5 6 1 .5 1 2 6 .5
4 5 (1 ) 9 9 6 1 .5
(2 ) 1 8 (1 )
(3 )
(3 )
(4 ) (2 )

( 8 ) CL
( 8 ) CL

4
X
X
1 4

1 4
(6 ) (1 1 )
(6 )
1 - 3
1 - 3
(5 ) (1 0 ) (7 )
(5 ) (1 0 )
(1 1 ) (7 )

Dimensions of extended escutcheon (1) Plug-in base with terminal covers


1 0 2 .5 (8 ) (2) Plug-in base
5 1 .5 (3) Circuit-breaker
Y (4) Masking frame for door cut-out
(8 ) (for circuit-breaker with operating mechanism)
(5) Terminal covers (standard)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
9 6 .5 (8 )

(7) Installation level


X
(8) Extended escutcheon
(10) Locking device for racking mechanism
3 4 .5

(11) Racking mechanism

N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 7 8 a (4 )

Dimensions of withdrawable version


1 7 3
Y
8 6 .5
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 7 9

X
1 7 1 .5

(1 1 )
5 6
7 4 .5

(4 )
7 8 (1 1 )
(1 0 ) + (2 ) 8 5
1 5 2 .5 (3 P )
1 8 7 (4 P )

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/77


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL400, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
Circuit-breakers
SENTRON VL400 circuit-breakers Circuit-breaker installation instructions
1 6 3 .5
1 3 8 .5
1 1 5 4 4 .5 Y
1 0 6 .5 Z 4 4 .5 4 4 .5 8 9 (4 P )
Y 2 2
1 0 1 .5 8 .3
3 2
4 4

4 4 .5
1 5 0 .5

1 3 4 .5
1 1 8 .5
6 7 .5

X X X
4 1 .5

2 1 5 .5
2 7 9 .5

2 4 7 .5
8 2 .5
1 5 0

1 5
(9 )

N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 8 7 a
4 6 .5

3 2
2 4 .5
5 4 X 7 .1
3 3
1 6 .5 6 9 .5
1 3 9 (3 P )
1 8 3 .5 (4 P )

3 0 .5
6 1 .5
Motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store
2 2 4 1 3 0
Z Y 4 5
1 -3 Y
(4 ) (4 )
(7 )
(7 )
1 5 8 .5
2 3 9 .5

1 5 0

X X X
2 5

I I

O O
5 4
1 0 0

(1 )
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 8 8 b

3 4 .5 1 2 2 .5 1 1 4 .5 6 9 .5
(8 )
2 1 8 .5 1 3 9

Front-operated rotary operating mechanism


(6 )
4 6 .5 (1) Safety lock
7 9 .5 Z Y
1 4 .5 (4 ) Y 4 5
(2) Front-operated
rotary operating
(2 ) mechanism
(1 )
(3) Padlock
(2 )
(4) Masking frame for
door cut-out (for
I
circuit-breaker
X
1 5 0

X X
2 3 9 .5

with operating
1 5 9

mechanism)
O (6) Outside surface of
5 4 .5

(3 ) cabinet door
1 0 0

(7) Motorized operating


N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 8 9 b

mechanism with
(4 ) spring energy store
1 - 3 (8) Installation level
1 4 8 1 1 4 .5 6 9 .5 (9) Toggle lever
(8 ) 2 1 8 .5 1 3 9 extension

4/78 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL400, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
Terminals and phase barriers
1 8 3 .5 (4 P )
1 6 4 (4 P ) 2 2 1 (4 P )
1 0 6 .5 1 1 9 .5 (3 P ) 1 5 7 .5 (3 P )
3 1 .5 4 4 .5 7 8 .5
(1 ) 4 4 .5 4 4 .5 3 0 .5 Y
Z (2 ) Y 6 3 .5 6 3 .5 6 3 .5
1 1
1 1
2 1 5 .5

2 1 5 .5
2 0 0 .5
2 2 4

2 0 0 .5
4
O N I O N I
X X X
3 7 9

3 7 9
4 2 6

4 0 9
4 0 9

O F F O O F F O

(1 0 )

1 5
(2 )

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 6 9 a
9 .5 1 9 1 9
1 5

(2 ) 3 0 .5 (1 ) 3 8 (1 )
8 .5

(7 )

182 (4P)
101.5 131.5 171.5 137.5 (3P)
157 68.5
Z Z
Y

(8) (8)/
(9)
168.5

40.5
28 min.
118.5

118.5

(4)
28
215.5

215.5

X X 11 X
316

14.5

(5)
(9)
NSE0_01250

M 12x1.75
8

73 98.5 34
(3) (3) 113 (3)
1-5
(7)
1-5
(1) Phase barrier
(2) Front connecting bars
(3) Terminal covers (standard)
(4) Rear terminal (long)
(5) Rear terminal (short)
(7) Installation level
(8) Rear flat connector (long)
(9) Rear flat connector (short)
(10) Flared front busbar connecting bars

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/79


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL400, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
Terminal covers

1 0 1 .5 1 8 2 (4 P ) Circuit-breaker installation instructions


1 3 7 .5 (3 P ) Front connecting bars
3 1 .5 6 8 .5
Z Y
(4 )

(2 )
1 1

4 2 9 1

O N I
5 6 0 .5

X X

O F F O

(2 )

(4 )

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 7 0 a

(7 ) (8 )

1 2 0 1 8 2 (4 P )
1 0 6 .5 1 3 7 .5 (3 P )
6 8 .5
1 0 1 .5
Z Y
1 6 9

O N
X X I
3 1 6 .5

O F F O

(6 )
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 6 1

(3 ) (3 )
1 - 3 (7 )

(1) Front connecting bars


(2) Terminal covers (standard)
(3) Terminal covers
(extended)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
(8) Cut-out

4/80 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL400, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
Accessories
Plug-in base for door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
Z
1 0 1 4 9 0 M A X - 2 3 0 M IN (3 1 2 M IN W IT H (1 1 ))
3 0 0 M A X - 6 0 M IN 1 8 6 .5
1 6 2 .5
1 0 1 .5

(3 )

(6 )

(9 ) 4
(1 2 )
X
(9 ) C
L
2 .5

(1 1 )
4 0
(9 ) 1 2 6 .5
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 9 0 a

2 2 .5

(5 ) (7 )

Masking frame for door cut-out


for circuit-breaker with toggle lever
1 2 0
1 0 6 .5 Y
Z

(1 0 )
(1 0 )

O N
I
X X
1 3 8 .5

O F F O
7 7

N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 9 1

5 1
1 0 2
(6 ) (7 )
1 - 3

(3) Circuit-breaker
(5) Terminal covers (standard)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
(9) Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
(10) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with toggle lever)
(11) Support bracket
(12) Center line of operating shaft

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/81


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL400, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
Door cut-outs
Door cut-out for toggle lever operating mechanism Door cut-out for front-operated rotary operating Door cut-out for
(without masking frame) mechanism and motorized operating mechanism door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
with spring energy store (without masking frame)
Y Y Y
4X 5.5
X

2.5
X
8 7

1 0 1

88
4 3 .5

1 5 2 .5
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 9 2 a

44
X 64
3 2 .5

NSE-00794a
6 5
7
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 9 3

44

4 6 6 88
1 3 2 .5

Door cut-out for toggle lever operating mechanism Door cut-out for front-operated rotary operating Hole pattern and cut-out for plug-in base
(with masking frame) mechanism, motorized operating mechanism with with rear flat connecting bars
spring energy store and extended escutcheon
(with masking frame)
9 2 .5 2 0 6 4 4 .5 (3 P )
4 6 .5 1 0 8 6 x 5 .5 8 9 (4 P )
2 2
4 4 x X dia.
5 . 5 5.5 Y 7 .1
Y 4 X

1 1 3 .5
5 5 .5

5 2

1 2 1 .5

X
1 9 .5

1 5 5 .5
1 0 5
1 2 7

3 8
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 9 5 b

X
2 2 6 .5
1 9 4

5 4
8 0 .5

8 6
2 8 9

4 0 .5
8 1 .5 N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 9 6 b

1 4

3 8
8 7
1 0 5 .5
1 7 5

N S B 0 _ 0 0 7 9 7 b
6 4 .5
1 2 9 (3 P )
1 7 3 .5 (4 P )

Hole pattern and cut-out Door


for rear terminals hinge Y
P point
1 3 3 .5 (4 P ) Note:
4 x 7 .1
A minimum distance between
4 4 .5 4 4 .5 reference point Y and the door
D
hinge is required for the door cut-outs.

Y
1 3 4 .5

1 1 8 .5

X
2 1 5 .5
2 4 7 .5

N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 8 6

6 x 3 2 (3 P )
8 x 3 2 (4 P )
D > A from table + (P x 5)

N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 9 8 a
2 2
4 4 .5
A
8 9 (4 P )
Circuit-breaker only 150
Circuit-breaker + plug-in base 150
+ motorized operating mechanism with
energy store
Circuit-breaker + plug-in base 200
+ front-operated rotary operating
mechanism
Circuit-breaker + withdrawable version 200

4/82 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL400, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
Plug-in bases and accessories
Z Hole pattern for plug-in base
1 7 3 (4 P ) 1 2 9 (3 P )
for front connecting bars
2 1 0 6 4 .5
1 0 3 .5 Y
8 5 .5 (1 0 ) 4 4 .5
(9 ) 4 4 .5
4 2 .5 2 2

(8 ) 1 1 4 4 .5 (3 P )
9 .5
(2 ) 8 9 (4 P )
2 2

4
2 8 5

4 x 7 .1
2 6 2

1 9 0

1 5 5 .5
3 5 8
X X X
5 4 8 .5

2 8 9
(6 ) 5 0 3
1 2 .5

(5 )
1 - 3
2 5 .5

(8 ) N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 7 1 a
(9 )
4 4 .5 4 4 .5 4 4 .5
(7 )

Z
1 7 3 (4 P )
2 1 0
1 2 9 (3 P )
1 0 3 .5
8 5 .5 6 4 .5
(1 ) (1 )
Y
9 .5

1 7 6
1 7 1 .5
6 8

3 2 1 .5 (2 )

X X
3 3 0 (1 )
1 1 4 .5

(2 )
(6 ) (3 )

1 - 3 N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 7 2 a
(5 ) 4 4 .5 4 4 .5
(7 ) 4 4 .5

4 6 .5
(2 ) 1 2 .5
(1) Plug-in base with rear terminal covers
(2) Plug-in base
(3) Plug-in base with rear flat connecting bars
X (5) Terminal covers (standard)
4 4 .5
2 5 .5

(6) Outside surface of cabinet door


8 9
1 3 3 .5

(7) Installation level


1 1 (8) Plug-in base with front connecting bars
(9) Plug-in base with terminal covers
on the front
(3 ) (10) Phase barrier
2 - 6

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/83


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL400, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
Plug-in bases and accessories
Plug-in base for front-operated rotary operating mechanism Plug-in base for front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(connected position) (disconnected position)
6 5 2 6 6 6 5 2 9 3
2 5 1 .5 2 5 1 .5
1 4 8 Z 1 4 8
4 6 .5 1 2 1 2 7 Z
1 9 .5

(9 )

(9 )
1 4 .5
1 4 .5

4 X
X

(4 )
(4 )
(1 1 )
(1 1 )
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 7 3 a

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 7 4 a
(6 )
(6 )
1 - 3
1 - 3
(1 0 ) (5 ) (1 ) (7 )
(1 0 ) (5 ) (1 ) (7 )

Plug-in base for motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store Plug-in base for motorized operating mechanism with spring energy
(connected position) store (disconnected position)
3 6 1 .5 3 8 8 .5
3 2 7 .5 3 2 7 .5
2 2 4 2 2 4
1 2 2 .5 Z 1 9 7
9 5 .5 2 7 Z

(8 )
(8 )

X
X

(4 )
(4 )
(1 1 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 8 0 a

(6 ) (1 1 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 8 1 a

(6 )
1 - 3
(1 0 ) (5 ) (1 ) (7 ) 1 - 3
(1 0 ) (5 ) (1 ) (7 )

(1) Plug-in base with terminal covers


(4) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with operating mechanism)
(5) Terminal covers (standard)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
(8) Motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store
(9) Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(10) Locking device for racking mechanism
(11) Racking mechanism

4/84 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL400, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
Plug-in bases and accessories
Plug-in base for extended escutcheon Plug-in base for extended escutcheon
(connected position) (disconnected position)
2 6 2 .5 2 8 9 .5
2 5 1 .5 2 5 1 .5
1 4 8 Z 1 4 8 Z
4 6 .5 1 9 .5 2 7

(8 ) (8 )

X X 4

(4 ) (4 )
(1 1 ) (1 1 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 8 2 a

N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 8 3 a
(6 ) (6 )
1 - 3 1 - 3
(1 0 ) (5 ) (1 ) (7 ) (1 0 ) (5 ) (1 ) (7 )

Extended escutcheon mounted on withdrawable version


2 1 8 .5 (4 )
1 1 4 .5

(4 )

(1 0 )
2 3 9 .5 (4 )

O N I
X
8 0 .5 (1 1 )

O F F O
1 0 0

1 6 1

(1 1 )

Y
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 7 5 a

1 0 5 .5 (1 1 )
2 5 2 .5 (4 P )
2 0 8 (3 P )
LOCKING DEVICE
FOR RACKING MECHANISM

(1) Plug-in base with terminal covers


(4) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with operating mechanism)
(5) Terminal covers (standard)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
(8) Extended escutcheon
(10) Locking device for racking mechanism
(11) Racking mechanism

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/85


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL630, 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
Circuit-breakers
SENTRON VL630 circuit-breakers Circuit-breaker installation instructions
138.5 Y
115 Z 22 Y
106.5 127 (4P) 11 95 (4P)
20

101.5 8.6 63.5 63.5 2X 7.0 31.5


40

150.5

134.5
130.5
67.5

41.5

X X X
279.5

247.5
239.5
82.5
150

4 45
20
40

95 31.5
16.5 190 (3P) 20 4X 7.1
29 253.5 (4P)
Y
NSE-00568a

37
74

Operating mechanisms
Motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store

Y
Z
(4 ) 1 8 9
(6 ) 2 2 2 9 4 .5
Y
1 1 3 .5
1 6 4 (5 )

X X (1 ) X
1 7 2
2 4 8
2 7

(7 )
1 0 0
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 0 1 a

(4 )
1 3 9 .5
3 6 .5 1 1 5 .5
2 6 8 .5 1 8 0 .5 (5 )
1 - 3 9 0 .5
(8 )

Front-operated rotary operating mechanism


(6 ) 1 8 9
Z
8 8 1 4 6 (1 ) Y
Y (4 ) 9 4 .5
1 6 .5

(2 ) (2 )
1 1 3 .5
2 4 8

1 6 4 (5 )

X X X
1 7 2
2 7

(1) Safety lock


(3 ) (2) Front-operated rotary
1 0 0

1 3 operating mechanism
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 0 2 a

(4 ) (3) Padlock
1 3 9 .5
1 - 3 2 6 8 .5 (4) Masking frame for door cut-out
1 8 0 .5 (5 ) (for circuit-breaker with
(8 )
9 0 .5 operating mechanism)
(5) Step for cover
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Motorized operating mechanism
with spring energy store
(8) Installation level

4/86 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL630, 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
Terminals and phase barriers
Z
1 0 6 .5 2 7 0 .5 (4 P )
Y 1 9 4 .5 (3 P )
9 7 .5 6 3 .5 (4 P )
(1 ) 6 3 .5 (1 ) 7 6 9 7
2 9 6 3 .5 (1 ) Y

2 1 5 .5
2 2 4

2 0 0 .5

2 0 0 .5
X X X

4
3 7 9
4 2 6

4 0 9

3 7 9

4 0 9
1 5

(2 )

N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 8 4 a
2 1 (8 )
9 .5 2 5 .5 1 2 .5 1 2 .5
(2 ) 1 2 .7
4 2
(7 )

Z
1 0 6 .5 6 6 .5
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 8 5

1 8 (4 )
1 2 .5
1 3 0 .5

2 3 9 .5

X
(5 )
1 1 .1
3 2

(3 ) 1 5
(7 )
2 -6
1 8
6 6 .5

(1) Phase barrier


(2) Front connecting bars
(3) Terminal covers (standard)
(4) Rear terminal (horizontal connection)
(5) Rear terminal (vertical connection)
(7) Installation level
(8) Flared front busbar connecting bars

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/87


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL630, 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
Terminal covers
Z 2 5 1 (4 P )
1 8 8 (3 P )
1 0 1 .5
9 4
(4 ) Y

2 9 1

4 X X
5 6 0 .5

(2 ) (2 )

N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 8 6

(7 )

2 5 1 (4 P )
Z
1 8 8 (3 P )
9 4
1 0 1 Y
1 7 0 .5

X
3 1 9 .5

(3 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 8 7
(3 )
(7 )

(2) Front connecting bars


(3) Terminal covers (standard)
(4) Terminal covers (extended)
(7) Installation level

4/88 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL630, 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
Accessories
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 0 3 a
(6 )
4 9 0 M A X - 2 5 0 M IN (3 1 5 M IN W IT H (1 2 ))
1 8 6 .5
1 6 6 .5
1 0 1 .5
1 0 1 3 0 0 M A X - 6 0 M IN
(3 )

4
X
0 .5

(9 ) C L

(1 2 ) 4 0
1 -3
(9 )

2 2 .5
3 0 0 M A X - 6 0 M IN (5 ) (7 )
2 8 9

Masking frame for door cut-out for circuit-breaker with toggle lever Masking frame for door cut-out for circuit-breaker
with operating mechanism
Z (1 1 )
Y
1 2 0
1 0 6 .5 Y

(1 0 )
T R IP P E D

X
2 4 8

X X
1 7 5 ,5

1 0 0
9 5 .5

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 0 5

(6 ) 1 3 9 .5
N S E -0 _ 0 0 8 0 4
7 0 .5 2 6 8 .5
1 - 3 (7 ) 1 4 0 .5

Toggle lever extension


Z (1) Toggle lever extension
1 6 4 (4 ) (2) Installation level
1 3 8 .5 (3) Circuit-breaker
(4) Toggle lever extension
(1 ) (5) Terminal covers (standard)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(9) Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
(10) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with toggle lever)
4 3 (4 )
3 4 .5

(11) Masking frame for door cut-out


(for circuit-breaker with operating mechanism)
(12) Support bracket
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 0 6 a

(2 )

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/89


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL630, 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
Door cut-outs
Door cut-out for door-coupling rotary operating mechanism Door cut-out for toggle lever operating mechanism
(without masking frame)
Y 4 X 5 .5 Y
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 0 8
6 4 7
X
X

8 4
4 2
8 8

3 8
4 4
0 .5

7 6
4 4
8 8 N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 0 7 a

Door cut-out for front-operated rotary operating mechanism, motorized Door cut-out for toggle lever operating mechanism

4
operating mechanism with spring energy store and extended escutcheon (with masking frame)
(without masking frame)
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 0 9 a Y Y
1 2 9 .5
6 5 4 X 5 .5
1 1 0 .5

X
1 6 7

7 3 .5
X

7 1
1 4 2
1 6 4

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 1 0
9 2
1 8 4 .5
6 1
1 2 2

Door cut-out for front-operated rotary operating mechanism, motorized Door hinge
operating mechanism with spring energy store and extended escutcheon Y
P point
(with masking frame)
Note:
2 5 6 A minimum distance between
1 3 3 .5 D reference point Y and the door
6 x 5 .3
Y hinge is required for the door
cut-outs.
2 4 .5

1 4 1 .5
1 3 2

X
2 0 9 .5

2 3 5
8 0 .5

1 3 .1 N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 8 6

D > A from table + (P x 5)


N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 1 1 b
2
1 1 3
2 2 6 A
1 3 1 Circuit-breaker only 150
Circuit-breaker + plug-in base 150
+ motorized operating mechanism with
energy store
Circuit-breaker + plug-in base 200
+ front-operated rotary operating
mechanism
Circuit-breaker + withdrawable version 200

Hole pattern and cut-out for plug-in base Hole pattern and cut-out for circuit-breaker
(with rear flat bar connection) (with rear flat bar connection)
2 4 3 .5 (4 P ) 1 9 0 .5 (4 P )
1 8 0 (3 P ) 1 2 7 4 4 .5
9 0 4 1 .5
4 x 7 .1 2 2
Y
1 2 .5

Y
4 4 .5
1 5 5 .5

3 8

1 3 4 .5

1 0 8 .5

X
5 4
2 8 9

X
8 6

2 4 7 .5

2 3 9 .5
3 8

N S E 0 _ 0 0 5 6 9 a

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 1 4
3 1 .5 3 1 .5
6 3 .5 4 x 7 .1 (4 P )
6 3 .5
1 2 7 (4 P ) 1 2 7 (4 P )

4/90 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL630, 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
Plug-in bases and accessories
Plug-in base with terminal covers Hole pattern for plug-in base
on the front for front connecting bars

Z
2 2 4 2 4 3 (4 P )
1 8 0 (3 P )
2 1 0 9 0
1 0 3 .5 Y
(1 0 ) 6 3 .5
8 5 .5 3 1 .5
(9 )
(8 )
1 2 7 (4 P )
6 3 .5 (3 P )
(9 ) 3 1 .5
(2 )
4 X 7 .1

4
2 6 2 (1 0 )
2 8 5

Y
(4 )

1 9 0

1 5 5 .5
5 4 8 .5 (9 )

X X X

2 8 9
(2 ) 3 5 8
5 0 2 (1 0 )
2 7 .5 (1 1 )

(6 )
1 2 .5

1 - 3 (5 )
1 0 .9

(8 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 6 1 a
(7 )
3 8
9 .5 4 2 .5 6 3 .5 6 3 .5 6 3 .5 (9 )

Plug-in base, with terminal covers, Plug-in base


rear flat connecting bars
Z
2 2 4 2 4 3 (4 P ) 2 5 3 .5 (4 P )
2 1 0 1 8 0 (3 P ) 1 9 0 (3 P )
1 0 3 .5 7 8 9 0 9 5
8 3 .5 Y Y
(1 )
9 .5

(4 )
1 7 1 .5
1 7 4

1 5 5 .5
6 8

X X X
3 2 6 .5

3 2 1 .5
1 1 4 .5

2 8 9

(2 )
(6 )

1 - 3 (5 ) (1 ) N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 6 2 a
(1 ) 6 3 .5 6 3 .5
(7 ) 2 - 6 6 3 .5

7 9 .5
2 - 6 (1) Plug-in base with rear terminal covers
1 9
(7 )
(2) Plug-in base
(3 ) (3) Plug-in base with rear flat connecting bars
(4) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with toggle lever)
6 3 .5

X
(5) Terminal covers (standard)
1 2 7

(6) Outside surface of cabinet door


1 9 0 .5

(7) Installation level


(8) Plug-in base with front connecting bars
(9) Plug-in base with terminal covers
3 8

on the front
(2 ) Z 1 3 .5 (10) Phase barrier
(11) Terminal face

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/91


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL630, 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
Withdrawable version and accessories
SENTRON VL630 circuit-breakers with rotary operating mechanism, SENTRON VL630 circuit-breakers with rotary operating mechanism,
withdrawable version (connected position) withdrawable version (disconnected position)
Z Z
3 3 7 .5 3 6 4 .5
2 4 9 .5
2 4 9 .5 1 4 6
1 4 6 (7 )
2 7
(4 ) (4 )

(9 ) (9 )

4
X X

(1 1 )
(6 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 8 8 a

(6 )

N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 8 9 a
1 - 3
1 -3
(1 1 )
(1 0 ) (5 ) (1 )
(1 0 ) (5 ) (1 ) (7 )

SENTRON VL630 circuit-breakers with motorized operating mechanism SENTRON VL630 circuit-breakers with motorized operating mechanism
with spring energy store, withdrawable version with spring energy store, withdrawable version
(connected position) (disconnected position)
Z Z
3 8 9
3 6 2
3 2 5 .5
3 2 5 .5 2 2 2
2 2 2 1 9 5
9 3 .5 2 7
1 2 0 .5

(8 )
(8 )

X X

(4 ) (4 )
(6 ) (1 1 ) (6 ) (1 1 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 9 1 a
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 9 0 a

1 - 3 1 - 3

(5 ) (1 ) (1 0 ) (5 ) (1 ) (7 )
(1 0 ) (7 )

(1) Plug-in base with terminal covers


(4) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with operating mechanism)
(5) Terminal covers (standard)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
(8) Motorized operating mechanism with energy store
(9) Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(10) Locking device for racking mechanism
(11) Racking mechanism

4/92 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL630, 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
Withdrawable version and accessories
SENTRON VL630 circuit-breakers with extended escutcheon, SENTRON VL630 circuit-breakers with extended escutcheon,
withdrawable version (connected position) withdrawable version (disconnected position)
Z Z
2 6 2 .5 2 8 9 .5
2 4 9 .5 2 4 9 .5
1 4 6 1 4 6
(2 ) 1 7 .5 2 7
4 4 .5

(8 ) (8 )

4
X X

(4 ) (4 )

(6 ) (6 )

N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 9 3 a
1 - 3 1 - 3
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 9 2 a

(1 1 ) (1 ) (1 1 ) (1 )
(1 0 ) (5 ) (7 ) (1 0 ) (5 ) (7 )

SENTRON VL630 circuit-breakers with extended escutcheon,


withdrawable version

1 8 9 (8 )
9 4 .5
(8 )
(4 ) Y

(1 0 ) (8 )
1 1 4 (8 )
1 7 2 (8 )

X
(1 1 )
8 0 .5

1 6 1

(1 1 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 9 4 a

1 3 1 (1 1 )
3 2 2 .5 (4 P )
2 5 9 (3 P )

(1) Plug-in base with terminal covers


(2) Plug-in base
(4) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with operating mechanism)
(5) Terminal covers (standard)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
(8) Extended escutcheon
(10) Locking device for racking mechanism
(11) Racking mechanism

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/93


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL800, 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
Circuit-breakers
SENTRON VL800 circuit-breakers Circuit-breaker installation instructions
1 7 6 .5
1 5 1 .5
Z Y
1 2 8 Y
1 1 9 6 3 .5 9 5 (4 P )
6 3 .5 6 3 .5
1 1 4 .5 (4 P ) 3 1 .5

4 2
5 8
1 6

2 1 4 .5

1 7 2 .5

1 3 4 .5
4
6 7 .5

X X X
4 1 .5

4 0 6 .5

3 2 2 .5
3 3 3 .5

2 4 7 .5
8 2 .5
1 5 0

(9 )

3 6 .5
5 8
4 2

1 6 5 0 9 5 4 X 7 .1 3 1 .5
1 7 .5 1 9 0 (3 P )
3 3 .5 2 5 3 .5 (4 P )
Y
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 1 5 a

3 7
7 4
Motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store
1 8 9
2 3 6 .5 9 4 .5
Z Y

(6 ) (4 )
Y

(7 )
1 1 3 .5
1 0 9
1 6 4 (5 )

X X (1 ) X
2 4 8

1 7 2

O N O N /O F F

(7 )
1 0 0
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 1 6 a

(4 )
1 3 9 .5
3 5 1 1 7 .5 2 6 8 .5
9 0 .5
1 - 3
(8 ) 1 8 0 .5 (5 )

Front-operated rotary operating mechanism


1 8 9
1 6 1 9 4 .5 (1) Safety lock
(6 ) Z
Y
(2) Front-operated rotary
8 6 operating mechanism
(1 ) (4 )
1 4 .5 Y
(3) Padlock
(4) Masking frame for
(2 ) (2 ) door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker
with operating
1 1 3 .5
1 0 9
1 6 4 (5 )

X
mechanism)
X X
1 7 2
2 4 8

(5) Step for cover


(6) Outside surface of
(3 ) cabinet door
1 0 0

1 3
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 1 7 a

(7) Motorized operating


(4 ) mechanism
1 3 9 .5 with spring energy
1 - 3 2 6 8 .5 store
9 0 .5
(8) Installation level
(8 ) 1 8 0 .5 (5 ) (9) Toggle lever

4/94 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL800, 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
Terminals and phase barriers
2 7 9 .5 (4 P )
Z
1 1 9 2 0 3 (3 P )
Y
9 7 .5 6 3 .5 Y
6 3 .5 6 3 .5 (1 ) 7 6 1 0 1 .5
3 3 .5 (4 P ) (1 )

(1 )

2 5 3 .5

2 5 3 .5
2 7 9
2 8 6

2 7 9
X X X 4
5 5 1 .5

4 8 5
4 8 5
5 3 6

5 3 6
(8 )

(2 ) (2 )

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 7 6 a
9 .5 1 3 2 5 .5 1 3 1 2 .5 1 2 .5
2 5

5 1 2 5 .5 5 1
(7 )

(1) Phase barrier


(2) Front connecting bars
(7) Installation level
(8) Flared front busbar connecting bars

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/95


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL800, 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
Terminal covers
2 5 1 (4 P )
1 8 8 (3 P )
Z
9 4
1 0 1 Y
(4 ) (4 )

3 5 5
4
X X
6 8 8

(2 )
(2 )

N S E 0 _ 0 1 0 6 6 a

(7 )

1 1 9 1 4 1 .5 2 5 1 (4 P )
1 0 1 2 7 1 8 8 (3 P ) 9 4 2 4 8 .5 (4 P )
4 2
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 6 2

Z Y 1 8 5 (3 P )
9 2 .5
5 8

(8 )
2 3 4 .5

7
1 2 .5

Y
1 7 7

1 3 4 .5

1 4 8

X X X
2 7 4 .5
2 4 7 .5
4 4 6 .5
3 3 2 .5

(9 )
1 3 .5
N S E 0 _ 0 1 0 6 7 a
4 9 .5

5 8

2 0 3 1 .5
(3 ) 4 0 6 3 .5 (3 P )
(3 ) 1 2 7 (4 P )
(7 ) 2 - 6 6 3 .5 6 3 .5 6 3 .5
2 7 (4 P )
1 4 1 .5

(2) Front connecting bars


(3) Terminal covers (standard)
(4) Terminal covers (extended)
(7) Installation level
(8) Rear terminal (mounted horizontally)
(9) Rear terminal (mounted vertically)

4/96 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL800, 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
Accessories
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
Z
(6 ) 5 0 3 M A X - 2 6 3 M IN (3 3 0 M IN W IT H (1 2 ))
1 9 9 .5
1 7 9 .5
1 0 1 1 1 4 .5

3 0 0 M A X - 6 0 M IN (3 )
(1 3 0 M IN W IT H (1 2 ))

(1 3 )
4
0 .5

X
(9 ) CL

2 2 .5 (1 2 ) 4 0
(9 ) 1 -3
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 1 8 a

(5 ) (7 )

Masking frame for door cut-out Masking frame for door cut-out
for circuit-breaker with toggle lever for circuit-breaker with operating mechanism
Z Y
1 3 2 .5
1 1 9 Y (1 1 )

(1 0 ) (1 0 )
X
2 4 8

X X
1 0 0
1 7 5 .5
9 5 .5

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 1 9

(6 )
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 0 0 a

1 3 9 .5
2 6 8 .5
1 - 3 7 0 .5
(7 )
1 4 0 .5

Toggle lever extension


Z
1 7 6 .5 (4 )
1 5 1 .5

(3) Circuit-breaker
(4 ) (4) Toggle lever extension
(5) Terminal covers (standard)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
X
(4 )

(7) Installation level


4 3

(9) Door-coupling rotary operating


mechanism
3 4 .5

(10) Masking frame for door cut-out


(for circuit-breaker with toggle lever)
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 2 0 a

(11) Masking frame for door cut-out


(for circuit-breaker with operating
mechanism)
(12) Support bracket
(7 )
(13) Center line of operating shaft

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/97


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL800, 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
Door cut-outs
Door cut-out Door cut-out for toggle lever
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism (without masking frame)
Y Y N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 2 2 a
7 4 X 5 .5
6 4 X

8 7
X

4 3 .5
8 8

3 9
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 2 1

4 4

7 8
0 .5

4 4
8 8

4 Door cut-out for front-operated rotary operating mechanism, motorized


operating mechanism with spring energy store and extended escutcheon
Door cut-out for toggle lever
(with masking frame)
(without masking frame)
Y 1 2 9 .5
6 5
Y 4 X 5 .5
1 1 1

X 7 3 .5

7 1
1 6 7

1 4 2
1 6 4
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 2 3 a

9 2
1 8 4 .5
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 2 4 6 1
1 2 2

Door cut-out for front-operated rotary operating mechanism,


motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store
and extended escutcheon (with masking frame)
2 5 6
1 3 3 6 X 5 .5
Y
1 1 7 .5

1 4 1 .5
1 3 2

X
2 2 2
2 0 9

2 3 5
5 0 .5

1 5 9

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 2 5 a
1 3 1 1 1 (1 )
1 1 3 1 4
2 2 6 (1) Withdrawable version only

Door hinge Y
P point
Note:
A minimum distance between
D reference point Y and the door
hinge is required for the door cut-outs.

N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 8 6

D > A from table + (P x 5)

A
Circuit-breaker only 150
Circuit-breaker + plug-in base 150
+ motorized operating mechanism with
energy store
Circuit-breaker + plug-in base 200
+ front-operated rotary operating
mechanism
Circuit-breaker + withdrawable version 200

4/98 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL1250 and VL1600, 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
Circuit-breakers
SENTRON VL1250 circuit-breakers Circuit-breaker installation instructions
Z
2 0 9
1 7 4
1 5 7
Y Y
1 5 2 .5 1 1 4 .5
7 6 (4 P ) 7 6 7 6 3 7 .5

3 7 .5
3 6 .5

1 3 .5
5 3 .5 (4 P ) 3 8
1 9

5 2
(1 )
2 2 2

1 9 9 .5
1 8 4 .5

O N
I 4
7 6

5 9 .5

X X X

3 6 2
3 3 2
I

1 1 9
1 9 0 .5
4 0 6 .5

O
O F F

1 6 1 .5
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 2 7 a

5 5
3 7 .5
8 .9
5 3 1 1 4 .5 1 9 .5 3 8 4 x 7
6 1 1 7 .5

2 2
2 2 8 .5 (3 P ) 8 2
3 0 5 (4 P ) 3 3 3 .5

9 7
4 8 .5
Y

SENTRON VL1600 circuit-breakers Circuit-breaker installation instructions


Z
Y 1 4 3
7 6 (4 P ) 7 6 7 6 3 0 3 6 .5
1 3 1 6
2 0

6 0
Y
1 1 4 .5 3 8
(4 P ) (3 P )
3 1 4 .5
3 0 7

(1 )
2 4 7

1 9 9 .5

O N
I
3 6 2

x x x
5 3 7

5 7 7

5 9 1 .5

O
O F F
2 2

3 8 3 8
4 x 7
4 0

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 2 8 a
7 6 3 8 3 8
1 6
3 6 .5

(1) Toggle lever extension

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/99


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL1250 and VL1600, 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
Operating mechanisms
Motorized operating mechanism
3 4 1 2 2 7
3 3 1 (2 ) 1 1 3 .5
Z Y

1 3 (1 )

(2 )

1 6 9 .5
1 3 4

X X

2 8 9 .5
2 1 2

4
(1 ) (6 )

(4 )
1 6 1
1 5 2 .5
3 1 0
2 9 5
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 2 9 b

(5 )

Front-operated rotary operating mechanism


Z
3 3 6 .5
2 3 6 3 1 0 (1 )
2 2 0 1 6 1 (1 )
1 5 2 .5 Y

(3 )
(1 )
1 6 9 .5 (1 )

1 3 4 (3 )
2 8 9 .5 (1 )

2 1 2 (3 )

X X

(3 )

(1 )
(6 )
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 3 0 a

(4 )
1 1 3 .5
1 -3 (5 ) 2 2 7 (3 )

(1) Masking frame for door cut-out


(for circuit-breaker with operating mechanism)
(2) Motorized operating mechanism
(3) Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(4) Outside surface of cabinet door
(5) Installation level
(6) Safety lock

4/100 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL1250 and VL1600, 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
Terminals and phase barriers
Z
1 4 3 Y
3 6 .5 7 6 1 3
1 6 7 6 (4 P ) 7 6
3 1 4 .5

3 0 7
2 4 7

X
O N
I
X 4
5 9 1 .5

5 7 7
5 3 7

O
O F F

(2 )
4 0

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 6 7 a 6 0
7 6 7 6 (1 )
(1 ) (2 )

(3 )

(1) Phase barrier


(2) Front connecting bars
(3) Installation level

Terminal covers
3 0 4 .5 (4 P ) Z
2 2 8 (3 P ) 1 5 2 .5
1 1 4 3 6 .5
Y 1 6

(1 )
3 6 3
6 8 8 .5

O N
I
X X
I

O
O F F

(1) Front connecting bars


(2) Terminal covers (short)
only for SENTRON VL1250 circuit-breakers
(3) Terminal covers (extended)
(4) Installation level
(1 ) (5) Rear terminal (mounted horizontally)
(6) Rear terminal (mounted vertically)
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 6 8 a
5 8 .5 (7) Phase barriers
(3 ) (3 ) (4 )

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/101


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL1250 and VL1600, 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
Terminal covers
SENTRON VL1250 circuit-breakers only

3 0 4 .5 (4 P )
1 5 7 1 5 2 .5 (4 P )
2 2 8 (3 P )
1 5 2 .5 1 4 1 1 1 4 7 6 (3 P ) 7 6 (3 P )

2 8 .5
Z Y
1 2 .5 3 8 7

5 8
(5 )

2 4 4 .5
Y

1 9 9 .5
2 2 2

1 8 9 .5

1 6 1
X X X

4
3 4 1 .5

2 8 4 .5

3 6 2
4 5 2
I
O F F

(6 )
1 3 .5
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 6 3
4 9 .5

5 8
4 0 1 9
2 0 7 6 (4 P ) 7 6 7 6 4 7 .5

2 8 .5
(2 ) (7 )
2 -6 1 0 5

N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 6 4
2 6 .5 1 3 3 .5
2 0 9 .5 (3 P )
2 8 6 (4 P )

SENTRON VL1600 circuit-breakers only

1 7 4 8 3
1 4 3 Z 7 6 7 6 7 6 1 5 2 .5 (4 P )
3 6 .5 6 0 7 6 (3 P )
1 6 2 0 1 3 Y 3 0 3 8
2 0
5 9 .5

4 0

8 8
4 4
4 0
(6 )
3 0 7

2 6 7
2 4 7
2 6 7

1 9 9 .5

X X X
5 3 7

5 7 7
4 9 7

3 6 2
4 9 7

(5 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 6 5

4 4
8 8

1 3
1 5 .5

N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 6 6

7 6 3 8 3 8 1 2 0
(7 ) (4 ) 2 -6 2 4 0 (3 P )
3 1 6 .5 (4 P )
(1) Front connecting bars
(2) Terminal covers (short)
only for SENTRON VL1250 circuit-breaker
(3) Terminal covers (extended)
(4) Installation level
(5) Rear terminal (mounted horizontally)
(6) Rear terminal (mounted vertically)
(7) Phase barriers

4/102 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL1250 and VL1600, 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
Accessories
SENTRON VL1250 circuit-breaker
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
Z
5 2 9 M A X - 2 8 9 M IN (3 8 0 M IN W IT H (5 ))
1 7 2 3 6
2 3 1
1 0 1 1 5 2 .5
(5 )

2 2
4 0 .5

(2 ) CL

4
7 7 .5

X
1 3 9 .5

2 2 .5

(2 )
(3 ) 1 -3

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 3 1 a

(4 )

Masking frame for door cut-out


for circuit-breaker with toggle lever
Z
1 6 9
1 5 2 .5 Y

(1 )

O N
I
8 0

X X
I

1 7 5 .5

O
O F F
(1 )

(3 ) N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 3 2 a
1 -3 7 0 .5
1 4 0 .5
(4 )

(1) Masking frame for door cut-out


(for circuit-breaker with toggle lever)
(2) Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
(3) Outside surface of cabinet door
(4) Installation level
(5) Support bracket

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/103


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL1250 and VL1600, 3- and 4-pole, up to 1600 A
Door cut-outs
Door cut-out for toggle lever Door cut-out for front-operated rotary operating Door cut-out for
(without masking frame) mechanism and motorized operating mechanism door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
(without masking frame)
Y Y Y
4 X 5 .5 5 7
X 6 4
6 2

1 3 3
1 2 4

8 8
X

2 1 1
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 3 3 a

4 4

7 7 .5
X
5 1
1 0 2 N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 3 5
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 3 4 a 4 4
8 8
1 1 1 .5

4 2 2 3

Door cut-out for toggle lever Door cut-out for front-operated rotary operating mechanism,
(with masking frame) motorized operating mechanism and
extended escutcheon (with masking frame)
1 2 9 .5 2 9 7
6 5 1 4 2 .5 6 X 5 .5
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 3 6 a Y Y
7 3 .5

X
7 1
1 4 2

1 6 3
1 6 4

4 4 .5

2 4 5 .5
X
2 7 6 .5

4 X 5 .5 6 1
1 2 2
2 4 .5

9 5

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 3 7 a
1 3 0 1 4
1 5 2 .5
2 6 0

Current transformers
Current transformers for neutral conductors Current transformers for neutral conductors
for ground-fault protection for ground-fault protection
in 4-wire three-phase systems in 4-wire three-phase systems
for SENTRON VL160/VL250 circuit-breakers for SENTRON VL630/VL800 circuit-breakers
N S E 0 _ 0 0 5 7 0 a

N S E 0 _ 0 0 5 7 1 a

X 2 4 .1 X 2 4 .2
X 2 4 .1 X 2 4 .2
4
5 8

7 5 .5
3
1 8 .5

2 6

6 2 .5
2 0 .5 1 1 7 0 .5
4 0 .5 1 5
4 2
3 2

3 8

3 8
L O A D

6 3 .5

1 1 1 .5

L O A D
9 7

7 6
2 2

8 .4
1 1

6 x 8 .2
4 x 4 .3
4 x 4 .3
4 0 .5 4 x 1 0 .2
3 0 .5 4 x 1 0 .2
6 1

4/104 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160X to VL800, 3- and 4-pole, up to 800 A
Interlock with Bowden wire
VL160X, VL400 VL800 VL630
VL160,
VL250

127 R>60 mm
R>60 mm Y
112

127
Y
112
Y
96

216

151
69

150.5
4

66

66
X X
89
78

76
X X

NSE00897
NSE00896

94
52.5
85
Y
68.5 94
112

Combination options
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 3 9
NSE00898

NSE00900

3VL9 300-8LA00 3VL9 400-8LA00 3VL9 600-8LA00 3VL9 800-8LA00


for VL160X, for VL400 for VL630 and for VL1250 and
VL160 and VL250 VL800 VL1600
3VL9 300-8LA00
for VL160X,
VL160 and VL250
3VL9 400-8LA00
for VL400
3VL9 600-8LA00
for VL630 and VL800
3VL9 800-8LA00
for VL1250 and VL1600
77 Combination possible

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/105


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160X to VL400, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
8US1 busbar adapter system
8US10 11-4SL01 8US12 11-4SL01
(40 mm system) (60 mm system)
35,5 35,5 Cover 35,5 35,5 Cover
12 18

20
29
29

24
33

24

20
20

60
40

21,5 21,5

114,5
114,5

24,5 24,5

131,5
131,5

172
172

40

60
M4 M4

4 5

NSE0_00894
NSE0_00892

(10)
5
35 26 51 35 (10) 26 51
107,8 107,8

8US12 11-4SL00 8US19 27-4AF01


(60 mm system) (60 mm system)
35,5 35,5 Cover 114
18 107
57
20

7 44 9
29

26
20

6,5
3VF5
13

M8 3VL4
60

3VL1
/2/3
3 3VF4
114,5
131,5
172

19

8,2
L2

114,5
131,5
60

M4

247,5
M4x80
NSE0_00893

292

240,5
270,5
248,5
241,5

3VL1
5 3VL
2/3
(10) 26 51
35
176,5

107,8
M6x100
111,5

3VL4
64,5

M6x100
56

3VL1
+RCD
NSE00895
35 4xM4
39,5
74,5
79

4/106 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160X with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A
Circuit-breakers
SENTRON VL160X circuit-breakers Circuit-breaker installation instructions
with RCD module
1 0 6 .5
9 3 .5
Z 9 0 .5
8 7
Y Y
7 0 (4 P ) 8 1 .5 2 .5 (2 5 -1 6 0 A )
3 5 3 5 1 9 5 2 .5 (4 P )
1 .2 (1 6 -2 0 A )
5 1 7 .5
9 .5
1 9
1 6
7 1 .5
8 4

5 8

6 5
X X

1 0 7 .5
3 1 .5
X

2 3
4
6 3 .5
4 5
2 7 9

2 5 5

2 4 1
9 5
4 5
1 0 .5

3 1 .5
2 0
2 3

4 3 X 5 .5 (3 P )
1 9 1 7 .5 4 X 5 .5 (4 P )
8 0
8 1 .5 3 5 (3 P )
8 6
9 0 .5
9 3 .5
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 4 0 b

Y
5 2 .5
1 0 4 .5 (3 P )
1 3 9 .5 (4 P )

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/107


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160X with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A
Terminals and phase barriers
Z
9 5 .5
8 7 Y
7 0 (4 P ) 4 4 .5 Y
2 7
6 .5 3 5 3 5 (4 P ) 4 4 .5 4 4 .5 7 .1
(2 ) 7 .1
(1 )

(6 )
1 3 8 .5

1 2 6

1 1 6

1 2 6

1 1 6
4 4
X X O N I X O N I

4
O F F O O F F O

(1 1 )

7 3

7 3

3 4 3 .5
3 8 8 .5

3 6 3 .5

(1 1 ) (1 1 )

3 4 3 .5

3 6 3 .5
1 0 2 .5

1 0 2 .5
(1 1 )

1 - 3

N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 9 5 a
(1 0 )
(1 ) 2 0
(2 ) 3 5 7 4 .5 (1 )
2 9
1 4 8 .5
(7 )

Z
Z 1 2 0 .5
(3 )
1 2 3 .5
M 1 2 (3 ) 1 0 8 .5
3 8 with (8 )
4

thread

(4 )
7 1 .5

7 1 .5

X X
2 5

1 1 .1
2 5 4
2 5 4

(1 1 ) (1 1 )

(5 )
(9 )
(1 1 ) (1 1 )

3 8
(6 ) N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 9 6 6 6 (6 ) (3 ) 5 1 .5
6 3
1 - 3 (7 ) 1 - 3
(7 )
1 - 3 1 - 3

(1) Phase barrier


(2) Front connecting bars
(3) Terminal covers (standard)
(4) Threaded rear terminals, round stock (long)
(5) Threaded rear terminals, round stock (short)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
(8) Rear flat connector, (long)
(9) Rear flat connector, (short)
(10) Flared front busbar connecting bars
(11) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with RCD module)

4/108 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160X with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A
Terminal covers
8 7
8 1 .5
(4 ) 2 7 5 2
Y
(4 )
(2 )

1 6 8 .5
X x O N I

O F F O 4
3 4 3 .5

4 4 8 .5
(5 )

(5 )

(5 )

(6 )
(2 )

N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 9 7 a
1 - 3
(7 )
2 9 1 3 9 (4 P )
9 5 .5 1 0 4 (3 P )
z

1 2 3 1 2 0 .5 1 3 9 (4 P )
Z
1 0 8 1 0 4 (3 P )
(3 ) 1 -3 3 8 (3 ) 1 -3 5 2
(1 0 ) Z Y
4

6
9 6

(8 )
7 1 .5
7 1 .5

X X X
3 0 4
2 5 5
2 5 5

M 1 2 x 1 .7 5
(1 1 ) (9 )

N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 9 8 a

3 8 5 1
(7 )
2 5 .5

(7 ) 8 1 .5 6 3
8 1 .5 6 6

1 1

(2) Front connecting bars


(3) Terminal covers (standard)
(4) Terminal covers (extended)
(5) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with RCD module)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
(8) Rear terminal, long flat connector
(9) Rear terminal, short flat connector
(10) Rear terminal, long
(11) Rear terminal, short

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/109


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160X with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A
Door cut-outs
Hole pattern, cut-out for rear terminals Door cut-out for toggle lever Door cut-out for toggle lever
(with masking frame) (without masking frame)
1 0 5 (4 P ) 1 3 6 Y

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 4 2 a
7 0 (3 P ) 6 8
X
3 5 8 x 2 6 (4 P )
1 3

2 5
Y

5 0
6 x 2 6 (3 P )

3 3

9 2 .5
6 6
9 0
7 1 .5

1 1 7 .5
6 5

Y
X

8 4 .5
2 0 7 .5

5 0
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 4 3 a
2 5 5

5 4 .5
2 4 1

1 0 9 .5

6 6
6 3 .5
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 4 1 b

1 7 .5 8 X 5 .5
1 2 7

3 x 5 .5 (3 P ) 3 5 (3 P )
4 x 5 .5 (4 P ) 7 0 (4 P )

Door hinge Y Note:


P point a minimum distance between
reference point Y and the door
hinge is required for the door cut-outs.
D

A
Circuit-breaker only 100
Circuit-breaker + plug-in base 100
+ motorized operating mechanism with
energy store
Circuit-breaker + plug-in base 200
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 8 6
+ front-operated rotary operating
D > A from table + (P 5) mechanism

Circuit-breaker with laterally attached RCD module

1 1 1 .5 1 2 0
1 0 8 .5 1 1 6 .5
1 0 5 1 1 3 .5
9 9 .5 1 0 8 3 1 4
1 8 2 6 .5 2 0 6 5 4
Z Z
(4 ) (2 )
m a x .1 4 6

1 0 2
1 0 8

Y
9 1

8 4

X
X X X
2 0 2

1 8 9 .5
1 6 8 .5
m a x .1 3 0

N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 6 7
8
1 9
(1 ) (2 ) (1 ) (2 )
(3 ) (1 )
X
2 5

(1) Outside surface of cabinet door


5 0

(2) Mounting bracket


Y
(3) Installation level 5 4 .5
2 4 7 .5 (3 P )
(4) 75 mm standard mounting rail to 2 8 4 (4 P )
DIN 50023
(to be provided by customer)

4/110 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160X with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 160 A
Plug-in base and accessories
Hole pattern and cut-out for plug-in base
with rear flat bar connection
Z 7 0 (4 P )
1 6 9 1 3 3 .5 (4 P )
3 5 (3 P )
7 8 .5 9 9 (3 P ) 4 9 .5 4 x 5 .5 1 7 .5
6 1 .5 (1 ) Y
(1 )
(5 ) (2 )

3 8
(2 )

9 8
Y
5
1 1 3

3 6 .5
X

5 0

4
7 0 (4 P )
5 3

1 2 .5
X (3 )
2 5 .5 3 5 3 5 1 0 0 (3 P )
1 1 1 3 5 (4 P )

1 9 1 .5
3 1 5
1 -3

4 .5

4 5 .5
3 4 5
2 2 5

1 6 .5
(2 )

3 8
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 9 9 a

(3 )

(5 )
(1 ) (7 )
1 - 3 Y

Z Hole pattern for plug-in base


with front connecting bars
7 8 .5
7 4 1 3 3 .5 (4 P )
6 0 9 9 (3 P )
Y
3 8 .5 (9 ) 3 5 4 9 .5
5 1 7 .5
(4 )
2 5 .5
(9 )

(8 )
7 0 (4 P )
3 5 (3 P )
2 5 .5
2 8 .5

(2 ) 4 x 5 .5 1 7 .5
2 1 6

1 2 .5

1 8 4 .5

Y
1 4 1
1 2 8 .5

9 8

x X X
3 7 5 .5
4 8 7 .5
5 5 1

3 1 5

(5 )

(5 ) 1 1
(1) Plug-in base with rear terminal covers
(1 0 ) (9 )
(2) Plug-in base for circuit-breaker with RCD module
(3) Plug-in base with rear flat bar connection
(9 ) (4) Masking frame for door cut-out
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 0 0 a
(for circuit-breaker with RCD module)
(7 )
(5) Terminal cover (standard)
1 7 2
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
(8) Plug-in base with front connecting bars
(9) Plug-in base with terminal covers
on the front

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/111


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160 and VL250 with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A
Circuit-breakers
SENTRON VL160 and VL250 circuit-breakers Circuit-breaker installation instructions
with RCD module
106.5 Y
Z 52.5
90.5
Y 5.5 (VL160) (4P)
87 35
8.4 (VL250) 2.5 (160A)
35 35 35 (3P)
4.0 (250A)
13

(4P) 17.5
19

24
88.5

11
75.5

65
58
31.5
X X X

63.5

120
4
296 ( VL160 )
307 ( VL250 )

(1) (1)

252.5
107.5
270.5

(2)
(2)
45
121.5
5 ( VL250)

11

31.5

NSE00845a
24

5.5 (VL160)
4 70 (4P) 3X 5.5 (3P)
52.5 8.4 (VL250) 19 35 (3P) 4X 5.5 (4P)
104.5 81.5
139.5 (4P) 86
90.5
93.5

(1) Circuit-breaker
(2) RCD module

Note for the SENTRON VL250 circuit-breaker: The 5 mm extension


(overall height 307 mm) at each end only applies when using box terminals
and round cable terminals.

4/112 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160 and VL250 with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A
Terminals and phase barriers
9 5 .5
8 7
8 0 2 7 - (V L 1 6 0 )
Y
3 5 7 (V L 1 6 0 ) Y 7 (V L 1 6 0 )
2 9 - (V L 2 5 0 ) 3 5 3 5 1 1 .1 (V L 2 5 0 ) 4 4 .5 4 4 .5 4 4 .5 1 1 .1 (V L 2 5 0 )
(2 ) (4 P )
(1 ) (1 0 ) (4 P )

1 3 0 (V L 1 6 0 )
1 3 3 (V L 2 5 0 )

1 3 0 (V L 1 6 0 )
1 3 3 (V L 2 5 0 )
1 4 3

1 2 0
1 2 0
(1 2 )

1 3 8 .5
6 1 .5
X X X

3 7 9 (V L 1 6 0 )
3 8 5 (V L 2 5 0 )
3 7 9 (V L 1 6 0 )
3 8 5 (V L 2 5 0 )

(1 2 )
(1 2 )

3 5 9 .5
8 5 .5

3 5 9 .5
4 0 5 .5

(1 1 )
1 0 2 .5

(1 1 )
(1 1 )

(6 )

1 .0 - 3
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 0 1 a

2 0 (V L 1 6 0 )
6 .5 (1 ) (1 ) 2 2 (V L 2 5 0 )
3 5 5 1
2 9
(7 )

Z 1 2 0 .5
(3 ) 1 2 3 (3 ) 1 0 8
Z 3 8 Y

6
1 0 1

(8 )
7 5 .5

7 5 .5

(4 )
X
2 7 0 .5

3 2 0 .5
2 7 0 .5

M 1 2 x 1 .7 5
(5 ) (9 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 0 2 a

N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 0 2 a

3 8
4

(7 ) (7 ) 1 -3 (3 ) 5 2
1 -3 5 1
1 3 9 (4 P )
8 1 .5 6 6 8 1 .5 6 3
2 5 .5

1 0 4 (3 P )

1 1

(1) Phase barrier (7) Installation level


(2) Front connecting bars (8) Rear flat connector (long)
(3) Terminal covers (standard) (9) Rear flat connector (short)
(4) Rear terminals (long) (10) Flared front busbar connecting bars
(5) Rear terminals (short) (11) Masking frame for door cut-out (for circuit-breaker with RCD module)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door (12) Masking frame for door cut-out (for circuit-breaker with toggle lever)

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/113


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160 and VL250 with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A
Terminal covers
1 3 9 (4 P ) For dimensions of the lower masking frame,
1 0 4 (3 P ) see bottom of Page 4/109.
(3 ) 8 1 .5 Y
(3 ) 5 2

1 0 1
X X

(5 ) (5 )

4
3 2 0 .5
(1 ) (1 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 0 3 a

(6 )
(7 ) (3 ) 2 2
1 .0 - 3 Z

5 2
(4 ) (4 )
Y

(2 )
1 7 3

1 7 3
1 2 0

X X

(5 )
(5 )
3 5 9 .5
4 6 5

4 6 5

(1 ) (1 )

(6 )

1 .0 - 3
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 0 4 a

(4 )

1 3 9 (4 P ) 2 2
8 1 .5
(4 ) 1 0 4 (3 P )
9 5 .5
Z

(1) Masking frame for door cut-out (for circuit-breaker with RCD module)
(2) Front connecting bars
(3) Terminal covers (standard)
(4) Terminal covers (extended)
(5) Masking frame for door cut-out (for circuit-breaker with toggle lever)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level

4/114 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160 and VL250 with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A
Door cut-outs
Door cut-out for toggle lever Door cut-out for toggle lever Door cut-out for
(without masking frame) (with masking frame) door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
4 X R 0 .8 Y 9 2 .5 6 5
4 x 5 .5 4 6 3 2 .5
X Y 4 X 4 .5 3
3 4

Y
6 8

2 .5
5 2
5 5
X

3 2 .5
X

6 5
1 8
1 0 5

3 6

1 0 5
1 2 7
4 2 -5 0
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 8 1

9 2

9 7
4 1 .5
8 3

4
5 0

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 4 6 a

5 4 .5

6 6
9 0

1 0 9 .5

6 8

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 4 7 a
6 3 .5
1 2 7
1 3 6

Door cut-out for front-operated rotary operating Door cut-out for front-operated rotary operating Hole pattern, cut-out
mechanism and motorized operating mechanism mechanism (without masking frame) for rear connecting studs
with spring energy store (with masking frame)
1 6 0 .5 9 7 1 0 5 (4 P )
4 8 .5 7 0
1 0 X 5 .5 8 0
Y 3 5
5 9 .5

1 3
X
9 1
7 9 .5

8 1

7 5 .5
X
1 5 9

1 4 4 .5

X Y
Y
1 0 6 .5
2 0 8 .5
1 1

5 3
8 2 .5

2 7 5 .5
1 4

2 7 0 .5
2 5 3
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 0 5 a
6 6 .5
1 4
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 4 9 a

2 x 1 2 1 0 6 .5
1 1 6

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 5 1 b
1 7 .5

7 3 .5
1 4 7 .5 6 x 2 6 (3 P ) 3 x 5 .5 (3 P )
8 x 2 6 (4 P ) 3 5 (3 P ) 4 x 5 .5 (4 P )
7 0 (4 P )

Door hinge Y
P point
Note:
a minimum distance between
D reference point Y and the door
hinge is required for the door cut-outs.

N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 8 6

D > A from table + (P x 5)

A
Circuit-breaker only 100
Circuit-breaker + plug-in base 100
+ motorized operating mechanism with
energy store
Circuit-breaker + plug-in base 200
+ front-operated rotary operating
mechanism
Circuit-breaker + withdrawable version 200

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/115


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160 and VL250 with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A
Plug-in bases and accessories
Hole pattern and cut-out for plug-in base
with rear flat bar connection

Z 7 0 (4 P )
1 6 9 1 3 3 .5 (4 P )
3 5 (3 P )
7 8 .5 9 9 (3 P ) 4 9 .5 4 x 5 .5 1 7 .5
6 1 .5 (1 ) Y
(1 )
(5 ) (2 )

3 8
(2 )

9 8
Y
5
1 1 3

3 6 .5
X

4
5 0
7 0 (4 P )
5 3

1 2 .5
X (3 )
2 5 .5 3 5 3 5 1 0 0 (3 P )
1 1 1 3 5 (4 P )

1 9 1 .5
3 1 5
1 -3

4 .5

4 5 .5
3 4 5
2 2 5

1 6 .5
(2 )

3 8
N S E 0 _ 0 1 1 9 9 a

(3 )

(5 )
(1 ) (7 )
1 - 3 Y

Z Hole pattern for plug-in base


with front connecting bars
7 8 .5
7 4 1 3 3 .5 (4 P )
6 0 9 9 (3 P )
Y
3 8 .5 (9 ) 3 5 4 9 .5
5 1 7 .5
(4 )
2 5 .5
(9 )

(8 )
7 0 (4 P )
3 5 (3 P )
2 5 .5
2 8 .5

(2 ) 4 x 5 .5 1 7 .5
2 1 6

1 2 .5

1 8 4 .5

Y
1 4 1
1 2 8 .5

9 8

x X X
3 7 5 .5
4 8 7 .5
5 5 1

3 1 5

(5 )

(5 ) 1 1 (1) Plug-in base with rear terminal covers


(9 )
(2) Plug-in base for circuit-breaker with RCD module
(1 0 )
(3) Plug-in base with rear flat bar connection
(9 )
(4) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with RCD module)
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 0 0 a (5) Terminal cover (standard)
(7 )
1 7 2 (6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
(8) Plug-in base with front connecting bars
(9) Plug-in base with terminal covers on the front

4/116 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160 and VL250 with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A
Plug-in bases and accessories
SENTRON VL160 and VL250 circuit-breakers with RCD module SENTRON VL160 and VL250 circuit-breakers with RCD module
and motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store and motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store
(connected position) (disconnected position)
3 3 7 3 6 4
3 0 7 .5 3 0 7
2 2 8 2 2 8
Z 5 8 .5 1 1 4 2 7 .5
3 1 .5 1 4 1 .5 Z
(5 ) (5 )
(4 )
(4 )
1 4

1 4
X X 4
(1 )
(1 2 ) (1 )
(1 2 )
(8 ) (8 )

(1 0 ) (1 0 )
(6 )
(6 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 0 8 a (1 1 ) N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 1 2 a
1 - 3 (1 1 ) 1 - 3
(7 ) (7 )

SENTRON VL160 and VL250 circuit-breakers with RCD module SENTRON VL160 and VL250 circuit-breakers with RCD module
and front-operated rotary operating mechanism (connected position) and front-operated rotary operating mechanism (disconnected position)
2 8 0 3 0 7 .5
2 1 8 .5 2 4 6
2 0 5 .5 2 0 5 .5
1 2 6 .5 9 9 2 7 .5 Z
Z
(5 )
(5 )

(2 ) (2 )
1 4
1 4

X X

(3 ) (3 )

(9 ) (9 )
(1 2 )
(1 2 )

(1 0 ) (1 0 )

(6 ) (6 )

1 - 3 N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 0 9 a N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 1 0 a
1 - 3 (1 1 )
(1 1 ) (7 )
(7 )

(1) Safety lock


(2) Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(3) Padlock
(4) Motorized operating mechanism with energy store
(5) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with operating mechanism)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
(8) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with RCD module, motorized operating mechanism)
(9) Masking frame for door cut-out (for circuit-breaker
with RCD module, toggle lever/rotary operating mechanism)
(10) RCD extended escutcheon
(11) Locking device for racking mechanism
(12) Racking mechanism
Siemens LV 30 2004 4/117
SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL160 and VL250 with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 250 A
Plug-in bases and accessories
SENTRON VL160 and VL250 circuit-breakers with RCD module SENTRON VL160 and VL250 circuit-breakers with RCD module
and extended escutcheon (connected position) and extended escutcheon (disconnected position)
2 1 8 2 4 5 .5
2 0 5 .5 2 0 5 .5
Z 9 9 2 7 .5 Z
1 2 6 .5
(5 )
(5 )

1 4
X
1 4

4 (3 ) (3 )

(9 ) (9 )

(1 2 )
(1 0 )
(1 0 )
(6 )

N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 1 7 a
(6 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 1 3 a

1 .0 - 3
1 .0 - 3
(1 1 ) (7 )
(1 1 ) (7 )

1 7 3 1 7 3 1 7 3
8 6 .5 8 6 .5 8 6 .5
Y 3 4 Y 3 4 Y 3 4
(5 )
(5 ) (5 )
(1 1 ) (1 1 ) (1 1 )

(3 ) (4 ) (2 )
1 7 1 .5

1 7 1 .5

X X X
1 7 1 .5

7 4 .5

7 4 .5
7 4 .5

3 0 3
1 2 0 .5

1 2 0 .5
(1 2 )

(1 2 )
1 2 0 .5
(1 2 )

2 0 6
2 0 6

2 0 6

(1 0 ) (1 0 ) (1 0 )
(1 2 )
(1 2 ) (1 2 )
(8 ) (9 )
(9 ) (9 ) (9 )
(9 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 1 4

N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 1 6 a
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 1 5

7 8 (1 2 ) 7 8 (1 2 ) (1 2 ) 7 8
8 5 8 5 8 5
1 8 7 (4 P ) - 1 5 2 .5 (3 P ) 1 8 7 (4 P ) - 1 5 2 .5 (3 P ) 1 8 7 (4 P ) - 1 5 2 .5 (3 P )
Withdrawable version Withdrawable version Withdrawable version

(2) Front-operated rotary operating mechanism


(3) Circuit-breaker extended escutcheon
(4) Motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store
(5) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with operating mechanism)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
(8) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with RCD module, motorized operating mechanism)
(9) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with RCD module, toggle lever/rotary
operating mechanism)
(10) RCD extended escutcheon
(11) Locking device for racking mechanism
(12) Racking mechanism

4/118 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL400 with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
Circuit-breakers
SENTRON VL400 circuit-breakers Mounting hole pattern for SENTRON VL400 circuit-break-
with RCD module ers with RCD front connecting bar
1 3 8
4 4 .5 4 4 .5 1 1 5
4 4 .5 1 0 6 .5 Y

Y Z
1 0 1 .5
8 .3

4 X 7 .1
1 5 0 .5

1 3 4 .5
1 1 8 .5

O N I

6 7 .5
4
4 1 .5
X X X

8 2 .5
2 1 5 .5

1 5 0
O F F O
(8 )

4 0 7 .5
4 3 9 .5

3 7 5 .5

(9 )

2 2
1 3

4 7 .5
3 2

3 2

N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 5 3 4 4 .5
2 4 .5 1 6 .5 8 9 (4 P )
3 3 .5
6 9 .5
1 3 9 (3 P )
1 8 3 .5 (4 P )

1 1 4 .5
Y Z
6 1 .5

O N I
X X
1 3 8 .5

O F F O
1 4 1 .5

(5 ) (5 )
1 0 2 .5

(1 ) (1 )
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 5 4 a

(6 )
5 1
1 0 2 (7 ) 1 -3

(1) Masking frame for door cut-out (for circuit-breaker with RCD module)
(5) Masking frame for door cut-out (for circuit-breaker with toggle lever)
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
(8) Circuit-breaker
(9) RCD module

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/119


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL400 with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 630 A
Terminals and phase barriers
1 0 6 .5 2 2 1 (4 P )
1 6 3 .5 (4 P ) . 1 5 7 .5 (3 P )
(1 )
Z
1 1 9 (3 P ) 3 0 .5 7 8 .5
4 4 .5 4 4 .5 4 4 .5 6 3 .5 6 3 .5 6 3 .5
3 1 .5
(2 ) Y 1 1
1 1 Y
2 2 4

2 1 5
2 1 5

2 0 0 .5
2 0 0 .5
4 X X
O N I
X
O N I
5 6 9 .5

O F F O O F F O

5 3 9

5 6 9
5 8 7

5 3 9
(1 0 )

1 5 .
1 5

N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 1 8 a
(2 ) 1 9
1 9
(2 ) 3 0 .5 3 8
(7 ) (1 ) (1 )

Z
1 - 5
1 3 1 .5 1 7 1 .5
3 4 .5
Z
1 5 7
1 1
4 0 .5
2 8

(4 ) (8 )
2 8
1 8 1

X X
2 8

1 1
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 2 1
1 4 .5
3 7 5 .5

(5 ) (9 ) (1) Phase barrier


M 1 2 (2) Front connecting bars
8

(3) Terminal covers (standard)


N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 1 9

N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 2 0 a (4) Rear terminals (long)


4 0 .5 (5) Rear terminals (short)
3 1 3 1 (7) Installation level
7 3 9 8 .5
(3 ) (3 ) 1 1 3 (8) Rear flat connector (long)
(9) Rear flat connector (short)
(7 ) (7 )
(10) Flared front busbar connecting bars
1 -5 1 -5

4/120 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL400 with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
Terminal covers
1 8 2 (4 P )
1 0 1 .5 1 3 7 .5 (3 P )
6 8 .5
Z
Y
1 6 8 .5

O N I
X X

O F F O 4
4 7 6 .5

N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 2 2 a

3 4
(3 ) (7 ) (3 ) (8 )

1 8 2 (4 P )
1 3 7 .5 (3 P )
(4 ) 1 0 1 .5 6 8 .5
(4 )
Z
Y

1 1
2 9 1

O N I
X X

O F F O
7 2 1

(2 )
(2) Front connecting bars
(3) Terminal covers (standard)
(2 )
(4) Terminal covers (extended)
(7) Installation level
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 2 3 a

(8) Cut-out
(4 ) 3 4
(7 ) (8 )

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/121


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL400 with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
Door cut-outs
Door cut-out for toggle lever Door cut-out for front-operated rotary operating Door cut-out for
(with masking frame) mechanism door-coupling rotary operating
(without masking frame) mechanism
6 5 Y Y
3 2 .5 4X 5.5

2.5
X X

1 0 1

88
8 7

1 5 2 .5

44
4 3 .5

X 64

NSE-00794a
7
1 6 2

44

4
Y
6 6 88
1 3 2
1 6 2
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 5 5 a

5 3 .5
4 8

N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 2 4 a
5 4
6 6 .5

1 0 7 .5

1 0 6 .5

Door cut-out for front-operated rotary operating mecha- Hole pattern and cut-out Door cut-out for toggle lever
nism, motorized operating mechanism with spring for rear connecting studs (with masking frame)
energy store and extended escutcheon (with masking
frame)
2 0 6 1 3 3 .5 (4 P ) 9 2 .5
1 0 8 8 9 (3 P ) 4 6
1 7 5 1 0 x 5 .5 8 X 5 .2
7 .1 4 4 .5 Y
8 7
5 5
1 2 7

5 0
X

1 0 1 .5
Y
1 1 3 .5
1 2 1 .5

1 3 4 .5

1 1 8 .5
2 2 6 .5
2 3 9 .5

1 4 7 .5

1 5 2
4 0 .5
2 3 1

X
8 1 .5
6 8
1 9 .5
8 0 .5

Y
3 8 7

4 0 8

3 7 5 .5
4 0 7 .5

7 1
9 0
8 0

N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 2 5

6 4
1 2 8
1 3 6
2 x 1 4
N S E 0 _ 0 0 8 5 9 b

6 x 3 2 (3 P )
8 x 3 2 (4 P )
N S 0 _ 0 0 8 5 8 a
1 0 5 .5
9 1 .5
1 8 3 .5 2 2

Door hinge
point Y
P
Note: A
a minimum distance between
D reference point Y and the door Circuit-breaker only 150
hinge is required for the door cut-outs. Circuit-breaker + plug-in base 150
+ motorized operating mechanism with
energy store
Circuit-breaker + plug-in base 200
+ front-operated rotary operating
mechanism
Circuit-breaker + withdrawable version 200
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 8 6

D > A from table + (P 5)

4/122 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL400 with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
Plug-in bases and accessories
Z 1 7 3 Hole pattern and cut-out for plug-in base,
rear flat bar connection
2 1 0 6 4 .5
1 0 3 .5 Y
(5 ) 8 3 .5 4 6 .5 (1 )
8 9
2 2

4 X 7 .1
9 .5
1 7 4 Y

1 5 5

3 8
1 3 3 .5
6 8

2 5 .5 8 9
X

1 2 .5
1 1 .1 4 4 .5

5 4
X

2 -6
4 6 .5
4 8 6 .5
2 7 4 .5

2 4 6
Z

4 4 9
(3 )
(2 )
(2 )

1 7 3 .5 (4 P )
6 4 .5

3 8
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 2 8 b
(3 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 2 7 a

Y
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 2 6 a
(1 ) (7 )
1 -5

Hole pattern for plug-in base


for front connecting bars
2 1 0 1 7 3
1 0 3 .5 8 9
Y 2 2
Z
4 4 .5 6 4 .5
8 3 .5 4 4 .5
4 2 .5 (9 )
2 2 4 X 7 .1
Y
1 5 5

(1 0 )
(5 )
X
2 8 7
2 6 2

4 4 9
1 9 0

O N I
X X

O F F O
7 1 2

6 6 3
5 1 8

(1) Plug-in base with terminal covers


(2) Plug-in base
1 2 .5

(3) Plug-in base with rear flat bar connection


(5) Terminal covers (standard)
(8 ) (7) Installation level
(8 )
2 5 .5 (8) Plug-in base with front connecting bars
(1 0 )
(9 ) (9) Plug-in base with terminal covers
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 2 9 b on the front
2 2 4
(7 ) (10) Phase barrier

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/123


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL400 with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
Plug-in bases and accessories
SENTRON VL400 circuit-breakers with RCD module, SENTRON VL400 circuit-breakers with RCD module,
withdrawable, with motorized operating mechanism with spring energy withdrawable, with motorized operating mechanism with spring energy
store (connected position) store (disconnected position)
3 6 1 .5 3 8 8 .5
3 2 7 .5 3 2 7 .5
2 2 4 Z 2 2 4
Z
1 2 2 .5 1 9 7
9 5 .5 2 7

(4 )
(4 )

4 X
X

(1 )
(1 2 ) (1 )
(5 )
(5 )
(1 2 )

(8 )
(8 )

(1 0 )
(1 0 )
(6 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 3 0 a
(6 )
1 -3 (1 1 ) N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 3 1 a
1 -3 (1 1 )
(7 )
(7 )

SENTRON VL400 circuit-breakers with RCD module, SENTRON VL400 circuit-breakers with RCD module,
plug-in, with front-operated rotary operating mechanism plug-in, with front-operated rotary operating mechanism
(connected position) (disconnected position)
6 5 2 6 6 6 5 2 9 3
2 5 1 .5
2 5 1 .5
1 4 8 Z
1 4 8 Z 1 2 1 2 7

(5 ) (5 )

(2 ) (2 )

X
X

(3 )

(3 )

(1 2 )
(1 2 )
(9 )
(9 )

(1 0 )
(1 0 )

(6 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 3 3 a
(6 ) (1 1 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 3 2 a 1 -3
(1 1 ) (7 )
1 -3 (7 )

(1) Safety lock (8) Masking frame for door cut-out


(2) Front-operated rotary operating mechanism (for circuit-breaker with RCD module, motorized operating mechanism)
(3) Padlock (9) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with RCD module, toggle lever/rotary operating mechanism)
(4) Motorized operating mechanism with
spring energy store (10) RCD extended escutcheon
(5) Masking frame for door cut-out (11) Locking device for racking mechanism
(for circuit-breaker with operating mechanism) (12) Racking mechanism
(6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level

4/124 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


VL400 with RCD module, 3- and 4-pole, up to 400 A
Plug-in bases and accessories
SENTRON VL400 circuit-breakers with RCD module, SENTRON VL400 circuit-breakers with RCD module,
withdrawable, with extended escutcheon (connected position) withdrawable, with extended escutcheon (disconnected position)
2 6 2 .5 2 8 9 .5
2 5 1 .5 2 5 1 .5
1 4 8 Z
1 4 8
1 2 1 2 7 Z
(5 )
(5 )

(3 )

(3 )

X
X
4
(1 2 )
(9 ) (1 2 )
(9 )

(1 0 )

(1 0 )

(6 )
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 3 4
1 -3 (1 1 ) (6 )

N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 3 5 a
(7 ) (1 1 )
1 -3
(7 )
2 8 8 .5

2 1 7 .5 (5 )
1 1 4 (5 )
Y

(5 )
(1 1 )

(2 )
2 3 2 .5 (5 )

X
9 5 (5 )

(1 2 )

(1) Safety lock


(2) Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
1 6 0 .5

(3) Circuit-breaker extended escutcheon


3 1 9 .5

(4) Motorized operating mechanism with energy store


(5) Masking frame for door cut-out (for circuit-breaker with operating mechanism)
(1 2 ) (6) Outside surface of cabinet door
(7) Installation level
(8) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with RCD module, motorized operating mechanism)
(9 )
(9) Masking frame for door cut-out
(for circuit-breaker with RCD module, toggle lever/rotary operating mechanism)
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 3 6 a

1 0 5 .5 (10) RCD extended escutcheon


(1 2 )
(11) Locking device for racking mechanism
2 5 2 .5 (4 P )
(12) Racking mechanism

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/125


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids

Circuit diagrams
The graphical symbols used in the circuit diagrams provide in- N 1 3 5
formation about the type, circuit and method of operation of the
equipment in accordance with DIN 40713, but contain no infor- F 3 F 2
C 1 D 1 1 4 A 1
mation about the design. C 2 D 2
K 1 H S F 1 +
As it is not possible to show all of the potential combinations
1 3 -
here, it may be necessary to alter the circuit diagrams accord- 1 5
ingly for different versions. 2 4
A u x ilia r y s w it c h
Q 1
The purpose of these circuit diagrams is merely to help improve
the understanding of how the devices function. A S
5 7

R o ta r y m e c h a n is m 6 8 K
Rotary mechanism
L e a d in g a u x ilia r y s w it c h T 1
Leading auxiliary switch A la r m s w it c h

4
3 2 6 5 L K
3 2 6 5 HS E M S T 2
1 4
EMS L K
N 1 3 5 8 9 1 1 1 2
1 4 1 3 T 3
E B S 7 1 0 L
8 9 11 12 K
2 4 T 4
EBS N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 5 9 c
Auxiliary switch L
7 10 I> I> I> I>
N 2 4 6
NSE 00758a
N 2 4 6 T 5
AS
C1 D1
U< 5 7 T 6
C2 D2
6 8 Internal circuit diagram for SENTRON VL160 and VL250, 3 and 4-pole
Alarm switch circuit-breakers for system protection and motor protection with electron-
ic overcurrent trip units
Connection diagram for SENTRON VL160X to VL630, 3 and 4-pole cir-
cuit-breakers for system protection with thermal-magnetic overcurrent
trip units
N 1 3 5

F 3 F 2
C 1 D 1 A 1
C 2 D 2
F 1 + >
H S
1 3
_
>
2 4
A u x ilia r y s w it c h
Q 1
A S
5 7

R o ta r y m e c h a n is m K
6 8
L e a d in g a u x ilia r y s w it c h A la r m s w itc h T 1
3 2 6 5 L K
Q1 Main contacts E M S
1 4 T 2
A1 Electronic overcurrent trip unit L K
F1 Tripping solenoid for A1 8 9 1 1 1 2
E B S T 3
F2 Undervoltage release 7 1 0 K L
F3 Shunt release T 4
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 6 0 d
HS Auxiliary switch L
AS Alarm switch N 2 4 6
EBS Leading auxiliary switch from ON to OFF T 5
(installed in rotary operating mechanism)
EMS Leading auxiliary switch from OFF to ON
(installed in rotary operating mechanism) T 6
T1 ... T6 Current transformers
Internal circuit diagram for SENTRON VL400 circuit-breaker for motor
protection and SENTRON VL400 to VL1600, 3- and 4-pole circuit-break-
ers for system protection with electronic overcurrent trip units

4/126 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


L 1 (L + )
L 1 (L + )
F F
S 1 O N
S 1 O N
S 0 O F F S 0 O F F

2 3 4 S to re d e n e rg y o p e ra to r 2 3 4 S to re d e n e rg y o p e ra to r
S 2 A S 2 B M A N U A L
S 2 B
O F F / S 2 A M A N U A L
C H A R G E O F F /
L O C A L A U T O / H A N D L E C H A R G E
O F F /0 O N /1 M A N U A L A U T O / H A N D L E
O F F O F F /0 O N /1 M A N U A L

L O C K L O C A L
L O C K
Y 1 O U T O F F O U T
Y 1

C B
O P E N
C B
C L O S E D
M
5
P E
C B
O P E N
C B
C L O S E D
M
5
P E
4
S 4
F 1
N (L 2 ,L -) F
N (L 2 ,L -) 1
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 6 1 c N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 6 2 b
S 0 O F F ( to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r)
S 0 O F F ( to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r)
S 1 O N ( to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r)
S 1 O N ( to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r)
S 2 S e le c to r s w itc h a u to /m a n u a l S 2 S e le c to r s w itc h a u to /m a n u a l
S 4 In te r lo c k in g s w itc h S 4 In te r lo c k in g s w itc h
Y 1 C lo s in g s o le n o id Y 1 C lo s in g s o le n o id
F F u s e in c o n tr o l c ir c u it F F u s e in c o n tr o l c ir c u it
S 0 1 R e m o te c o n tro l (to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r ) S 0 1 R e m o te c o n tro l (to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r )
K 1 A u x ilia r y c o n ta c to r ( to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r ) K 1 A u x ilia r y c o n ta c to r ( to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r )

Motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store for Motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store for
SENTRON VL160X to VL250 circuit-breakers without undervoltage re- SENTRON VL400 to VL800 circuit-breakers without undervoltage release
lease
8
L 1 (L + ) S 0 1 S 0 O F F A la r m s w itc h

F K 1
7
S 1 O N 2 3 4 S to re d e n e rg y o p e ra to r
8 S 2 A S 2 B M A N U A L
S 0 1 S 0 O F F A la r m s w itc h C H A
O F F /
R G E
A U T O / H A N D L E
K 1 O F F /0 O N /1 M A N U A L

2 3 4 S to re d e n e rg y o p e ra to r L O C A L
L O C K
S 2 A S 2 B M A N U A L O F F O U T
O F F / Y 1
A U T O / C H A R G E
L O C A L O F F /0 O N /1 M A N U A L H A N D L E
O F F

L O C K
K 1
Y 1 O U T
C B C B M
O P E N C L O S E D 5
P E
S 4
K 1
N (L 2 ,L -) 1
M N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 6 3 c
C B C B 5 F
O P E N C L O S E D P E
S 0 O F F ( to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r)
N (L 2 ,L -)
1 S 1 O N ( to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r)
S 2 S e le c to r s w itc h a u to /m a n u a l
F N S E 0 _ 0 0 5 9 1 c
S 4 In te r lo c k in g s w itc h
S 0 O F F ( to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r) Y 1 C lo s in g s o le n o id
S 1 O N ( to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r) F F u s e in c o n tr o l c ir c u it
S 2 S e le c to r s w itc h a u to /m a n u a l S 0 1 R e m o te c o n tro l (to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r )
Y 1 C lo s in g s o le n o id K 1 A u x ilia r y c o n ta c to r ( to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r )
F F u s e in c o n tr o l c ir c u it
S 0 1 R e m o te c o n tro l (to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r )
K 1 A u x ilia r y c o n ta c to r ( to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r )

Note: a separate alarm switch (7-8) can be incorporated for automatic


charging after a release. Note: a separate alarm switch (7-8) can be incorporated for automatic
Automatic closing of a tripped circuit-breaker is not recommended, in or- charging after a release.
der to prevent a switch of the circuit-breaker to a fault in the protected cir- Automatic closing of a tripped circuit-breaker is not recommended, in or-
cuit. der to prevent a switch of the circuit-breaker to a fault in the protected cir-
cuit.
Motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store for
SENTRON VL160X to VL250 circuit-breakers with undervoltage release Motorized operating mechanism with spring energy store for
SENTRON VL400 to VL800 circuit-breakers with undervoltage release

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/127


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids


L 1 (L + ) L1(L+) L1(L+)
F F4 F4
S 1 O N

S 0 O F F
S0 S0
M o to r d r iv e 2 3 4

L O C A L L O C A L
O N O F F
"S contact" is inte-
grated into shunt S
release
D1
F2
C1
D2 F3
L O C K
M
O U T
C2
C B C B

4
O P E N C L O S E D
S 4 S 2 5
P E
1 IN T E R L O C K O P E N L O C K O U T
N(L2,L-)
N (L 2 ,L -) F5
NSE0_00766 N(L2,L-)
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 6 4 b NSE0_00767
F F5
S 0 O F F ( to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r ) UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASE SHUNT RELEASE
S 1 O N ( to b e s u p p lie d b y c u s to m e r )
S 2 L o c k -o u t Undervoltage release and shunt release for
S 4 In te r lo c k o p e n
F F u s e in c o n tr o l c ir c u it SENTRON VL160X to VL1600 circuit-breakers
S 0 1 R e m o te c o n tro l
K 1 A u x ilia r y c o n ta c to r

Motorized operating mechanism for SENTRON VL1250 and VL1600 A C 4 0 0 V L 1


circuit-breakers without undervoltage release L 2
L 3
N

L1 (L+)
2 1
F S 0 2
7 2 2 X 1 2 1
S1 ON Z 1 S 0 1
8 D 1 T r ip p in g d e la y 2 2
K1 3 5
S0 OFF Alarm switch
u n it
S01 L D 2 3 T X 4
Motor drive 2 3 4
4 6 Y 2 Y 1 X 2
LOCAL LOCAL
ON OFF N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 6 8

S01 Delayed tripping


S02 Instantaneous tripping for EMERGENCY-STOP circuit (if required)
Time-delay device for undervoltage release for SENTRON VL160X to
VL1600 circuit-breakers
M
LOCK
K1 OUT
U< CB CB
OPEN CLOSED
S4 S2 5
PE
1 INTERLOCK OPEN LOCK OUT

N (L2,L-)
NSE00592a
F

Note: a separate alarm switch (7-8) can be incorporated for automatic


charging after a release.
Automatic closing of a tripped circuit-breaker is not recommended, in or-
der to prevent a switch of the circuit-breaker to a fault in the protected cir-
cuit.
Motorized operating mechanism for SENTRON VL1250 and VL1600
circuit-breakers with undervoltage release

4/128 Siemens LV 30 2004


SENTRON VL Circuit-Breakers up to 1600 A

Project planning aids

N 1 3 5 Q
I R E S E T 0
N 1 3 5 Q 0

3 V L 1 F 0 
N 2 4 6

N 2 4 6 N 1 3 5 X 1 2 .1
X 1 2 .2
6 8 X 1 2 .3
N 1 3 5
F 0
T R IP P E D
S IG N A L

5 S 0
I R E S E T
R E M O T E
X 1 3 .1 T R IP P IN G
A
X 1 3 .3
+ - T E S T

4
X 1 3 .2 P E
X 1 2 .1 X 1 2 .3 A
P o w e r
T E S T d is c o n n e c t

P o w e r
N 2 4 6 N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 7 0
d is c o n n e c t
Q 0 C ir c u it- b r e a k e r
A S o lid -s ta te e v a lu a tio n u n it
F 0 T r ip p in g s o le n o id w ith lo c a l tr ip p in g d is p la y a n d r e s e t
T E S T T e s t b u tto n
S 0 R e m o te tr ip p in g ( to b e s e t b y c u s to m e r )
N S E 0 _ 0 0 7 6 9
N 2 4 6

Q 0 C ir c u it- b r e a k e r
A S o lid - s ta te e v a lu a tio n u n it
F 0 T r ip p in g s o le n o id w ith lo c a l tr ip p in g d is p la y a n d r e s e t
T E S T T e s t b u tto n

SENTRON VL160X 4-pole circuit-breaker with RCD module shown. 4-pole circuit-breaker for SENTRON VL160, VL250 and VL400
3-pole version similar, but without N-pole. circuit-breakers with remote-controlled tripping and RCD alarm switch.
3-pole version similar, but without N-pole.

Further information
Manual for the SENTRON VL circuit-breakers
This manual contains additional technical information, covering
a product description, mode of operation, electrical wiring sys-
tem and retrofitting.
The manual and operating instructions are available in PDF for-
mat at:
www.siemens.de/energieverteilung

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/129


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

General data

Area of application Overcurrent trip system


All circuit-breakers are supplied complete with an integral over-
Specifications current trip unit (see figure "3VF5 circuit-breaker, internal
All 3VF circuit-breakers comply with: construction" *).
IEC 60947-1/DIN VDE 0660, Part 100;
IEC 60947-2/DIN VDE 0660, Part 101. 2 N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 3 0
Isolation characteristics according to IEC 60947-3 1

In addition, the overload protection for motor protection circuit-


breakers complies with: 3
IEC 60947-4-1/DIN VDE 0660, Part 132.
The main control switches comply with
DIN VDE 0113, see Page 4/132. 4
5
Circuit-breakers with DI modules comply with IEC 60947 -2 and
4 DIN VDE 0660 Part 101, the differential current protection com-
plies with IEC 60947-2, Appendix B.
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of circuit-breakers with DI
modules complies with IEC 60801-2 to -5.
Operating conditions 6
3VF circuit-breakers are climate proof. They are intended for use 1 E n c lo s u r e
in enclosed areas where no severe operating conditions (e.g. 2 M a in c ir c u it c o n n e c tio n s
dust, corrosive vapors, damaging gases) are present. 3 A rc c h u te
4 M o v in g c o n ta c ts
When installed in dusty and damp areas, suitable enclosures 5 B re a k e r m e c h a n is m
(enclosures, cabinets) must be provided. 6 E le c tr o n ic o v e r c u r r e n t tr ip u n it m o d u le

The permissible ambient temperatures and the associated rated


currents are listed in the Technical data (see Page 4/136). 3VF5 circuit-breaker, internal construction

Degree of protection
Circuit-breaker IP30
With front rotary operating mechanism IP54 O N

N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 2 9
With door-coupling rotary operating IP65 O F F
mechanism
With motor/solenoid operation IP20
1
With plug-in socket IP20

Circuit-breaker with DI module


Personal safety in TT, IT and TN systems (setting In = 30 mA, 2
td instantaneous)1)
1 T o g g le le v e r
Protection of plant and equipment against overload or
2 W in d o w fo r o p e r a tin g s ta te
damage by ground faults (ground fault protection).

Toggle lever
1) IEC specifications (not DIN VDE 0100 Part 4/10).

Design
N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 3 1

O F F R E S E T
The basic versions of the 3VF circuit-breakers are equipped with
a toggle lever as an operating mechanism (see figure "Toggle
lever" ), which is also used as a switch position indicator. In ad- O N
dition to the "ON" and "OFF" positions, the "Tripped" position is
also possible.
The toggle lever jumps to the "Tripped" position if the circuit-
breaker has been tripped by the operation of its overload, short-
T r ip p e d
circuit, shunt or undervoltage release or by pressing the "TEST"-
button. To be able to reclose the circuit-breaker after tripping,
the toggle lever must be moved beyond the "OFF" position
("RESET"). It is then ready to close again (see figure "Positions of
toggle lever"). Positions of toggle lever
As additional switching status indication, the 3VF3 to 3VF8
circuit-breakers have 2 windows to the left and right of the toggle
lever (see figure "Toggle lever" %) in which the colors red, green
and white correspond to the "ON", "OFF" and "Tripped" positions.

4/130 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

General data
Connection Connection accessories
(See also Accessories, Page 4/182) Two types of connection are possible for internally-fitted acces-
sories (auxiliary releases, auxiliary switches) (see figure
The basic circuit-breakers are supplied as follows: "Auxiliary release and auxiliary switch"):
With box terminals With terminal block (on the side of the breaker)
With connecting leads (finely stranded)
3VF2 to 3VF5 circuit-breakers for the direct connection of
stranded or finely-stranded conductors with end sleeves (see Motorized operating mechanisms always have connection ter-
figure "Box terminals for 3VF3 and 3VF4" and Technical data). minals.
Accessories
All circuit-breakers are supplied complete with internally-fitted
accessories according to order (e.g. auxiliary or alarm switches,
NSE0_000033

undervoltage or shunt releases). The equipment options can be


seen from the ordering tables on Page 4/174. Externally fitted
accessories, such as rotary operating mechanisms, motorized
operating mechanisms, connection accessories etc. are always
supplied separately.
4

Box terminal for 3VF3 (left) and 3VF4 (right)


Busbar connection pieces
3VF6 to 3VF8 circuit-breakers are connected using busbar con-
nection pieces. These are designed for the connection of stan-
dard busbars and are available for front or rear connection.

NSE0_00034

NSE0_00035
NSE0_00032
Auxiliary release, auxiliary switch -
connection with terminal strip (left)
connection with connecting leads (right)
Front busbar connection pieces for 3VF7
Operating mechanisms (see also Page 4/178)
3VF6 circuit-breakers are supplied with front connection pieces. Front-operated rotary operating mechanisms (figure "Front-op-
The connection of laminated flat copper bars using clamp termi- erated rotary operating mechanism for 3VF3")
nations is possible with breaker types 3VF3 (up to 160 A), 3VF4, These are designed for fitting directly on the circuit-breaker and
3VF5, 3VF6 and 3VF7 (up to 800 A). convert the vertical toggle lever movement into a rotary motion
The incoming and outgoing side can be chosen as desired for (rotary operating mechanism with knob).
all circuit-breakers. The electrical data remains unchanged. An
exception to this are circuit-breakers fitted with DI modules:
these breakers must be fed from the top.
Bare conductors and bars at the top connections must be insu-
lated in the space above the arc chute (see dimension drawings
on Page 4/191). Phase barriers (see Accessories, Pages 4/182
and 4/183) can also be used for this purpose.
Installation type
Fixed-mounting
In the standard version
Plug-in circuit-breakers
Instead of box terminals, the circuit-breakers have 6 blade con- Front-operated rotary operating mechanism for 3VF6
tacts and also a safety trip pin. This causes the breaker to be
tripped if an attempt is made to unplug it while it is closed and Leading auxiliary switch on closing "S4" for front-operated rotary
prevents the breaker from being switched on before it is properly operating mechanisms (figure below).
located in its socket.
If the circuit-breaker has a leading auxiliary switch, it is possible
Withdrawable circuit-breakers to apply voltage early to the undervoltage release and thus pre-
pare the breaker for closing.
3VF6 and 3VF7 circuit-breakers are available in a withdrawable
design. Withdrawable circuit-breakers cannot be fitted with mo-
0 1 L e a d in g a u x ilia r y s w itc h
torized operating mechanisms. L 1 , L 2 , L 3 O N , "S 4 "
N S BE 0 _ 0 0 0 3 6

S 4
o n fr o n t r o ta r y d r iv e
S w itc h O N 0 1
c lo s e d
o p e n

Leading auxiliary switch after ON "S4" in front-operated rotary operating


mechanism
Siemens LV 30 2004 4/131
Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

General data
Leading auxiliary switch "S5" on opening Synchronizable motorized operating mechanisms
for front-operated rotary operating mechanisms (figure below) (stored energy operating mechanisms)
If a circuit-breaker has a leading auxiliary switch on opening, the For synchronizable rapid closing (tE < 80 ms) or for normal re-
leading deactivation of, for example, thyristors is possible. mote tripping, solenoid or stored energy operating mechanisms
are available.
1 0 L e a d in g a u x ilia r y Locking devices to accept padlocks are available as an option
L 1 , L 2 , L 3 s w itc h for motorized operating mechanisms and are generally fitted to
N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 4 0

S 5 O F F , "S 5 "
S w itc h O F F 1 0 o n fr o n t r o ta r y d r iv e stored energy and solenoid operating mechanisms. These pro-
c lo s e d vide electrical and mechanical lockout of the mechanism. All re-
o p e n
motely-controlled mechanisms are provided with a manual oper-
ation device that permits all switching operations to be
Leading auxiliary switch after OFF "S5" in front-operated rotary operating performed locally.
mechanism
Auxiliary releases and auxiliary switches
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms (see figure "Door-
4 coupling rotary operating mechanism for 3VF4") (complete oper-
ating mechanisms)
Undervoltage releases, leading auxiliary switches
The circuit-breaker can only be closed if voltage is applied to the
Door coupling mechanisms in the 8UC6 range are available for undervoltage release. If voltage is not applied to the release, op-
fitting to circuit-breakers in control cabinets and distribution eration of the circuit-breaker will result in no-load switching.
boards with doors and detachable covers. These are supplied Frequent re-tripping should be avoided because of its adverse
as complete kits, including an articulated-shaft mechanism; see effect on the service life of the circuit-breaker.
Page 4/189.
If the circuit-breaker has a leading auxiliary switch, it is possible
With regard to the switching positions and the "RESET" opera- to apply voltage early to the undervoltage release and thus pre-
tion, the same applies to rotary operating mechanisms as to tog- pare the breaker for closing.
gle levers.
Indication is by the position of the knob (see figure "Position of For 3VF circuit-breakers, the leading auxiliary switch can be
toggle lever"). supplied with the front rotary operating mechanisms or complete
operating mechanisms. See "Accessories" for more information.
Time-delay device for undervoltage release
To avoid tripping of the circuit-breaker during brief interruptions
or drops in the voltage, delay devices can be fitted in the under-
voltage release circuit. When selecting a circuit-breaker with de-
layed undervoltage release, it must be noted that the voltage of
the undervoltage release must be selected for DC.
Shunt release
The shunt release (f release) is used for remote tripping.
The coil of the shunt release is designed for short-time operation
only.
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism for 3VF4
It is not permissible to apply a continuous trip command to a
Front rotary operating mechanisms and door-coupling rotary shunt release to prevent closing when the circuit-breaker is
operating mechanisms tripped, i.e. interlocking circuits with a continuous command
must not be designed to operate a shunt release.
All rotary operating mechanisms can be locked in the "OFF" po-
sition using padlocks. All 3VF circuit-breakers equipped with Auxiliary switches
these mechanisms and with suitable terminal covers can there-
fore be used as main switches in accordance with Auxiliary switches are used for indication and control. The vari-
DIN VDE 0113. ous functions of the auxiliary switch (1 changeover) can be seen
from the table.
Motorized operating mechanisms (figure "Motorized operating
mechanism for 3VF4") Alarm switches

3VF3 to 3VF8 circuit-breakers can be equipped with motorized The alarm switch operates when the circuit-breaker is tripped by
operating mechanisms to permit remote-controlled opening and short-circuit or overcurrent, and also when tripped by the shunt
closing. release or undervoltage release.

Motorized operating mechanism for 3VF4

4/132 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

General data

3 -p o le 4 -p o le
c ir c u it- c ir c u it-
b re a k e rs b re a k e rs
le ft r ig h t le ft r ig h t

N S E 0 0 0 3 7 b

D I 1 H S D I 1 H S

D I 2 H S D I 2 H S

D I 1 A S D I 1 A S

D I 1 A S + 1 H S D I 1 A S 1 H S

2 A S 1 H S 2 A S 1 H S

1 A S 2 H S 1 A S 2 H S

2 A S

1 H S
2 H S

4 H S 4 H S 4 H S
2 A S

4 H S
2 H S

4 H S 4 H S
4
2 A S 2 A S 2 A S 2 A S 2 A S 2 A S

3 V F 3 fo r m o to r p r o te c tio n

D I D I S h u n t r e le a s e o r u n d e r v o lta g e r e le a s e o r
1 H S 1 ) D I m o d u le ( if b u ilt in )
1 H S
H S A u x ilia r y s w itc h
2 H S
A S A la r m s w itc h
1 A S
F o r 3 V F 8 c ir c u it- b r e a k e r s o n ly
1 A S + 1 H S
1 ) A v a ila b le o n ly fo r 3 V F 3 . ...- .....- ..F 1 .
2 A S

Options for equipping 3VF3 to 3VF8 circuit-breakers with auxiliary and alarm switches
(for complete range of equipment options see Page 4/174).

P o s itio n o f to g g le le v e r P o s itio n o f 3 V F 2 P o s itio n o f P o s itio n o f 3 V F 3 P o s itio n o f 3 V F 3 P o s itio n o f 3 V F 3 to 3 V F 8 P o s itio n o f 3 V F 3 to 3 V F 8


( a ls o a p p lie s to r o ta r y a u x ilia r y s w itc h e s 3 V F 2 a la r m to 3 V F 8 a u x ilia r y 1 ) 2 ) to 3 V F 8 a la r m 1 ) le a d in g a u x ilia r y s w itc h 3 ) le a d in g a u x ilia r y s w itc h 3 )
o p e r a tin g m e c h a n is m ) s w itc h e s s w itc h e s s w itc h e s a fte r O N a fte r O F F
3 (6 ) 1 (4 ) 3 1 1 2 (2 2 ) 1 4 (2 4 ) 1 6 (2 6 ) 1 8 (2 8 ) 6 7 7 7 6 3 7 3
O F F (R E S E T )

2 (5 ) 2 1 1 (2 1 ) 1 5 (2 5 ) 6 8 7 8 6 4 7 4

3 (6 ) 1 (4 ) 3 1 1 2 (2 2 ) 1 4 (2 4 ) 1 6 (2 6 ) 1 8 (2 8 ) 6 7 7 7 6 3 7 3
O N

2 (5 ) 2 1 1 (2 1 ) 1 5 (2 5 ) 6 8 7 8 6 4 7 4

3 (6 ) 1 (4 ) 3 1 1 2 (2 2 ) 1 4 (2 4 ) 1 6 (2 6 ) 1 8 (2 8 ) 6 7 7 7 6 3 7 3
T r ip p e d

2 (5 ) 2 1 1 (2 1 ) 1 5 (2 5 ) 6 8 7 8 6 4 7 4
1 ) V a lu e s in b ra c k e ts a p p ly to s e c o n d s w itc h b lo c k N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 4 1

2 ) T h e te rm in a l d e s ig n a tio n s fo r th e 3 rd a n d 4 th a u x ilia r y s w itc h c a n b e s e e n


fro m th e c ir c u it d ia g ra m o n th e In te rn e t u n d e r w w w .a d .s ie m e n s .d e /c s i/c d
3 ) In te g ra te d in ro ta ry o p e r a tin g m e c h a n is m s .

Operation of contacts of auxiliary and alarm switches depending on the switching status of the circuit-breaker

Mounting of auxiliary and alarm switches (see Accessories,


Page 4/174)
Circuit-breaker with DI module
The equipping of a circuit-breaker with auxiliary switches and
alarm switches depends on the position in which these switches Displays/shunt release
are fitted in the circuit-breaker and on the size of the circuit- A visual indicator in the circuit-breaker cover and an auxiliary
breaker. switch for remote monitoring indicate whether the circuit-breaker
The mounting position of the auxiliary switches and alarm has been tripped by the DI trip unit.
switches differs according to the version of the circuit-breaker The DI trip unit can also be used as a shunt release for remote
(see Page 4/174). tripping of the circuit-breaker.

PLC control The circuit-breaker and DI module combination is fed from the
top.
Coupling units or contactor relays should be used to interface
with a PLC. The 3VF circuit-breakers (3- and 4-pole) with DI module can be
supplied with auxiliary and alarm switches (2nd Order No.
supplement, see Pages 4/171 and 4/172).
No undervoltage or additional shunt release is possible for cir-
cuit-breakers with DI module (1st Order No. supplement: "0A",
see Pages 4/171 and 4/172).
Siemens LV 30 2004 4/133
Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

General data

Functions
3VF2 to 3VF6 circuit-breakers for system protection with me- The delay time td can be set from 0 (instantaneous) to 300 ms in
chanical overload and short-circuit release, i.e. overcurrent 4 increments.
trip unit version "LI"
This means that time-based discrimination to downstream cir-
The overload and short-circuit releases function with bimetallic cuit-breakers can be achieved up to current values of
or magnetic elements. They can be supplied as non-adjustable - 4.0 kA 15% for 3VF5,
or adjustable units. - 5.5 kA 15% for 3VF5,
- 15 kA 15% for 3VF7 and
Four-pole circuit-breakers for system protection can be supplied - 20 kA 15% for 3VF8.
optionally with overcurrent trip units in all 4 poles or without over-
current trip unit in the 4th pole (N). Above 100 A rated current the
trip units in the 4th pole (N) are designed for 60 % of the current
of the 3 main conductors to ensure safe protection for cables Instantaneous short-circuit tripping operation "I"
with reduced cross-section neutral conductors. The operating value Ii of the instantaneous short-circuit release
4 1 2 3 4
is set to a fixed value of 4 kA for 3VF5, 5.5 kA for 3VF6, 15 kA for
3VF7 and 20 kA for 3VF8. The electronic circuit of the overcurrent
trip unit is inherently safe at high temperatures: if the tempera-
d d
ture of the printed circuit board rises to 90 C the circuit-breaker
5 3 0 0 trips.
r 4 6 2 0 0
6 3 0 A
3 7 1 0 0 m s E le c tr o n ic o v e r c u r r e n t tr ip u n it
2 8
8 0 0 A
N o n - d e la y e d
Circuit-breakers for motor protection
1 0 0 0 A
1 2 5 0 A X > > > >
i
1 5 k A A C T IV E All circuit-breakers for motor protection are equipped with elec-
N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 2 8 tronic overcurrent trip units. These work on the same principle as
1 C u r r e n t s e ttin g r 4 L E D fla s h e s : the electronic overcurrent trip units fitted to the line protection
2 O p e r a tin g c u r r e n t d F a u lt- fr e e o p e r a tio n o f e le c tr o n ic o v e r c u r r e n t tr ip u n it; circuit-breakers.
L E D s te a d y lig h t:
3 D e la y tim e d
O v e r lo a d s ta te The characteristic curve of the inverse-time delayed overcurrent
trip unit is optimally matched to the overload behavior of three-
Electronic overcurrent trip unit for system protection (example 3VF7) phase motors. Depending on the version, the time lag character-
istic of the overload release can be set in steps between
3VF5 to 3VF8 system protection circuit-breakers with "Class 5" and "Class 30".
electronic overcurrent trip unit Phase failure sensitivity is also integrated into this version vari-
All 3VF7 to 3VF8 circuit-breakers are equipped with "LSI" elec- ant, so that the motor is provided with reliable protection even in
tronic overcurrent trip units for short-delay short-circuit tripping. the event of phase failure or severe asymmetry.
The electronic overcurrent trip unit system consists of: All 3VF3 to 3VF6 circuit-breakers for motor protection have a so-
called "thermal memory" which stores the preload of the breaker
3 current transformers and tripping history due to overload and takes account of the
Evaluation electronics with microprocessor heating of the motor by reducing the tripping time. A cooling pe-
Tripping solenoid. riod of a few minutes may therefore be required following trip-
ping due to overload before the motor can be re-started.
No auxiliary voltage supply is required for the release system.
The same applies if there are too many starts within a short pe-
A minimum load current of approximately 20% of the corre- riod which can cause the motor to heat up excessively. A reclos-
sponding rated current In of the circuit-breaker is required to ac- ing lockout remains in force for one minute following a trip on
tivate the overcurrent trip unit. overload.
Fault-free operation of the overcurrent trip unit is indicated by the In circuits with very high harmonic content caused by frequency
"heartbeat", a flashing LED ( ("ACTIVE") (see figure "Electronic converters or soft starters, 3VF2 to 3VF6 circuit-breakers with "LI"
overcurrent trip unit" (). A maintained light indicates an over- bimetal releases are recommended.
load condition I > 100 % In an.
Circuit-breakers for starter combinations
Inverse-time delayed overload tripping operation "L"
Circuit-breakers for starter combinations are used in practice to-
The 3VF5 to 3VF8 circuit-breakers for system protection with gether with a motor contactor and a matched overload relay.
electronic trip units have real r.m.s. current measuring and are
therefore also suitable for use in networks with a high harmonic Non-automatic circuit-breakers
content. The harmonics are evaluated for overload protection in
Non-automatic circuit-breakers have integral short-circuit pro-
the usual manner.
tection so that back-up fuses are not required. 4-pole non-auto-
The set current Ir can be set from 0.5 to 1 times the value of the matic circuit-breakers do not have a short-circuit release in the
rated current In of the circuit-breaker in 4 increments. 4th pole (N).
The time-lag class of the inverse-time delayed tripping operation Circuit-breakers as main control switches to EN 60204 or
corresponds to 10 s with 7.2 Ir (see figure "Electronic overcur- DIN VDE 0113 in combination with lockable rotary operating
rent trip unit" $). mechanisms with terminal covers or as EMERGENCY-STOP
switches to EN 60204 or DIN VDE 0113 in combination with red
Short-time delayed short-circuit tripping operation "S" operating mechanisms on yellow backgrounds and undervolt-
The operating value Id can be set in 7 increments between 2 and age releases, if required.
8 times the value of Ir.

4/134 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

General data
Circuit-breaker with DI module Settings
The DI module detects ground fault currents in 3- and 4-wire The differential tripping current In is adjustable in increments
systems (AC or pulsating DC) and causes the circuit-breaker to from 30 mA to 30 A.
switch off the faulty circuit. The trip delay can be set from instantaneous to 1 sec in incre-
Equipping a 3VF circuit-breaker with a DI module has no effect ments.
on the characteristics of the circuit-breaker: Exception: with setting In = 30 mA, tripping is instantaneous.
Rated voltage (50/60 Hz), rated current, switching capacity The setting knob can be sealed to prevent unauthorized ac-
cess.
Electrical and mechanical life
The control panel incorporates a test button to electronically
Connections test the function of the current transformers, the evaluation
Operating mechanisms electronics and the DI trip unit in the circuit-breaker.
Auxiliary switches and releases. The DI module detects 1, 2, 3 or 4-pole loads with its integral
summation current transformer.
In a fault-free system, the sum of the conductor currents in the
current transformer of the DI module is equal to zero. If a fault
current flows to ground due to an insulation fault in the part of the Integration 4
system being protected, a differential current results. This pro-
duces a voltage in the secondary winding of the current trans-
Installation
former. The induced voltage is evaluated electronically and a trip Mounting the circuit-breakers in line without intermediate spac-
signal is given to the DI trip unit in the circuit-breaker if the trip ing is, in fact, possible but is not recommended because of the
conditions are fulfilled. reduced heat dissipation (and possible reduction of current rat-
ing).

3VF circuit-breaker with DI module

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/135


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

General data

Technical specifications
Type 3VF2
Standards IEC 60947, EN 60947
Max. rated current In A 16 ... 100
Rated insulation voltage Ui
Main circuits AC V 415
Control circuits AC V 415
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
Main circuits kV 6
Control circuits kV 4
Rated operating voltage Ue, 50/60 Hz
IEC AC V up to 415
Permissible ambient temperature C 20 ... +70

4
Permissible load
at various ambient temperatures
close to the circuit-breaker, related to the rated
current of the circuit-breaker up to 100 A
Circuit-breakers at 40 C % 100
for system protection 50 C % 92
55 C % 87
60 C % 83
70 C % 73
Rated short-circuit Switching capacity A
breaking capacity class
Rated ultimate short-circuit up to 240 V kA 65
breaking capacity Iu up to 415 V kA 18
Rated service short-circuit up to 240 V kA 33
breaking capacity Ics up to 415 V kA 9
Rated short-circuit up to 240 V kA 143
making capacity Icm up to 415 V kA 36
Main control switch properties to IEC 60947-2 yes
in conjunction with lockable rotary operating mechanisms
EMERGENCY-STOP switch properties yes
to DIN VDE 0113
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 10000
Operating frequency 1/h 120
Conductor cross-sections and types of connec-
tion for main conductors (copper or aluminum)
Connection type Box terminal
Solid or stranded up to 45 A mm2 2.5 ... 10
45 ... 100 A mm2 16 ... 50
125 A mm2 70
Tightening torque for box terminals Nm 4.0 (up to 40 A)/5.7 (45 ... 100 A)
Conductor cross-sections for control circuits
with terminal connection or terminal strip, solid mm2 0.5 ... 2.5
Tightening torque for terminal screws Nm 0.9
Power loss per circuit-breaker
at max. rated current In
with 3-phase symmetrical load
System protection W 16
Permissible mounting position 90
90 90 90

NSE0_00026 NSE0_01242

Auxiliary switches
Conventional thermal current Ith A 6
Rated making capacity A 15
AC (AC-15)
Rated operating voltage V 240
Rated operating current A 6
DC (DC-13)
Rated operating voltage V 125
Rated operating current A 0.5
Back-up fuse A 4
Trip units
Shunt release (f-release)
Operating voltage
Pick-up (circuit-breaker is tripped)
Power input (short time) at:
AC 50/60 Hz 12 ... 24 V VA 108
AC 50/60 Hz 48 ... 60 V VA 120
AC 50/60 Hz 48 ... 127 V VA 162
DC 12 ... 24 V W 14.4
DC 48 ... 60 V W 19.2
DC 110 ... 125 V W 38.4
DC 220 ... 250 V W 44
Max. duration of operating voltage interrupts automatically
Max. opening time ms 50

4/136 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

General data

Type 3VF3 3VF4 3VF5 3VF6 3VF7 3VF8


Max. rated current In AC/DC A 160; 205/225 200/250 315/400 500/630/800 800/1250 1600/2000 2500
depending on version
Rated insulation voltage Ui
to IEC 60947-2
Main circuits AC V 750 750 750 750 750 750
Control circuits AC V 690 690 690 690 690 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
Main circuits kV 8
Control circuits kV 4
Rated operating voltage Ue, 50/60 Hz
IEC AC V 6901) 690 690 690 690 690
NEMA AC V 6001) 600 600 600 600 600
IEC DC V 750 750 750 750 2) 2)
Permissible ambient temperature C 20 ... + 70 5 ... + 60
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity
(DC) not for 3VF motor protection circuit-breakers
Time constant = 10 ms
4
1 current 2 current 3 current 4 current
path paths in paths in paths in
series series series
for 3VF3 to 3VF6
up to DC 250 V DC 440 V DC 600 V DC 750 V kA 20/107) 20 20 20 2) 2)
NEMA
Time constant = 8 ms
1 current path 2 current paths in series
DC 250 V kA 10 10 10 10 2) 2)
DC 250 V kA 22/207) 22 22 22 2) 2)
Permissible load
at various ambient temperatures
close to the circuit-breaker, related to $ % $ % $ % & $ % & $ & &
the rated current of the circuit-breaker
Circuit-breakers at 40 C % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
for system protection 50 C % 96 92 96 94 96 92 100 96 91 100 91 100 100
55 C % 93 87 94 90 93 87 100 93 86 100 85 100 96
60 C % 91 83 92 87 90 84 100 90 82 100 81 100 92
70 C % 86 73 88 80 85 75 85 85 70 84
Circuit-breakers at 40 C % 100; 100 100 100
for motor protection 50 C % 100; 96 100 100
55 C % 100; 90 100 100
60 C % 100; 86 100 100
70 C % 100; 77 87 90
Circuit-breakers at 40 C % 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
for starter combinations 50 C % 100 100 100 100 91 100 100
and non-automatic 55 C % 96 96 95 95 85 100 96
circuit-breakers 60 C % 91 92 90 90 81 100 92
70 C % 86 88 85 84
Main control switch properties to IEC 60947-2 yes yes yes yes yes yes
in conjunction with lockable rotary
operating mechanisms
EMERGENCY-STOP switch properties yes yes yes yes yes yes
to DIN VDE 0113
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity See Page 4/141 for rated short-circuit breaking capacity.
to IEC 60947-2 (AC 50/60 Hz)6)
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 10000 10000 8000 8000 3000 3000
Operating frequency 1/h 300 240 240 240 60 20
Conductor cross-sections and
types of connection for main conductors5)
Connection type Box terminals Box terminals Box terminals Flat Flat Flat Mount
connector connector connector busbars
vertically
Solid or stranded mm2 2.5 ... 70; 95 50 ... 150 95 ... 2408)
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2.5 ... 50; 70 35 ... 120 70 ... 150
Busbar mm 140 104) 240103) 260103)/ 38010
Multiple feed-in terminal (accessory) 280103)
Cu or Al, stranded mm2 2(185...240) 4(95...185)
Laminated flat copper, max. width mm 13 15 20 40 40
(max 160 A) (max 630 A) (max 800 A)
Tightening torque for box terminals Nm 5/9 20 42 31 31
Tightening torque for busbar connection pieces Nm 4.5/4.5 15 30 6 50 37 20
1) For circuit-breakers with rated currents 40 A: 6) Also suitable for use in 400 Hz systems, technical specifications on
Ue max. 415 V. request.
2) Circuit-breaker cannot be used for direct current. 7) 10 kA for 3VF.. ..0........
3) Busbar connection pieces (see Accessories). 8) 240 mm2 not suitable for segmented conductors as the terminal has an
4) 800 A: 3 40 5. oval aperture.
5) Max. cross-section for one conductor only. For smaller cross-sections: sum $ Thermal overload release set to the upper value, or permanently set ther-
up to max. cross-section can be connected. Use identical cross-sections. mal overload release.
CupAI end sleeves/cable lugs or CupAI shims are recommended for con- % Thermal overload release set to the lower value.
necting aluminum conductors. & Electronic trip unit.

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/137


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

General data

Type 3VF3 3VF4 3VF5 3VF6 3VF7 3VF8


Conductor cross-sections for control circuits1)
with terminal connection or terminal strip
Solid mm2 0.75 ... 2.5 0.75 ... 2.5 0.75 ... 2.5 0.75 ... 2.5 up ... 24 up ... 24
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 0.75 ... 2.5 0.75 ... 2.5 0.75 ... 2.5 0.75 ... 2.5 up ... 22.5 up ... 22.5
With brought-out cable ends mm2 0.82 (AWG 18) 0.82 (AWG 18) 0.82 (AWG 18) 0.82 (AWG 18) 0.82 (AWG 18) 0.82 (AWG 18)
Tightening torque for terminal screws Nm 0.8 ... 1.4 0.8 ... 1.4 0.8 ... 1.4 0.8 ... 1.4 0.8 ... 1.4 0.8 ... 1.4
Power loss per circuit-breaker (The power loss of the undervoltage release (r-release) must
at max. rated current In also be taken into account where applicable)
with 3-phase symmetrical load & &
System protection W 60 75 175 75 255 120 87/210 135/240 400
Non-automatic circuit-breakers W 45 75 107 160 87/210 135/240 400
For starter combinations W 45 45 107 160
Motor protection W 60 75 120
Permissible mounting position

4
90 90 90 90

NSE0_00026 NSE0_01242

1) 2 conductors can be connected.


& Electronic trip unit.

Type 3VF3 3VF4 3VF5 3VF6 3VF7 3VF8


Auxiliary switches
Conventional thermal current Ith A 6 6 6 6 6 6
Rated making capacity A 20 20 20 20 20 20
AC (AC-15)
Rated operating voltage V 230 415 690 230 415 690 230 415 690 230 415 690 230 415 690 230 415 690
Rated operating current A 6 3 0.25 6 3 0.25 6 3 0.25 6 3 0.25 6 3 0.25 6 3 0.25
DC (DC-13)
Rated operating voltage V 24 125 240 24 125 240 24 125 240 24 125 240 24 125 240 24 125 240
Rated operating current A 6 0.5 0.15 6 0.5 0.15 6 0.5 0.15 6 0.5 0.15 6 0.5 0.15 6 0.5 0.15
Back-up fuse A 6 4 4 6 4 4 6 4 4 6 4 4 6 4 4 6 4 4
Miniature circuit-breaker A 6 4 4 6 4 4 6 4 4 6 4 4 6 4 4 6 4 4
Leading auxiliary switches (only in combination with rotary operating mechanism)
Continuous thermal current Ith A 2 16
Rated making capacity A 2 (inductive 0.5) 60
AC p.f. 0.7 0.7
Rated operating voltage V 220 380
Rated operating current A 2 (inductive 0.5) 6
Rated breaking capacity A 2 60
Back-up fuse (quick) A 2 16
Trip units
Undervoltage release (r-release)
Operating voltage:
Drop (breaker trips) V 0.7 ... 0.35 Us 0.7 ... 0.35 Us 0.7 ... 0.35 Us 0.7 ... 0.35 Us 0.7 ... 0.35 Us 0.7 ... 0.35 Us
Pick-up (breaker can be closed) V 0.85 ... 1.1 Us 0.85 ... 1.1 Us 0.85 ... 1.1 Us 0.85 ... 1.1 Us 0.85 ... 1.1 Us 0.85 ... 1.1 Us
Power consumption in continuous operation at:
AC 50/60 Hz 12 V VA 2.5 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.9 2.9
AC 50/60 Hz 24 V VA 1.4 6.0 6.0 6.0 2.4 3.1
AC 50/60 Hz 4860 V VA 1.2 ... 1.9 3.2 ... 5.5 3.2 ... 5.5 3.2 ... 5.5 2.3 ... 4.1 3.4 ... 6.0
AC 50/60 Hz 110127 V VA 1.3 ... 1.7 2.2 ... 2.9 2.2 ... 2.9 2.2 ... 2.9 3.4 ... 4.2 3.3 ... 3.8
AC 50/60 Hz 208240 V VA 2.2 ... 2.9 3.5 ... 4.6 3.5 ... 4.6 3.5 ... 4.6 4.8 ... 6.5 4.2 ... 7.2
AC 50/60 Hz 380500 V VA 2.9 ... 5 3.9 ... 6.9 3.9 ... 6.9 3.9 ... 6.9 6.8 ... 12.0 3.8 ... 10.0
DC 12 V W 2.8 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.8 3.4
DC 24 V W 1.6 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.6 4.3
DC 4860 V W 1.32.0 3.5 ... 5.4 3.5 ... 5.4 3.5 ... 5.4 3.56.5 4.8 ... 7.2
DC 110125 V W 1.5 ... 1.9 3.2 ... 4.1 3.2 ... 4.1 3.2 ... 4.1 2.9 ... 3.6 3.3 ... 3.8
DC 220250 V W 2.6 ... 3.4 5.5 ... 6.9 5.5 ... 6.9 5.5 ... 6.9 4.8 ... 6.3 6.6 ... 7.5
Max. opening time ms 50 50 50 50 80 80
Shunt release (f-release)
Operating voltage
Pick-up (circuit-breaker is tripped) V 0.7 ... 1.1 Us 0.7 ... 1.1 Us 0.7 ... 1.1 Us 0.7 ... 1.1 Us 0.7 ... 1.1 Us 0.7 ... 1.1 Us
Power input (short time) at:
AC 50/60 Hz 1224 V VA 40 ... 300 87 ... 405 87 ... 405 81 ... 701 86 ... 631 177 ... 1207
AC 50/60 Hz 4860 V VA 710 ... 1105 710 ... 1105 58 ... 90 48 ... 71 443 ... 731
AC 50/60 Hz 48127 V VA 92 ... 640
AC 50/60 Hz 110240 V VA 51 ... 240 66 ... 432 66 ... 432 118 ... 665 81 ... 505 323 ... 1466
AC 50/60 Hz 380440 V VA 127 ... 188 127 ... 188 125 ... 181 43 ... 68 1193 ... 1641
AC 50/60 Hz 380600 V VA 278 ... 700
AC 50/60 Hz 480600 V VA 34 ... 60 34 ... 60 43 ... 79 41 ... 69 197 ... 312
DC 1224 V W 54 ... 400 164 ... 631 164 ... 631 79 ... 1000 46 ... 405 289 ... 865
DC 4860 V W 100 ... 160 830 ... 1580 830 ... 1580 18 ... 31 58 ... 94 468 ... 696
DC 110125 V W 55 ... 71 112 ... 150 112 ... 150 112 ... 150 74 ... 98 363 ... 473
DC 220250 V W 110 ... 140 40 ... 58 40 ... 58 38 ... 52 38 ... 49 513 ... 665
Max. duration of operating voltage S interrupted automatically
Max. opening time ms 50 50 50 50 62 62

4/138 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

General data
Back-up fuses according to UL/CSA for "General Use Switch"
In conformance with Approval File E167267, 3VF circuit-breakers to UL 508 are only permitted to be operated with the following UL-
or CSA-approved back-up fuses up to AC 600 V:
Type Rated current "L" In max. UL back-up fuse (AC 600 V)
A A
3VF31 31.FL41.... 50 200
3VF31 31.FN41.... 60 225
3VF31 31.FQ41.... 80 300
3VF31 31.FS41.... 100 400
3VF42 31.DF41.... 125 500
3VF42 31.DH41.... 150 600
3VF42 31.DK41.... 200 800
3VF42 31.DM41.... 250 1000
3VF52 31.DF41.... 200 800
250 1000
4
3VF52 31.DH41....
3VF62 31.DF41.... 300 1200
3VF62 31.DH41.... 400 1600
3VF62 31.DK41.... 500 2000

Technical specifications
Type 3VF3 3VF4 3VF5 3VF6 3VF7 3VF8
Motorized operating mechanism
Power input W 200 200 200 300 1000 2000
Rated control voltage AC 50/60 Hz V 42 110127 220240 110127 220240 110127 220240
DC V 24 48 60 110 220 48 110 48
Back-up fuse or A 10 (for 6 (for 6 6 6 25 (for 16 32 20
miniature circuit-breaker 3VF6: 16 A) 3VF6: 10 A) DC 32 (A)
Operating range V 0.85 ... 1.1 Us 0.85 ... 1.1 Us 0.85 ... 1.1 Us 0.85 ... 1.1 Us 0.85 ... 1.1 Us 0.85 ... 1.1 Us
Minimum command duration at Us s 1 1 1 1 0.5 0,03
Max. make- or break-time s 1 1 1 1 0.5 0.5
Reclosure after approx. s 2 2 2 2 60 60
Max. permissible switching fre- 1/h 120 120 60 60 (4-pole: 20) 60 20
quency
Max. command duration s Non-maintained or continuous signal (depends on circuit)
Synchronized motorized operating mechanism
Power input W 200 200 300
Rated control voltage AC 50/60 Hz V 42 110 ... 127 220 ... 240
DC V 24 48 60 110 220
Back-up fuse or A 10 6 (for 6 6 6
miniature circuit-breaker 3VF6: 10 A)
Operating range V 0.85 ... 1.1 Us 0.85 ... 1.1 Us 0.85 ... 1.1 Us
Minimum command duration at Us ms 45 45 45
Total make-time ms 50 50 50
Break-time S 1 1 1
Charging time S 2 2 2
Reclosure after approx. S 3 3 3
Max. permissible switching fre- 1/h 60 60 60 (4-pole: 20)
quency
Max. command duration S Non-maintained or continuous signal (depends on circuit)
Solenoid operating mechanism
Making current
at rated operating voltage
AC 110120 V, DC 110120 V A 20
AC 220240 V, DC 220240 V A 11
Back-up fuse
AC 110120 V, DC 110120 V A 6
AC 220240 V, DC 220240 V A 4
Operating range V 0.85 ... 1.1 Us
Minimum command duration at Us ms 30
Max. make- or break-time ms 80
Minimum necessary interval after make-
break operation s 15

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/139


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

General data
Switching of DC currents For higher voltages, 2 or 3 current paths must be connected in
series. If 4 current paths are connected in series, it must be en-
The 3VF3 to 3VF6 circuit-breakers for system protection with sured that the 4th pole (N) does not have an overload and short-
overcurrent trip unit versions "LI" can also be used to switch DC circuit release (see Page 4/160 and 4/166, footnote 2).
currents.
Since all current paths must carry a current to comply with the
The 3VF5 to 3VF8 circuit-breakers for system protection with thermal tripping characteristics, we suggest implementation of
overcurrent trip unit version "LSI" and 3VF for motor protection the following circuits. With DC applications, the response values
are not suitable for DC currents because of their electronic over- of the instantaneous short-circuit releases ("I" trip units) are in-
load release. creased by 30 to 40 %.
However, the maximum permitted DC voltage for each current
path needs to be taken into account for DC switching applica-
tions.
Recommended circuit configuration Max. permissible Note
DC voltage

4 For 3 and 4-pole circuit-breakers


Ue

DC 250 V 2-pole switching


L L If there is no possibility of a ground fault, or if every ground fault is rectified
immediately (ground-fault monitoring), then the maximum permitted DC volt-
age is 600 V.
M
NSE0_00741

DC 440 V 2-pole switching (grounded system)


L L The grounded pole is always assigned to the individual current path, so that
there are always 2 current paths in series in the event of a ground fault.

NSE0_00742
M

DC 600 V 1-pole switching (grounded system)


L L 3 current paths in series.
The grounded pole is assigned to the unconnected current path.
M
NSE0_00743

DC 750 V 1-pole switching (grounded system)


L L 4 current paths in series.
The grounded pole is assigned to the unconnected current path.

NSE0_00744
M

Correlation between the short-circuit making capacity,


the short-circuit breaking capacity and the corresponding power factor (to IEC 60947-2)
Short-circuit breaking capacity Power factor Minimum value for short-circuit making capacity
I p.f. (n times short-circuit breaking capacity)
A nI
4500 < I 6000 0.7 1.5 I
6000 < I 10000 0.5 1.7 I
10000 < I 20000 0.3 2.0 I
20000 < I 50000 0.25 2.1 I
50000 < I 0.2 2.2 I

4/140 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

General data
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu and
rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics
Type 3VF3 3VF5 3VF6
Rated current In A 205 315 500
3VF circuit-breakers for motor protection
up to AC 220/240 V
Icu kA 85 100 65 100 65 100
Ics kA 85 100 33 50 33 50
up to AC 380/415 V
Icu kA 40 70 40 65 40 65
Ics kA 40 70 20 33 20 33

4
up to AC 440 V
Icu kA 25 40 35 50 35 50
Ics kA 13 20 18 25 18 25
up to AC 500 V
Icu kA 18 25 30 42 30 42
Ics kA 9 13 15 21 15 21
up to AC 690 V
Icu kA 12 14 20 25 20 25
Ics kA 6 7 10 13 10 13
1
Type 3VF2 3VF3 3VF3 ) 3VF4 3VF5 3VF6 3VF6 3VF7 3VF8
Rated current In 125 160 160/2005)2255) 250 400 630 800 800/1250 1600/2000/
2500
3VF circuit-breakers for system protection
up to AC 220/240 V
Icu kA 65 40 85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 200 65 85 100 200 135 200
Ics kA 40 40 85 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 150 33 85 100 100 100 100
up to AC 380/415 V
Icu kA 18 25 40 70 100 40 70 100 45 70 100 45 70 100 50 50 70 100 70 100
Ics kA 9 25 40 70 75 40 70 75 45 70 75 45 70 75 25 50 50 50 50 50
up to AC 440 V
Icu kA 25 40 65 25 50 80 35 50 80 35 50 80 35 35 50 80 50 80
Ics kA 13 20 33 13 25 40 18 25 40 18 25 40 18 18 25 40 25 40
up to AC 500 V
Icu kA 18 25 50 20 42 65 30 42 65 30 42 65 35 30 42 65 42 65
Ics kA 9 13 25 10 21 33 15 21 33 15 21 33 18 15 21 33 21 33
up to AC 690 V
Icu kA 121) 141) 181)5) 14 18 22 20 25 35 20 25 35 20 20 25 35 25 35
1
Ics kA 6 ) 71) 61)5) 7 9 11 10 13 18 10 13 18 10 10 13 18 13 18
Type 3VF3 3VF4 3VF5 3VF6 3VF7 3VF8
Rated current In A 160/2254) 250 (200)2) 315/400 500/630 800/1250 1600/2000
3VF circuit-breakers for starter combinations
3VF non-automatic circuit-breakers
up to AC 220/240 V
Icu kA 100 853) 100 653) 100 653) 100 853) 1003) 1253)
Ics kA 100 853) 100 333) 50 333) 50 853) 1003) 633)
up to AC 380/415 V
Icu kA 70 403) 70 403) 65 403) 65 503) 703) 653)
Ics kA 70 403) 70 203) 33 203) 33 503) 503) 333)
up to AC 440 V
Icu kA 40 253) 50 353) 50 353) 50 353) 503) 503)
Ics kA 20 133) 25 183) 25 183) 25 183) 253) 253)
up to AC 500 V
Icu kA 25 203) 42 303) 42 303) 42 303) 423) 423)
Ics kA 13 103) 21 153) 21 153) 21 153) 213) 213)
up to AC 690 V
Icu kA 14 143) 18 203) 25 203) 25 203) 253) 253)
Ics kA 7 73) 9 103) 13 103) 13 103) 133) 133)
1) 3VF3 circuit-breakers with rated currents In up to 40 A; 4) 225 A: for non-automatic circuit-breakers only.
max. rated operating voltage Ue = AC 500 V 5) 205/225 A: with AC 690 V Icu = 14 kA, Ics = 7 kA.
(3VF31 13, 3VF31 14 circuit-breakers).
2) Values in brackets for circuit-breakers for starter combinations
3) Values apply to non-automatic circuit-breakers only.

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/141


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

3-pole, fixed-mounted design

Selection and ordering data


System protection, TM
3VF2 circuit-breakers, up to 18 kA
Making/breaking capacity class A
Rated ultimate short-circuit up to 240 V kA 65
breaking capacity Icu up to 415 V kA 18
Rated service short-circuit up to 240 V kA 33
breaking capacity Ics up to 415 V kA 9
Rated short-circuit up to 240 V kA 143
making capacity Icm up to 415 V kA 38

Rated current Setting current of the Operating current of DT VF100 circuit-breaker Weight
In inverse-time delayed instantaneous Making/breaking capacity class A per PU
overload release "L" short-circuit release "I" approx.

4 Ir Ii
A A A Order No. kg
With permanently set
thermal overload releases
16 16 350 B 3VF22 130FC410AA0 0.948
20 20 450 B 3VF22 130FD410AA0 0.953
25 25 500 B 3VF22 130FE410AA0 0.961
32 32 600 B 3VF22 130FG410AA0 0.949
40 40 750 B 3VF22 130FJ410AA0 0.973
NSE0_00695 45 45 750 B 3VF22 130FK410AA0 0.960
50 50 800 B 3VF22 130FL410AA0 0.963
63 63 800 B 3VF22 130FN410AA0 0.967
70 70 900 B 3VF22 130FP410AA0 0.980
80 80 900 B 3VF22 130FQ410AA0 0.976
90 90 1000 B 3VF22 130FR410AA0 0.968
100 100 1000 B 3VF22 130FS410AA0 0.977

Pack size for 3VF is one unit, i.e. one unit or a multiple thereof
can be ordered.
For shunt releases and auxiliary/alarm switches
see Accessories, Page 4/173.

4/142 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

3-pole, fixed-mounted design

System protection, TM
3VF3 circuit-breaker, up to 25 kA
Making/breaking capacity class A
Rated ultimate short-circuit up to 240 V kA 40
breaking capacity Icu up to 415 V kA 25
Rated service short-circuit up to 240 V kA 40
breaking capacity Ics up to 415 V kA 25
Rated short-circuit up to 240 V kA 84
making capacity Icm up to 415 V kA 52

Rated current In Setting current of the Operating current of DT 3VF3 circuit-breaker Weight
inverse-time delayed instantaneous per PU
overload release "L" short-circuit release "I" approx.

Ir Ii

A A A
Order No.
kg
4
With permanently set thermal overload releases
16 16 400 B 3VF31 130FC410AA0 2.300
20 20 400 B 3VF31 130FD410AA0 2.300
25 25 400 B 3VF31 130FE410AA0 2.300
32 32 400 B 3VF31 130FG410AA0 2.300
40 40 400 B 3VF31 130FJ410AA0 2.300
NSE0_00695 50 50 400 B 3VF31 110FL410AA0 2.300
63 63 500 B 3VF31 110FN410AA0 2.300
80 80 630 B 3VF31 110FQ410AA0 2.300
100 100 800 B 3VF31 110FS410AA0 2.300
125 125 1000 B 3VF32 110FU410AA0 2.300
160 160 1280 B 3VF32 110FW410AA0 2.300

Pack size for 3VF is one unit, i.e. one unit or a multiple thereof
can be ordered.
For accessories, see from Page 4/174 onwards.
Auxiliary releases and auxiliary/alarm switches
to be retrofitted by the customer.

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/143


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

3-pole, fixed-mounted design

3VF3 to 3VF6 circuit-breakers

3VF5 plug-in circuit-breaker


with plug-in base
(for plug-in bases
3VF5 circuit-breaker see Pages 4/182 to 4/185)
for fixed mounting

Type Rated Setting current Operating DT Standard switching capacity


current of the inverse- current of the 40/45/50 kA at AC 380/415 V
In time delayed instanta- Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers Weight

4
overload neous short- per PU
release circuit approx.
"L" Ir release
"I" Ii
Order No.
Order No. supplements,
A A A see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg
System protection, TM
Circuit-breakers with permanently set thermal overload releases; for In up to 40 A: Ue max. AC 415 A
3VF3 16 16 400 B 3VF31 131FC41.... 2.300
20 20 400 B 3VF31 131FD41.... 2.300
25 25 400 B 3VF31 131FE41.... 2.300
32 32 400 B 3VF31 131FG41.... 2.300
40 40 400 B 3VF31 131FJ41.... 2.300
NSE0_00695 50 50 400 B 3VF31 111FL41.... 2.300
63 63 500 B 3VF31 111FN41.... 2.300
80 80 630 B 3VF31 111FQ41.... 2.300
100 100 800 B 3VF31 111FS41.... 2.300
125 125 1000 B 3VF32 111FU41.... 2.300
160 160 1280 B 3VF32 111FW41.... 2.300
200 200 2400 B 3VF33 111FX41.... 2.300
225 225 2400 B 3VF33 111FY41.... 2.300
3VF4 125 125 6251250 B 3VF42 111DF41.... 4.200
160 160 8001600 B 3VF42 111DH41.... 4.200
200 200 10002000 B 3VF42 111DK41.... 4.200
250 250 12502500 B 3VF42 111DM41.... 4.200
3VF5 200 200 10002000 B 3VF52 111DF41.... 5.500
NSE0_00015 250 250 12502500 B 3VF52 111DH41.... 5.500
315 315 15753150 B 3VF52 111DK41.... 5.500
400 400 20004000 B 3VF52 111DM41.... 5.500
1)
3VF6 315 315 15753150 B 3VF62 111DF44.... 8.400
1)
400 400 20004000 B 3VF62 111DH44.... 8.400
1
500 500 25005000 B 3VF62 111DK44.... 8.400 )
1
630 630 31506300 B 3VF62 111DM44.... 8.400 )
1 2
800 800 32006400 B 3VF63 112DQ44.... 8.400 ) )
Circuit-breakers with adjustable thermal overload releases
3VF3 50 40 50 300 500 B 3VF31 111BL41.... 2.300
63 50 63 315 630 B 3VF31 111BN41.... 2.300
80 63 80 400 800 B 3VF31 111BQ41.... 2.300
100 80100 5001000 B 3VF31 111BS41.... 2.300
125 100125 6251250 B 3VF32 111BU41.... 2.300
NSE0_00704 160 125160 8001600 B 3VF32 111BW41.... 2.300
200 160200 10002000 B 3VF33 111BX41.... 2.300
3VF4 125 100125 6251250 B 3VF42 111BF41.... 4.200
160 125160 8001600 B 3VF42 111BH41.... 4.200
200 160200 10002000 B 3VF42 111BK41.... 4.200
250 200250 12502500 B 3VF42 111BM41.... 4.200
3VF5 200 160200 10002000 B 3VF52 111BF41.... 5.500
250 200250 12502500 B 3VF52 111BH41.... 5.500
315 250315 15753150 B 3VF52 111BK41.... 5.500
400 315400 20004000 B 3VF52 111BM41.... 5.500
1)
3VF6 315 250315 15753150 B 3VF62 111BF44.... 8.400
1)
400 315400 20004000 B 3VF62 111BH44.... 8.400
1)
500 400500 25005000 B 3VF62 111BK44.... 8.400
1)
630 500630 31506300 B 3VF62 111BM44.... 8.400

Pack size for 3VF is one unit, i.e. one unit or a multiple thereof
can be ordered.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/182 to 4/185).
1) Front busbar connection pieces are included in the scope of supply and
are to be fitted by the customer.
2) 50 kA at AC 380/415 V.

4/144 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

3-pole, fixed-mounted design

3VF6 circuit-breaker, 3VF7 circuit-breaker


with front busbar connec- Busbar connection pieces
tion pieces must be ordered separately

DT High switching capacity DT Very high switching capacity


70 kA at AC 380/415 V 100 kA at AC 380/415 V
Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers Weight Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers Weight
per PU
approx.
per PU
approx. 4
Order No. Order No.
Order No. supplements, Order No. supplements,
see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg

B 3VF31 132FC41.... 2.300


B 3VF31 132FD41.... 2.300
B 3VF31 132FE41.... 2.300
B 3VF31 132FG41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 133FG41.... 2.300
B 3VF31 132FJ41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 133FJ41.... 2.300
B 3VF31 112FL41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 113FL41.... 2.300
B 3VF31 112FN41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 113FN41.... 2.300
B 3VF31 112FQ41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 113FQ41.... 2.300
B 3VF31 112FS41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 113FS41.... 2.300
B 3VF32 112FU41.... 2.300 B 3VF32 113FU41.... 2.300
B 3VF32 112FW41.... 2.300 B 3VF32 113FW41.... 2.300
B 3VF33 112FX41.... 2.300 B 3VF33 113FX41.... 2.300
B 3VF33 112FY41.... 2.300 B 3VF33 113FY41.... 2.300
B 3VF42 112DF41.... 4.200 B 3VF42 113DF41.... 4.200
B 3VF42 112DH41.... 4.200 B 3VF42 113DH41.... 4.200
B 3VF42 112DK41.... 4.200 B 3VF42 113DK41.... 4.200
B 3VF42 112DM41.... 4.200 B 3VF42 113DM41.... 4.200
B 3VF52 112DF41.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113DF41.... 5.500
B 3VF52 112DH41.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113DH41.... 5.500
B 3VF52 112DK41.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113DK41.... 5.500
B 3VF52 112DM41.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113DM41.... 5.500
1) 1)
B 3VF62 112DF44.... 8.400 B 3VF62 113DF44.... 8.400
1) 1)
B 3VF62 112DH44.... 8.400 B 3VF62 113DH44.... 8.400
1) 1)
B 3VF62 112DK44.... 8.400 B 3VF62 113DK44.... 8.400
1) 1)
B 3VF62 112DM44.... 8.400 B 3VF62 113DM44.... 8.400

B 3VF31 112BL41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 113BL41.... 2.300


B 3VF31 112BN41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 113BN41.... 2.300
B 3VF31 112BQ41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 113BQ41.... 2.300
B 3VF31 112BS41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 113BS41.... 2.300
B 3VF32 112BU41.... 2.300 B 3VF32 113BU41.... 2.300
B 3VF32 112BW41.... 2.300 B 3VF32 113BW41.... 2.300
B 3VF33 112BX41.... 2.300 B 3VF33 113BX41.... 2.300
B 3VF42 112BF41.... 4.200 B 3VF42 113BF41.... 4.200
B 3VF42 112BH41.... 4.200 B 3VF42 113BH41.... 4.200
B 3VF42 112BK41.... 4.200 B 3VF42 113BK41.... 4.200
B 3VF42 112BM41.... 4.200 B 3VF42 113BM41.... 4.200
B 3VF52 112BF41.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113BF41.... 5.500
B 3VF52 112BH41.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113BH41.... 5.500
B 3VF52 112BK41.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113BK41.... 5.500
B 3VF52 112BM41.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113BM41.... 5.500
1 1
B 3VF62 112BF44.... 8.400 ) B 3VF62 113BF44.... 8.400 )
1) 1)
B 3VF62 112BH44.... 8.400 B 3VF62 113BH44.... 8.400
1) 1)
B 3VF62 112BK44.... 8.400 B 3VF62 113BK44.... 8.400
1) 1)
B 3VF62 112BM44.... 8.400 B 3VF62 113BM44.... 8.400

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/145


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

3-pole, fixed-mounted design

3VF5 to 3VF8 circuit-breakers

3VF5 plug-in circuit-breaker


with plug-in base
3VF5 circuit-breaker (for plug-in bases
for fixed mounting see Pages 4/182 to 4/185)

Type Rated Setting current Operating Operating Operating DT Standard switching capacity
current of the inverse- current of the time of the current of 40/45/50 kA at AC 380/415 V
In time delayed short-time short-time the instan- Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers Weight

4
overload delayed delayed taneous per PU
release short-circuit short-circuit short-cir- approx.
"L" Ir release release cuit release
"S" Id "S" td "I" Ii
Order No.
Order No. supplements,
A A A ms A see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg
System protection, ETU
Circuit-breakers with adjustable thermal overload releases
3VF5 With time-based 400 200, 250, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 4000 B 3VF52 111BM61.... 5.500
discrimination 315, 400
1)
3VF6 L 630 315, 400, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 5500 B 3VF62 111BM64.... 8.400
500, 630
3VF7 S 800 400, 500, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 150004) B 3VF71 111BK60.... 19.600 2
)
630, 800
I 1250 630, 800, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 15000 )4
B 3VF72 111BM60.... 19.600 2
)
NSE0_00008 1000, 1250
3VF8 1600 800, 1000, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 200004)
1250, 1600
2000 1000, 1250, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 200004)
1600, 2000
2500 1600, 1800, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 200004)
2000, 2500

Pack size for 3VF is one unit, i.e. one unit or a multiple thereof
can be ordered.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/182 to 4/185).
1) Front busbar connection pieces are included in the scope of supply and
are to be fitted by the customer.
2) Busbar connection pieces or multiple feed-in terminals must be ordered
separately (see Accessories).
3) Rear busbar connection pieces are included in the scope of supply and
are to be fitted vertically.
4) Operating value of the short-time delayed short-circuit release
2 to 8 Ir and 0 to 300 ms.

4/146 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

3-pole, fixed-mounted design

3VF6 circuit-breaker, 3VF7 circuit-breaker


with front busbar connec- Busbar connection pieces
tion pieces must be ordered separately

DT High switching capacity DT Very high switching capacity


70 kA at AC 380/415 V 100 kA at AC 380/415 V
Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers Weight Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers Weight
per PU
approx.
per PU
approx. 4
Order No. Order No.
Order No. supplements, Order No. supplements,
see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg

B 3VF52 112BM61.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113BM61.... 5.500

1) 1)
B 3VF62 112BM64.... 8.400 B 3VF62 113BM64.... 8.400

2 2
B 3VF71 112BK60.... 19.600 ) B 3VF71 113BK60.... 19.600 )
2 2
B 3VF72 112BM60.... 19.600 ) B 3VF72 113BM60.... 19.600 )

2) 2)
B 3VF82 112BM60.... 49.000 B 3VF82 113BM60.... 49.000

B 50.000 2) 2)
3VF83 112BM60.... B 3VF83 113BM60.... 50.000

B 50.000 3) 3)
3VF84 112BM64.... B 3VF84 113BM64.... 50.000

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/147


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

3-pole, fixed-mounted design

3VF3 to 3VF8 circuit-breakers


Type Rated Rating of the Setting cur- Operating Time lag DT Standard switching capacity
current three-phase rent of the current of class 40/50 kA at AC 380/415 V
In motors to be inverse-time the instanta- Tc Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers Weight per
protected1) at delayed over- neous short- PU approx.
AC 50 Hz load circuit
release release
"L" Ir "I" Ii
380/ 500 V Order No.
415 V
up to up to Order No. supplements,
A kW kW A A see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg
Motor protection, ETU2)
without adjustable time lag class, without phase failure sensitivity
3VF3 80 37 55 40 80 15 Ir 10 B 3VF31 115DN71.... 2.300

4 100
160
205
45
75
110
55
110
132
80100
100160
160205
15 Ir
15 Ir
13 Ir
10
10
10
B
B
B
3VF31 115DQ71....
3VF32 115DS71....
3VF33 115DU71....
2.300
2.300
2.300
3VF5 315 160 200 160315 15 Ir 20 B 3VF51 115DL71.... 4.200
NSE0_01243

3)
3VF6 500 250 355 250500 15 Ir 20 B 3VF61 115DL74.... 4.200

with adjustable time lag class, with phase failure sensitivity


3VF3 80 37 55 40 80 15 Ir 5/10/15/20 B 3VF31 115EN71.... 2.300
100 45 55 80100 15 Ir 5/10/15/20 B 3VF31 115EQ71.... 2.300
160 75 110 100160 15 Ir 5/10/15/20 B 3VF32 115ES71.... 2.300
205 110 132 160205 13 Ir 10 B 3VF33 115FU71.... 2.300
3VF5 315 160 200 160315 15 Ir 10/15/20/30 B 3VF51 115EL71.... 4.200
NSE0_00706

3
3VF6 500 250 355 250500 15 Ir 10/15/20/30 B 3VF61 115EL74.... 4.200 )

Starter combinations
3VF3 up to 63 30 37 5001000
up to 100 45 55 7501500
up to 160 75 110 12002400
3VF4 up to 125 55 75 10002000
up to 160 75 110 12502500
NSE0_00707 up to 200 90 132 15003000
3VF5 up to 200 90 132 15003000
up to 250 110 160 19003800
up to 315 160 200 24004800
3VF6 up to 315 160 200 24004800
up to 400 200 250 30006000
up to 500 250 355 38007500
Non-automatic circuit-breakers
3VF3 up to 100 2400
up to 160 2400
3VF4 up to 250 3000 B 3VF42 115BM31.... 4.200

3VF5 NSE0_00708
up to 400 4800 B 3VF52 115BM31.... 5.500

3
3VF6 up to 500 7500 B 3VF62 115BM34.... 8.400 )
up to 630 7500
4)
3VF7 up to 800 15000 B 3VF71 111BK30.... 19.600
4)
up to 1250 15000 B 3VF72 111BM30.... 19.600
3VF8 up to 1600 20000
up to 2000 20000

Pack size for 3VF is one unit, i.e. one unit or a multiple thereof
can be ordered.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/182 to 4/185).
1) Guide values for 4-pole standard motors. The start-up data and ratings of
the motor to be protected are the determining factors.
2) System protection circuit-breakers must be used in combination with fre-
quency converters or soft starters.
3) Front busbar connection pieces are included in the scope of supply and
are to be fitted by the customer.
4) Busbar connection pieces must be ordered separately (see Accessories).

4/148 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

3-pole, fixed-mounted design

DT High switching capacity


65/70 kA at AC 380/415 V
Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers Weight

NSE0_00002
per PU
approx.

Order No.

Order No. supplements,


see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg

3VF circuit-breaker

4
B 3VF31 116DN71.... 2.300
B 3VF31 116DQ71.... 2.300 for motor protection
B 3VF32 116DS71.... 2.300
B 3VF33 116DU71.... 2.300
B 3VF51 116DL71.... 4.200

3
B 3VF61 116DL74.... 4.200 )
NSE0_00003

B 3VF31 116EN71.... 2.300


B 3VF31 116EQ71.... 2.300
B 3VF32 116ES71.... 2.300
B 3VF33 116FU71.... 2.300
B 3VF51 116EL71.... 4.200

3)
B 3VF61 116EL74.... 4.200

B 3VF31 116BS21.... 2.300


B 3VF31 116BU21.... 2.300
B 3VF32 116BW21.... 2.300
B 3VF42 116BH21.... 4.200
B 3VF42 116BK21.... 4.200
B 3VF42 116BM21.... 4.200
B 3VF51 116BH21.... 5.500
B 3VF51 116BK21.... 5.500
B 3VF51 116BM21.... 5.500
3
B 3VF61 116BH24.... 8.400 ) 3VF circuit-breaker
3
B 3VF61 116BK24.... 8.400 ) for starter combinations
3
B 3VF61 116BM24.... 8.400 )

B 3VF31 116BS31.... 2.300


B 3VF32 116BW31.... 2.300
B 3VF42 116BM31.... 4.200

B 3VF52 116BM31.... 5.500

3 NSE0_00004
B 3VF61 116BK34.... 8.400 )

4)
B 3VF71 112BK30.... 25.500
4)
B 3VF72 112BM30.... 25.500
B 3VF82 112BM30.... 25.500 4)
4)
B 3VF83 112BM30.... 25.500 3VF non-automatic circuit-
breaker

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/149


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

3-pole, plug-in/withdrawable design

3VF3 to 3VF6 circuit-breakers

3VF5 plug-in circuit-breaker


with plug-in base
3VF5 circuit-breaker (for plug-in bases
for fixed mounting see Pages 4/182 to 4/185)

Type Rated Setting current Operating DT Standard switching capacity


current of the inverse- current of the 40/45/50 kA at AC 380/415 V
In time delayed instanta- Plug-in circuit-breakers Weight

4
overload neous short- Plug-in base required per PU
release circuit for 3VF6 and 3VF7: Guide approx.
"L" Ir release frame see Pages 4/182 to 4/185.
"I" Ii
Order No.
Order No. supplements,
A A A see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg
System protection, TM
Circuit-breakers with permanently set thermal overload releases; for In up to 40 A: Ue max AC 415 V
3VF3 16 16 400 B 3VF31 131FC47.... 2.300
20 20 400 B 3VF31 131FD47.... 2.300
25 25 400 B 3VF31 131FE47.... 2.300
32 32 400 B 3VF31 131FG47.... 2.300
40 40 400 B 3VF31 131FJ47.... 2.300
NSE0_00695 50 50 400 B 3VF31 111FL47.... 2.300
63 63 500 B 3VF31 111FN47.... 2.300
80 80 630 B 3VF31 111FQ47.... 2.300
100 100 800 B 3VF31 111FS47.... 2.300
125 125 1000 B 3VF32 111FU47.... 2.300
160 160 1280 B 3VF32 111FW47.... 2.300
200 200 2400 B 3VF33 111FX47.... 2.300
225 225 2400 B 3VF33 111FY47.... 2.300
3VF4 125 125 6251250 B 3VF42 111DF47.... 4.200
160 160 8001600 B 3VF42 111DH47.... 4.200
200 200 10002000 B 3VF42 111DK47.... 4.200
250 250 12502500 B 3VF42 111DM47.... 4.200
3VF5 200 200 10002000 B 3VF52 111DF47.... 5.500
NSE0_00015 250 250 12502500 B 3VF52 111DH47.... 5.500
315 315 15753150 B 3VF52 111DK47.... 5.500
400 400 20004000 B 3VF52 111DM47.... 5.500
3VF6 315 315 15753150 B 3VF62 111DF47.... 8.400
400 400 20004000 B 3VF62 111DH47.... 8.400
500 500 25005000 B 3VF62 111DK47.... 8.400
630 630 31506300 B 3VF62 111DM47.... 8.400
800 800 32006400
Circuit-breakers with adjustable thermal overload releases
3VF3 50 40 50 300 500 B 3VF31 111BL47.... 2.300
63 50 63 315 630 B 3VF31 111BN47.... 2.300
80 63 80 400 800 B 3VF31 111BQ47.... 2.300
100 80100 5001000 B 3VF31 111BS47.... 2.300
125 100125 6251250 B 3VF32 111BU47.... 2.300
NSE0_00704 160 125160 8001600 B 3VF32 111BW47.... 2.300
200 160200 10002000 B 3VF33 111BX47.... 2.300
3VF4 125 100125 6251250 B 3VF42 111BF47.... 4.200
160 125160 8001600 B 3VF42 111BH47.... 4.200
200 160200 10002000 B 3VF42 111BK47.... 4.200
250 200250 12502500 B 3VF42 111BM47.... 4.200
3VF5 200 160200 10002000 B 3VF52 111BF47.... 5.500
250 200250 12502500 B 3VF52 111BH47.... 5.500
315 250315 15753150 B 3VF52 111BK47.... 5.500
400 315400 20004000 B 3VF52 111BM47.... 5.500
3VF6 315 250315 15753150 B 3VF62 111BF47.... 8.400
400 315400 20004000 B 3VF62 111BH47.... 8.400
500 400500 25005000 B 3VF62 111BK47.... 8.400
630 500630 31506300 B 3VF62 111BM47.... 8.400

Pack size for 3VF is one unit, i.e. one unit or a multiple thereof
can be ordered.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/182 to 4/185).

4/150 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

3-pole, plug-in/withdrawable design

3VF6 circuit-breaker, 3VF7 circuit-breaker


with front busbar connec- Busbar connection pieces
tion pieces must be ordered separately

DT High switching capacity DT Very high switching capacity


70 kA at AC 380/415 V 100 kA at AC 380/415 V
Plug-in circuit-breakers Weight Plug-in circuit-breakers Weight
Plug-in base required
for 3VF6 and 3VF7: Guide
frame see Pages 4/182 to 4/185.
per PU
approx.
Plug-in base required
for 3VF6 and 3VF7: Guide
frame see Pages 4/182 to 4/185.
per PU
approx. 4
Order No. Order No.
Order No. supplements, Order No. supplements,
see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg

B 3VF31 132FC47.... 2.300


B 3VF31 132FD47.... 2.300
B 3VF31 132FE47.... 2.300
B 3VF31 132FG47.... 2.300 B 3VF31 133FG47.... 2.300
B 3VF31 132FJ47.... 2.300 B 3VF31 133FJ47.... 2.300
B 3VF31 112FL47.... 2.300 B 3VF31 113FL47.... 2.300
B 3VF31 112FN47.... 2.300 B 3VF31 113FN47.... 2.300
B 3VF31 112FQ47.... 2.300 B 3VF31 113FQ47.... 2.300
B 3VF31 112FS47.... 2.300 B 3VF31 113FS47.... 2.300
B 3VF32 112FU47.... 2.300 B 3VF32 113FU47.... 2.300
B 3VF32 112FW47.... 2.300 B 3VF32 113FW47.... 2.300
B 3VF33 112FX47.... 2.300 B 3VF33 113FX47.... 2.300
B 3VF33 112FY47.... 2.300 B 3VF33 113FY47.... 2.300
B 3VF42 112DF47.... 4.200 B 3VF42 113DF47.... 4.200
B 3VF42 112DH47.... 4.200 B 3VF42 113DH47.... 4.200
B 3VF42 112DK47.... 4.200 B 3VF42 113DK47.... 4.200
B 3VF42 112DM47.... 4.200 B 3VF42 113DM47.... 4.200
B 3VF52 112DF47.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113DF47.... 5.500
B 3VF52 112DH47.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113DH47.... 5.500
B 3VF52 112DK47.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113DK47.... 5.500
B 3VF52 112DM47.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113DM47.... 5.500
B 3VF62 112DF47.... 8.400 B 3VF62 113DF47.... 8.400
B 3VF62 112DH47.... 8.400 B 3VF62 113DH47.... 8.400
B 3VF62 112DK47.... 8.400 B 3VF62 113DK47.... 8.400
B 3VF62 112DM47.... 8.400 B 3VF62 113DM47.... 8.400

B 3VF31 112BL47.... 2.300 B 3VF31 113BL47.... 2.300


B 3VF31 112BN47.... 2.300 B 3VF31 113BN47.... 2.300
B 3VF31 112BQ47.... 2.300 B 3VF31 113BQ47.... 2.300
B 3VF31 112BS47.... 2.300 B 3VF31 113BS47.... 2.300
B 3VF32 112BU47.... 2.300 B 3VF32 113BU47.... 2.300
B 3VF32 112BW47.... 2.300 B 3VF32 113BW47.... 2.300
B 3VF33 112BX47.... 2.300 B 3VF33 113BX47.... 2.300
B 3VF42 112BF47.... 4.200 B 3VF42 113BF47.... 4.200
B 3VF42 112BH47.... 4.200 B 3VF42 113BH47.... 4.200
B 3VF42 112BK47.... 4.200 B 3VF42 113BK47.... 4.200
B 3VF42 112BM47.... 4.200 B 3VF42 113BM47.... 4.200
B 3VF52 112BF47.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113BF47.... 5.500
B 3VF52 112BH47.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113BH47.... 5.500
B 3VF52 112BK47.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113BK47.... 5.500
B 3VF52 112BM47.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113BM47.... 5.500
B 3VF62 112BF47.... 8.400 B 3VF62 113BF47.... 8.400
B 3VF62 112BH47.... 8.400 B 3VF62 113BH47.... 8.400
B 3VF62 112BK47.... 8.400 B 3VF62 113BK47.... 8.400
B 3VF62 112BM47.... 8.400 B 3VF62 113BM47.... 8.400

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/151


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

3-pole, plug-in/withdrawable design

3VF5 to 3VF8 circuit-breakers

3VF5 plug-in circuit-breaker


with plug-in base
3VF5 circuit-breaker (for plug-in bases
for fixed mounting see Pages 4/182 to 4/185)

Type Rated Setting current Operating cur- Operating time Operating DT Standard switching capacity
current of the inverse- rent of the of the current of the 40/45/50 kA at AC 380/415 V
In time delayed short-time short-time instanta- Plug-in circuit-breakers Weight

4
overload delayed delayed neous short- Plug-in base required per PU
release short-circuit short-circuit circuit for 3VF6 and 3VF7: Guide frame see approx.
"L" Ir release release release Pages 4/182 to 4/185.
"S" Id "S" td "I" Ii
Order No.
Order No. supplements,
A A A ms A see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg
System protection, ETU
Circuit-breakers with adjustable thermal overload releases
3VF5 With time-based 400 200, 250, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 4000 B 3VF52 111BM67.... 5.500
discrimination 315, 400
3VF6 L 630 315, 400, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 5500 B 3VF62 111BM67.... 8.400
500, 630
3VF7 S 800 400, 500, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 15000 B 3VF71 111BK67.... 19.600
630, 800
I
1250 630, 800, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 15000 B 3VF72 111BM67.... 19.600
NSE0_00008 1000, 1250
3VF8 1600 800, 1000, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 20000
1250, 1600
2000 1000, 1250, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 20000
1600, 2000
2500 1600, 1800, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 20000
2000, 2500

Pack size for 3VF is one unit, i.e. one unit or a multiple thereof
can be ordered.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/182 to 4/185).

4/152 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

3-pole, plug-in/withdrawable design

3VF6 circuit-breaker, 3VF7 circuit-breaker


with front busbar connec- Busbar connection pieces
tion pieces must be ordered separately

DT High switching capacity DT Very high switching capacity


70 kA at AC 380/415 V 100 kA at AC 380/415 V
Plug-in circuit-breakers Weight Plug-in circuit-breakers Weight
Plug-in base required per PU
for 3VF6 and 3VF7: Guide frame see approx.
Pages 4/182 to 4/185.
Plug-in base required per PU
for 3VF6 and 3VF7: Guide frame see approx.
Pages 4/182 to 4/185.
4
Order No. Order No.
Order No. supplements, Order No. supplements,
see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg

B 3VF52 112BM67.... 5.500 B 3VF52 113BM67.... 5.500

B 3VF62 112BM67.... 8.400 B 3VF62 113BM67.... 8.400

B 3VF71 112BK67.... 19.600 B 3VF71 113BK67.... 19.600

B 3VF72 112BM67.... 19.600 B 3VF72 113BM67.... 19.600

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/153


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

3-pole, plug-in/withdrawable design

3VF3 to 3VF8 circuit-breakers


Type Rated Rating of the Setting current Operating cur- Time lag DT Standard switching capacity
current three-phase of the inverse- rent of the class 40/50 kA at AC 380/415 V
In motors to be time delayed instantaneous Tc Plug-in circuit-breakers Weight
protected1) at overload short-circuit per PU
AC 50 Hz release release Plug-in base required
for 3VF6 and 3VF7: Guide approx.
"L" Ir "I" Ii
frame see Pages 4/182 to 4/185.

380/ 500 V Order No.


415 V
up to up to Order No. supplements,
A kW kW A A see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg
Motor protection, ETU2)
without adjustable time lag class, without phase failure sensitivity
3VF3 80 37 55 40 80 15 Ir 10 B 3VF31 115DN77.... 2.300

4 100
160
205
45
75
110
55
110
132
80100
100160
160205
15 Ir
15 Ir
13 Ir
10
10
10
B
B
B
3VF31 115DQ77....
3VF32 115DS77....
3VF33 115DU77....
2.300
2.300
2.300
3VF5 315 160 200 160315 15 Ir 20 B 3VF51 115DL77.... 4.200
NSE0_01243

3VF6 500 250 355 250500 15 Ir 20 B 3VF61 115DL77.... 4.200

with adjustable time lag class, with phase failure sensitivity


3VF3 80 37 55 40 80 15 Ir 5/10/15/20 B 3VF31 115EN77.... 2.300
100 45 55 80100 15 Ir 5/10/15/20 B 3VF31 115EQ77.... 2.300
160 75 110 100160 15 Ir 5/10/15/20 B 3VF32 115ES77.... 2.300
205 110 132 160205 13 Ir 10 B 3VF33 115FU77.... 2.300
3VF5 315 160 200 160315 15 Ir 10/15/20/30 B 3VF51 115EL77.... 4.200
NSE0_00706

3VF6 500 250 355 250500 15 Ir 10/15/20/30 B 3VF61 115EL77.... 4.200

Starter combinations
3VF3 up to 63 30 37 5001000
up to 100 45 55 7501500
up to 160 75 110 12002400
3VF4 up to 125 55 75 10002000
up to 160 75 110 12502500
NSE0_00707 up to 200 90 132 15003000
3VF5 up to 200 90 132 15003000
up to 250 110 160 19003800
up to 315 160 200 24004800
3VF6 up to 315 160 200 24004800
up to 400 200 250 30006000
up to 500 250 355 38007500
Non-automatic circuit-breakers
3VF3 up to 100 2400
up to 160 2400
3VF4 up to 250 3000 B 3VF42 115BM37.... 4.200

3VF5 NSE0_00708
up to 400 4800 B 3VF52 115BM37.... 5.500

3VF6 up to 500 7500


up to 630 7500 B 3VF62 115BM37.... 8.400
3VF7 up to 800 15000 B 3VF71 111BK37.... 19.600
up to 1250 15000 B 3VF72 111BM37.... 19.600
3VF8 up to 1600 20000
up to 2000 20000

Pack size for 3VF is one unit, i.e. one unit or a multiple thereof
can be ordered.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/182 to 4/185).
1) Guide values for 4-pole standard motors. The start-up data and rat-
ings of the motor to be protected are the determining factors.
2) System protection circuit-breakers must be used in combination with
frequency converters or soft starters.

4/154 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

3-pole, plug-in/withdrawable design

DT High switching capacity


65/70 kA at AC 380/415 V
Plug-in circuit-breakers Weight

NSE0_00002
Plug-in base required per PU
for 3VF6 and 3VF7: Guide frame see approx.
Pages 4/182 to 4/185.

Order No.

Order No. supplements,


see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg

3VF circuit-breaker

4
B 3VF31 116DN77.... 2.300
B 3VF31 116DQ77.... 2.300 for motor protection
B 3VF32 116DS77.... 2.300
B 3VF33 116DU77.... 2.300
B 3VF51 116DL77.... 4.200

B 3VF61 116DL77.... 4.200


NSE0_00003

B 3VF31 116EN77.... 2.300


B 3VF31 116EQ77.... 2.300
B 3VF32 116ES77.... 2.300
B 3VF33 116FU77.... 2.300
B 3VF51 116EL77.... 4.200

B 3VF61 116EL77.... 4.200

B 3VF31 116BS27.... 2.300


B 3VF31 116BU27.... 2.300
B 3VF32 116BW27.... 2.300
B 3VF42 116BH27.... 4.200
B 3VF42 116BK27.... 4.200
B 3VF42 116BM27.... 4.200
B 3VF51 116BH27.... 5.500
B 3VF51 116BK27.... 5.500
B 3VF51 116BM27.... 5.500
B 3VF61 116BH27.... 8.400 3VF circuit-breaker
B 3VF61 116BK27.... 8.400 for starter combinations
B 3VF61 116BM27.... 8.400

B 3VF31 116BS37.... 2.300


B 3VF32 116BW37.... 2.300
B 3VF42 116BM37.... 5.500

B 3VF52 116BM37.... 5.500

NSE0_00004
B 3VF61 116BK37.... 8.400

B 3VF71 112BK37.... 25.500
B 3VF72 112BM37.... 25.500

3VF non-automatic circuit-
breaker

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/155


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

4-pole, fixed-mounted design

System protection, TM
3VF2 circuit-breaker, up to 18 kA
Making/breaking capacity class A
Rated ultimate short-circuit up to 240 V kA 65
breaking capacity Icu up to 415 V kA 18
Rated service short-circuit up to 240 V kA 33
breaking capacity Ics up to 415 V kA 9
Rated short-circuit up to 240 V kA 143
making capacity Icm up to 415 V kA 38

Rated current Setting current of the Operating current of DT VF100 circuit-breaker Weight
In inverse-time delayed instantaneous Making/breaking capacity class A per PU
overload release "L" short-circuit release "I" approx.

Ir Ir

4 A A A Order No. kg
With permanently set thermal overload releases,
with overload and short-circuit release in the 4th pole
(N = 100 %).
16 16 350 B 3VF22 140JC410AA0 1.290
20 20 450 B 3VF22 140JD410AA0 1.270
25 25 500 B 3VF22 140JE410AA0 1.250
32 32 600 B 3VF22 140JG410AA0 1.250
40 40 750 B 3VF22 140JJ410AA0 1.300
NSE0_00695 45 45 750 B 3VF22 140JK410AA0 1.290
50 50 800 B 3VF22 140JL410AA0 1.270
63 63 800 B 3VF22 140JN410AA0 1.270
70 70 900 B 3VF22 140JP410AA0 1.290
80 80 900 B 3VF22 140JQ410AA0 1.280
90 90 1000 B 3VF22 140JR410AA0 1.290
100 100 1000 B 3VF22 140JS410AA0 1.290

Pack size for 3VF is one unit, i.e. one unit or a multiple thereof
can be ordered.
For shunt releases and auxiliary/alarm switches
see Accessories, Page 4/173.

4/156 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

4-pole, fixed-mounted design

System protection, TM
3VF3 circuit-breaker, up to 25 kA
Making/breaking capacity class A
Rated ultimate short-circuit up to 240 V kA 40
breaking capacity Icu up to 415 V kA 25
Rated service short-circuit up to 240 V kA 40
breaking capacity Ics up to 415 V kA 25
Rated short-circuit up to 240 V kA 84
making capacity Icm up to 415 V kA 52

Rated current In Setting current of the Operating current of DT 3VF3 circuit-breaker Weight
inverse-time delayed instantaneous per PU
overload release "L" short-circuit release "I" approx.

Ir Ii

A A A
Order No.
kg
4
With permanently set thermal overload releases,
with overload and short-circuit release in the 4th pole
1
16 16 400 B 3VF31 140JC410AA0 2.600 )
20 20 400 B 1
3VF31 140JD410AA0 2.600 )
25 25 400 B 3VF31 140JE410AA0 2.600 1)
1
32 32 400 B 3VF31 140JG410AA0 2.600 )
40 40 400 B 3VF31 140JJ410AA0 2.600 1)
50 50 400 B 1)
NSE0_00695 3VF31 120JL410AA0 2.600
1
63 63 500 B 3VF31 120JN410AA0 2.600 )
80 80 630 B 3VF31 120JQ410AA0 2.600 1)

100 100 800 B 3VF31 120JS410AA0 2.600 1)


125 125 1000 B 3VF32 120JU410AA0 2.600 2)
160 160 1280 B 2)
3VF32 120JW410AA0 2.600

Pack size for 3VF is one unit, i.e. one unit or a multiple thereof
can be ordered.
For accessories, see from Page 4/174 onwards.
Auxiliary releases and auxiliary/alarm switches
to be retrofitted by the customer.

1) N = 100 %.
2) N = 60 %.

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/157


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

4-pole, fixed-mounted design

3VF3 to 3VF6 circuit-breakers


Type Rated Setting current Operating Operating Operating DT Standard switching capacity
current of the inverse- current of the time of the current of the 40/45/50 kA at AC 380/415 V
In time delayed short-time short-time instanta- Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers Weight
overload delayed delayed neous short- per PU
release short-circuit short-circuit circuit approx.
"L" Ir release release release
"S" Id "S" td "I" Ii
Order No.
Order No. supplements,
A A A ms A see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg
System protection, TM
without overload release and short-circuit release in the 4th pole (N); at In up to 40 A: Ue max. AC 415 V
3VF3 16 16 400 B 3VF31 141RC41.... 2.600
20 20 400 B 3VF31 141RD41.... 2.600

4
25 25 400 B 3VF31 141RE41.... 2.600
32 32 400 B 3VF31 141RG41.... 2.600
40 40 400 B 3VF31 141RJ41.... 2.600
NSE0_00704 50 40 50 300 500 B 3VF31 121ML41.... 2.600
63 50 63 315 630 B 3VF31 121MN41.... 2.600
80 63 80 400 800 B 3VF31 121MQ41.... 2.600
100 80100 5001000 B 3VF31 121MS41.... 2.600
125 100125 6301250 B 3VF32 121MU41.... 2.600
160 125160 8001600 B 3VF32 121MW41.... 2.600
200 160200 10002000 B 3VF33 121MX41.... 2.600
225 225 2400 B 3VF33 121RY41.... 2.600
3VF4 125 100125 6301250 B 3VF42 121MF41.... 5.500
160 125160 8001600 B 3VF42 121MH41.... 5.500
200 160200 10002000 B 3VF42 121MK41.... 5.500
250 200250 12502500 B 3VF42 121MM41.... 5.500
3VF5 200 160200 10002000 B 3VF52 121MF41.... 6.500
250 200250 12502500 B 3VF52 121MH41.... 6.500
315 250315 15753150 B 3VF52 121MK41.... 6.500
400 315400 20004000 B 3VF52 121MM41.... 6.500
1)
3VF6 315 250315 15753150 B 3VF62 121MF44.... 11.000
1)
400 315400 20004000 B 3VF62 121MH44.... 11.000
1)
500 400500 25005000 B 3VF62 121MK44.... 11.000
1)
630 500630 31506300 B 3VF62 121MM44.... 11.000
800 800 32006400 B 2)
3VF63 122TQ44.... 11.000
with overload and short-circuit releases in the 4th pole (N); at In up to 40 A: Ue max AC 415 V
3VF3 16 16 4003) B 3VF31 141JC41.... 2.600
20 20 4003) B 3VF31 141JD41.... 2.600
25 25 4003) B 3VF31 141JE41.... 2.600
32 32 4003) B 3VF31 141JG41.... 2.600
40 40 4003) B 3VF31 141JJ41.... 2.600
NSE0_00704 50 40 50 300 5003) B 3VF31 121HL41.... 2.600
63 50 63 315 6303) B 3VF31 121HN41.... 2.600
80 63 80 400 8003) B 3VF31 121HQ41.... 2.600
100 80100 50010003) B 3VF31 121HS41.... 2.600
125 100125 63012504) B 3VF32 121HU41.... 2.600
160 125160 80016004) B 3VF32 121HW41.... 2.600
4)
200 160200 10002000 B 3VF33 121HX41.... 2.600
225 225 24004) B 3VF33 121JY41.... 2.600
3VF4 200 160200 100020004) B 3VF42 121HK41.... 5.500
250 200250 125025004) B 3VF42 121HM41.... 5.500
3VF5 315 250315 157531504) B 3VF52 121HK41.... 6.500
4
400 315400 20004000 ) B 3VF52 121HM41.... 6.500
3VF6 500 400500 250050004) B 3VF62 121HK44.... 11.000 5
)
630 500630 315063004) B 3VF62 121HM44.... 11.000 5
)
800 800 320064004) B 3VF63 122LQ44.... 11.000 2
)
5
)

Pack size for 3VF is one unit, i.e. one unit or a multiple thereof
can be ordered.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/182 to 4/185).

1) Front busbar connection pieces are included in the scope of supply and
are to be fitted by the customer.
2) 50 kA at 380/415 V.
3) N = 100 %.
4) N = 60 %. To be observed in DC applications.
5) Front busbar connection pieces are included in the scope of supply and
are to be fitted by the customer.

4/158 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

4-pole, fixed-mounted design

DT High switching capacity DT Very high switching capacity


70 kA at AC 380/415 V 100 kA at AC 380/415 V
Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers Weight Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.

Order No. Order No.


Order No. supplements, Order No. supplements,
see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg


B 3VF31 142RD41.... 2.600 B 3VF31 143RD41.... 2.600

4
B 3VF31 142RE41.... 2.600 B 3VF31 143RE41.... 2.600
B 3VF31 142RG41.... 2.600 B 3VF31 143RG41.... 2.600
B 3VF31 142RJ41.... 2.600 B 3VF31 143RJ41.... 2.600
B 3VF31 122ML41.... 2.600 B 3VF31 123ML41.... 2.600
B 3VF31 122MN41.... 2.600 B 3VF31 123MN41.... 2.600
B 3VF31 122MQ41.... 2.600 B 3VF31 123MQ41.... 2.600
B 3VF31 122MS41.... 2.600 B 3VF31 123MS41.... 2.600
B 3VF32 122MU41.... 2.600 B 3VF32 123MU41.... 2.600
B 3VF32 122MW41.... 2.600 B 3VF32 123MW41.... 2.600
B 3VF33 122MX41.... 2.600 B 3VF33 123MX41.... 2.600
B 3VF33 122RY41.... 2.600 B 3VF33 123RY41.... 2.600
B 3VF42 122MF41.... 5.500 B 3VF42 123MF41.... 5.500
B 3VF42 122MH41.... 5.500 B 3VF42 123MH41.... 5.500
B 3VF42 122MK41.... 5.500 B 3VF42 123MK41.... 5.500
B 3VF42 122MM41.... 5.500 B 3VF42 123MM41.... 5.500
B 3VF52 122MF41.... 6.500 B 3VF52 123MF41.... 6.500
B 3VF52 122MH41.... 6.500 B 3VF52 123MH41.... 6.500
B 3VF52 122MK41.... 6.500 B 3VF52 123MK41.... 6.500
B 3VF52 122MM41.... 6.500 B 3VF52 123MM41.... 6.500
1 1
B 3VF62 122MF44.... 11.000 ) B 3VF62 123MF44.... 11.000 )
1 1
B 3VF62 122MH44.... 11.000 ) B 3VF62 123MH44.... 11.000 )
1 1
B 3VF62 122MK44.... 11.000 ) B 3VF62 123MK44.... 11.000 )
1 1
B 3VF62 122MM44.... 11.000 ) B 3VF62 123MM44.... 11.000 )


B 3VF31 142JD41.... 2.600 B 3VF31 143JD41.... 2.600
B 3VF31 142JE41.... 2.600 B 3VF31 143JE41.... 2.600
B 3VF31 142JG41.... 2.600 B 3VF31 143JG41.... 2.600
B 3VF31 142JJ41.... 2.600 B 3VF31 143JJ41.... 2.600
B 3VF31 122HL41.... 2.600 B 3VF31 123HL41.... 2.600
B 3VF31 122HN41.... 2.600 B 3VF31 123HN41.... 2.600
B 3VF31 122HQ41.... 2.600 B 3VF31 123HQ41.... 2.600
B 3VF31 122HS41.... 2.600 B 3VF31 123HS41.... 2.600
B 3VF32 122HU41.... 2.600 B 3VF32 123HU41.... 2.600
B 3VF32 122HW41.... 2.600 B 3VF32 123HW41.... 2.600
B 3VF33 122HX41.... 2.600 B 3VF33 123HX41.... 2.600
B 3VF33 122JY41.... 2.600 B 3VF33 123JY41.... 2.600
B 3VF42 122HK41.... 5.500 B 3VF42 123HK41.... 5.500
B 3VF42 122HM41.... 5.500 B 3VF42 123HM41.... 5.500
B 3VF52 122HK41.... 6.500 B 3VF52 123HK41.... 6.500
B 3VF52 122HM41.... 6.500 B 3VF52 123HM41.... 6.500
5 5
B 3VF62 122HK44.... 11.000 ) B 3VF62 123HK44.... 11.000 )
5 5
B 3VF62 122HM44.... 11.000 ) B 3VF62 123HM44.... 11.000 )

3VF6 circuit-breaker, 4-pole


without trip unit in the 4th pole (N).

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/159


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

4-pole, fixed-mounted design

3VF3 to 3VF8 circuit-breakers


Type Rated cur- Setting current Operating Operating Operating DT Standard switching capacity
rent of the inverse- current of the time of the current of the 40/45/50 kA at AC 380/415 V
In time delayed short-time short-time instanta- Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers Weight
overload delayed delayed neous short- per PU
release short-circuit short-circuit circuit approx.
"L" Ir release release release
"S" Id "S" td "I" Ii
Order No.
Order No. supplements,
A A A ms A see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg
System protection, ETU
without overload release and short-circuit release in the 4th pole (N); at In up to 40 A: Ue max AC 415 V
3VF5 With time-based 400 200, 250, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 4000 B 3VF52 121KM61.... 6.500
discrimination 315, 400

4
1
3VF6 L 630 315, 400, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 5500 B 3VF62 121KM64.... 11.000 )
500, 630
2
3VF7 S 800 400, 500, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 15000 B 3VF71 121KK60.... 25.500 )
I 630, 800
1250 2
630, 800, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 15000 B 3VF72 121KM60.... 25.500 )
NSE0_00008 1000, 1250
3VF8 1600 800, 1000, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 20000
1250, 1600
2000 1000, 1250, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 20000
1600, 2000
2500 1600, 1800, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 20000
2000, 2500
with overload and short-circuit releases in the 4th pole (N); at In up to 40 A: Ue max AC 415 V
3VF5 With time-based 400 200, 250, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 40004) B 3VF52 121FM61.... 6.500
discrimination 315, 400
3VF6 L 630 315, 400, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 55004) B 3VF62 121FM64.... 11.000 1)
500, 630
3VF7 S 800 400, 500, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 150004) B 3VF71 121FK60.... 25.500 2)

I
630, 800
1250 630, 800, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 150004) B 3VF72 121FM60.... 25.500 2)
NSE0_00008 1000, 1250
3VF8 1600 800, 1000, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 200004)
1250, 1600
4
2000 1000, 1250, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 20000 )
1600, 2000
2500 1600, 1800, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 200004)
2000, 2500

Pack size for 3VF is one unit, i.e. one unit or a multiple thereof
can be ordered.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/182 to 4/185).

1) Front busbar connection pieces are included in the scope of supply and
are to be fitted by the customer.
2) Busbar connection pieces must be ordered separately (see Accessories).
3) Rear busbar connection pieces are included in the scope of supply and
are to be fitted vertically.
4) N = 60 %. To be observed in DC applications.

4/160 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

4-pole, fixed-mounted design

DT High switching capacity DT Very high switching capacity


70 kA at AC 380/415 V 100 kA at AC 380/415 V
Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers Weight Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.

Order No. Order No.


Order No. supplements, Order No. supplements,
see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg

B 3VF52 122KM61.... 6.500 B 3VF52 123KM61.... 6.500

4
1) 1)
B 3VF62 122KM64.... 11.000 B 3VF62 123KM64.... 11.000

2) 2)
B 3VF71 122KK60.... 25.500 B 3VF71 123KK60.... 25.500

B 3VF72 122KM60.... 25.500 2) B 3VF72 123KM60.... 25.500 2)

2 2
B 3VF82 122KM60.... 61.000 ) B 3VF82 123KM60.... 62.000 )
2 2
B 3VF83 122KM60.... 62.000 ) B 3VF83 123KM60.... 62.000 )
3 3
B 3VF84 122KM64.... 62.000 ) B 3VF84 123KM64.... 62.000 )

B 3VF52 122FM61.... 6.500 B 3VF52 123FM61.... 6.500

1 1
B 3VF62 122FM64.... 11.000 ) B 3VF62 123FM64.... 11.000 )

2) 2)
B 3VF71 122FK60.... 25.500 B 3VF71 123FK60.... 25.500

B 3VF72 122FM60.... 25.500 2) B 3VF72 123FM60.... 25.500 2)

2 2
B 3VF82 122FM60.... 61.000 ) B 3VF82 123FM60.... 61.000 )
2 2
B 3VF83 122FM60.... 62.000 ) B 3VF83 123FM60.... 62.000 )
3 3
B 3VF84 122FM64.... 62.000 ) B 3VF84 123FM64.... 62.000 )

3VF8 circuit-breaker, 4-pole


with trip unit in the 4th pole (N).

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/161


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

4-pole, fixed-mounted design

3VF3 to 3VF8 circuit-breakers


Type Rated current Operating current of the instantaneous short- DT Standard switching capacity
In circuit release 40/50 kA at AC 380/415 V
"I" Ii Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers Weight
per PU
approx.

Order No.
Order No. supplements,
A A see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg
Non-automatic circuit-breakers
3VF3 up to 100 1500
up to 160 2400
3VF4 up to 250 3000 B 3VF42 125DM31.... 5.500

4 3VF5
NSE0_00708
up to 400 4800 B 3VF52 125DM31.... 6.500

3VF6 up to 500 7500


1
up to 630 7500 B 3VF62 125DM34.... 11.000 )
3VF7 up to 800 15000 B 3VF71 121DK30.... 25.500
up to 1250 15000 B 3VF72 121DM30.... 25.500
Busbar connection pieces
must be ordered separately
(see Accessories)
3VF8 up to 1600 20000
up to 2000 20000

Pack size for 3VF is one unit, i.e. one unit or a multiple thereof
can be ordered.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/182 to 4/185).

1) Front busbar connection pieces are included in the scope of supply and
are to be fitted by the customer.

4/162 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

4-pole, fixed-mounted design

DT High switching capacity


65/70 kA at AC 380/415 V
Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers Weight
per PU
approx.

Order No.
Order No. supplements,
see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg

B 3VF31 126DS31.... 2.600


B 3VF32 126DW31.... 2.600
B 3VF42 126DM31.... 5.500

B 3VF52 126DM31.... 6.500 4


1)
B 3VF61 126DK34.... 11.000

B 3VF71 122DK30.... 19.600
B 3VF72 122DM30.... 19.600
Busbar connection pieces
must be ordered separately
(see Accessories)
B 3VF82 122DM30.... 25.500
B 3VF83 122DM30.... 25.500
Busbar connection pieces
must be ordered separately
(see Accessories)

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/163


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

4-pole, plug-in/withdrawable design

3VF3 to 3VF8 circuit-breakers


Type Rated Setting current Operating Operating Operating DT Standard switching capacity
current of the inverse- current of the time of the current of the 40/45/50 kA at AC 380/415 V
In time delayed short-time short-time instanta- Plug-in circuit-breakers Weight
overload delayed delayed neous short- Plug-in base required per PU
release short-circuit short-circuit circuit for 3VF6 and 3VF7: Guide frame see approx.
"L" Ir release release release Pages 4/182 to 4/185.
"S" Id "S" td "I" Ii
Order No.
Order No. supplements,
A A A ms A see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg
System protection, TM
without overload release and short-circuit release in the 4th pole (N); at In up to 40 A: Ue max AC 415 V
3VF3 16 16 400 B 3VF31 141RC47.... 2.600
20 20 400 B 3VF31 141RD47.... 2.600

4
25 25 400 B 3VF31 141RE47.... 2.600
32 32 400 B 3VF31 141RG47.... 2.600
40 40 400 B 3VF31 141RJ47.... 2.600
NSE0_00704 50 40 50 300 500 B 3VF31 121ML47.... 2.600
63 50 63 315 630 B 3VF31 121MN47.... 2.600
80 63 80 400 800 B 3VF31 121MQ47.... 2.600
100 80100 5001000 B 3VF31 121MS47.... 2.600
125 100125 6301250 B 3VF32 121MU47.... 2.600
160 125160 8001600 B 3VF32 121MW47.... 2.600
200 160200 10002000 B 3VF33 121MX47.... 2.600
225 225 2400 B 3VF33 121RY47.... 2.600
3VF4 125 100125 6301250 B 3VF42 121MF47.... 5.500
160 125160 8001600 B 3VF42 121MH47.... 5.500
200 160200 10002000 B 3VF42 121MK47.... 5.500
250 200250 12502500 B 3VF42 121MM47.... 5.500
3VF5 200 160200 10002000 B 3VF52 121MF47.... 6.500
250 200250 12502500 B 3VF52 121MH47.... 6.500
315 250315 15753150 B 3VF52 121MK47.... 6.500
400 315400 20004000 B 3VF52 121MM47.... 6.500
3VF6 315 250315 15753150 B 3VF62 121MF47.... 11.000
400 315400 20004000 B 3VF62 121MH47.... 11.000
500 400500 25005000 B 3VF62 121MK47.... 11.000
630 500630 31506300 B 3VF62 121MM47.... 11.000
800 800 32006400
with overload release and short-circuit release in the 4th pole (N); at In up to 40 A: Ue max AC 415 V
3VF3 16 16 4001) B 3VF31 141JC47.... 2.600
20 20 4001) B 3VF31 141JD47.... 2.600
25 25 4001) B 3VF31 141JE47.... 2.600
32 32 4001) B 3VF31 141JG47.... 2.600
40 40 4001) B 3VF31 141JJ47.... 2.600
50 40 50 300 5001) B 3VF31 121HL47.... 2.600
NSE0_00704
63 50 63 315 6301) B 3VF31 121HN47.... 2.600
80 63 80 400 8001) B 3VF31 121HQ47.... 2.600
100 80100 50010001) B 3VF31 121HS47.... 2.600
125 100125 63012502) B 3VF32 121HU47.... 2.600
160 125160 80016002) B 3VF32 121HW47.... 2.600
200 160200 100020002) B 3VF33 121HX47.... 2.600
225 225 24002) B 3VF33 121JY47.... 2.600
3VF4 200 160200 100020002) B 3VF42 121HK47.... 5.500
250 200250 125025002) B 3VF42 121HM47.... 5.500
3VF5 315 250315 157531502) B 3VF52 121HK47.... 6.500
400 315400 200040002) B 3VF52 121HM47.... 6.500
3VF6 500 400500 250050002) B 3VF62 121HK47.... 11.000
630 500630 315063002) B 3VF62 121HM47.... 11.000
800 800 320064002)

Pack size for 3VF is one unit, i.e. one unit or a multiple thereof
can be ordered.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/182 to 4/185).

1) N = 100 %.
2) N = 60 %. To be observed in DC applications.

4/164 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

4-pole, plug-in/withdrawable design

DT High switching capacity DT Very high switching capacity


70 kA at AC 380/415 V 100 kA at AC 380/415 V
Plug-in circuit-breakers Weight Plug-in circuit-breakers Weight
Plug-in base required per PU Plug-in base required per PU
for 3VF6 and 3VF7: Guide frame see approx. for 3VF6 and 3VF7: Guide frame see approx.
Pages 4/182 to 4/185. Pages 4/182 to 4/185.
Order No. Order No.
Order No. supplements, Order No. supplements,
see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg


B 3VF31 142RD47.... 2.600 B 3VF31 143RD47.... 2.600

4
B 3VF31 142RE47.... 2.600 B 3VF31 143RE47.... 2.600
B 3VF31 142RG47.... 2.600 B 3VF31 143RG47.... 2.600
B 3VF31 142RJ47.... 2.600 B 3VF31 143RJ47.... 2.600
B 3VF31 122ML47.... 2.600 B 3VF31 123ML47.... 2.600
B 3VF31 122MN47.... 2.600 B 3VF31 123MN47.... 2.600
B 3VF31 122MQ47.... 2.600 B 3VF31 123MQ47.... 2.600
B 3VF31 122MS47.... 2.600 B 3VF31 123MS47.... 2.600
B 3VF32 122MU47.... 2.600 B 3VF32 123MU47.... 2.600
B 3VF32 122MW47.... 2.600 B 3VF32 123MW47.... 2.600
B 3VF33 122MX47.... 2.600 B 3VF33 123MX47.... 2.600
B 3VF33 122RY47.... 2.600 B 3VF33 123RY47.... 2.600
B 3VF42 122MF47.... 5.500 B 3VF42 123MF47.... 5.500
B 3VF42 122MH47.... 5.500 B 3VF42 123MH47.... 5.500
B 3VF42 122MK47.... 5.500 B 3VF42 123MK47.... 5.500
B 3VF42 122MM47.... 5.500 B 3VF42 123MM47.... 5.500
B 3VF52 122MF47.... 6.500 B 3VF52 123MF47.... 6.500
B 3VF52 122MH47.... 6.500 B 3VF52 123MH47.... 6.500
B 3VF52 122MK47.... 6.500 B 3VF52 123MK47.... 6.500
B 3VF52 122MM47.... 6.500 B 3VF52 123MM47.... 6.500
B 3VF62 122MF47.... 11.000 B 3VF62 123MF47.... 11.000
B 3VF62 122MH47.... 11.000 B 3VF62 123MH47.... 11.000
B 3VF62 122MK47.... 11.000 B 3VF62 123MK47.... 11.000
B 3VF62 122MM47.... 11.000 B 3VF62 123MM47.... 11.000


B 3VF31 142JD47.... 2.600 B 3VF31 143JD47.... 2.600
B 3VF31 142JE47.... 2.600 B 3VF31 143JE47.... 2.600
B 3VF31 142JG47.... 2.600 B 3VF31 143JG47.... 2.600
B 3VF31 142JJ47.... 2.600 B 3VF31 143JJ47.... 2.600
B 3VF31 122HL47.... 2.600 B 3VF31 123HL47.... 2.600
B 3VF31 122HN47.... 2.600 B 3VF31 123HN47.... 2.600
B 3VF31 122HQ47.... 2.600 B 3VF31 123HQ47.... 2.600
B 3VF31 122HS47.... 2.600 B 3VF31 123HS47.... 2.600
B 3VF32 122HU47.... 2.600 B 3VF32 123HU47.... 2.600
B 3VF32 122HW47.... 2.600 B 3VF32 123HW47.... 2.600
B 3VF33 122HX47.... 2.600 B 3VF33 123HX47.... 2.600
B 3VF33 122JY47.... 2.600 B 3VF33 123JY47.... 2.600
B 3VF42 122HK47.... 5.500 B 3VF42 123HK47.... 5.500
B 3VF42 122HM47.... 5.500 B 3VF42 123HM47.... 5.500
B 3VF52 122HK47.... 6.500 B 3VF52 123HK47.... 6.500
B 3VF52 122HM47.... 6.500 B 3VF52 123HM47.... 6.500
B 3VF62 122HK47.... 11.000 B 3VF62 123HK47.... 11.000
B 3VF62 122HM47.... 11.000 B 3VF62 123HM47.... 11.000

3VF6 circuit-breaker, 4-pole


without trip unit in the 4th pole (N).

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/165


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

4-pole, plug-in/withdrawable design

3VF3 to 3VF8 circuit-breakers


Type Rated Setting current Operating Operating Operating DT Standard switching capacity
current of the inverse- current of the time of the current of the 40/45/50 kA at AC 380/415 V
In time delayed short-time short-time instanta- Plug-in circuit-breakers Weight
overload delayed delayed neous short- Plug-in base required per PU
release short-circuit short-circuit circuit for 3VF6 and 3VF7: Guide frame see approx.
"L" Ir release release release Pages 4/182 to 4/185.
"S" Id "S" td "I" Ii
Order No.
Order No. supplements,
A A A ms A see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg
System protection, ETU
without overload release and short-circuit release in the 4th pole (N); at In up to 40 A: Ue max AC 415 V
3VF5 With time-based 400 200, 250, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 4000 B 3VF52 121KM67.... 6.500
discrimination 315, 400

4 3VF6

3VF7
L 630

800
315, 400,
500, 630
400, 500,
2 ... 8 Ir

2 ... 8 Ir
0 ... 300

0 ... 300
5500

15000
B

B
3VF62 121KM67....

3VF71 121KK67....
11.000

25.500
S
1250 630, 800
I
630, 800, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 15000 B 3VF72 121KM67.... 25.500
NSE0_00008 1000, 1250
3VF8 1600 800, 1000, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 20000
1250, 1600
2000 1000, 1250, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 20000
1600, 2000
2500 1600, 1800, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 20000
2000, 2500
with overload release and short-circuit release in the 4th pole (N); at In up to 40 A: Ue max AC 415 V
3VF5 With time-based 400 200, 250, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 40001) B 3VF52 121FM67.... 6.500
discrimination 315, 400
3VF6 L 630 315, 400, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 55001) B 3VF62 121FM67.... 11.000
500, 630
3VF7 S 800 400, 500, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 150001) B 3VF71 121FK67.... 25.500
630, 800
I 1
1250 630, 800, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 15000 ) B 3VF72 121FM67.... 25.500
NSE0_00008 1000, 1250
3VF8 1600 800, 1000, 1)
2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 20000
1250, 1600
2000 1000, 1250, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 200001)
1600, 2000
2500 1600, 1800, 2 ... 8 Ir 0 ... 300 200001)
2000, 2500

Pack size for 3VF is one unit, i.e. one unit or a multiple thereof
can be ordered.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/182 to 4/185).

1) N = 60 %. To be observed in DC applications.

4/166 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

4-pole, plug-in/withdrawable design

DT High switching capacity DT Very high switching capacity


70 kA at AC 380/415 V 100 kA at AC 380/415 V
Plug-in circuit-breakers Weight Plug-in circuit-breakers Weight
Plug-in base required per PU Plug-in base required per PU
for 3VF6 and 3VF7: Guide frame see approx. for 3VF6 and 3VF7: Guide frame see approx.
Pages 4/182 to 4/185. Pages 4/182 to 4/185.
Order No. Order No.
Order No. supplements, Order No. supplements,
see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg

B 3VF52 122KM67.... 6.500 B 3VF52 123KM67.... 6.500

B
3VF62 122KM67....

3VF71 122KK67....
11.000 B

25.500 B
3VF62 123KM67....

3VF71 123KK67....
11.000

25.500
4
B 3VF72 122KM67.... 25.500 B 3VF72 123KM67.... 25.500

B 3VF52 122FM67.... 6.500 B 3VF52 123FM67.... 6.500

B 3VF62 122FM67.... 11.000 B 3VF62 123FM67.... 11.000

B 3VF71 122FK67.... 25.500 B 3VF71 123FK67.... 25.500

B 3VF72 122FM67.... 25.500 B 3VF72 123FM67.... 25.500

3VF8 circuit-breaker, 4-pole


with trip unit in the 4th pole (N).

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/167


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

4-pole, plug-in/withdrawable design

3VF3 to 3VF8 circuit-breakers


Type Rated current Operating current of the instantaneous DT Standard switching capacity
In short-circuit release 40/50 kA at AC 380/415 V
"I" Ii Plug-in circuit-breakers Weight
Plug-in base required per PU
for 3VF6 and 3VF7: Guide frame see approx.
Pages 4/182 to 4/185.
Order No.
Order No. supplements,
A A see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg
Non-automatic circuit-breakers
3VF3 up to 100 1500
up to 160 2400
3VF4 up to 250 3000 B 3VF42 125DM37.... 5.500

4 3VF5
NSE0_00708
up to 400 4800 B 3VF52 125DM37.... 6.500

3VF6 up to 500 7500


up to 630 7500 B 3VF62 125DM37.... 11.000
3VF7 up to 800 15000 B 3VF71 121DK37.... 25.500
up to 1250 15000 B 3VF72 121DM37.... 25.500

3VF8 up to 1600 20000


up to 2000 20000

Pack size for 3VF is one unit, i.e. one unit or a multiple thereof
can be ordered.
For degree of protection IP30, terminal covers are recom-
mended in addition (see Pages 4/182 to 4/185).

4/168 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

4-pole, plug-in/withdrawable design

DT High switching capacity


65/70 kA at AC 380/415 V
Plug-in circuit-breakers Weight
Plug-in base required per PU
for 3VF6 and 3VF7: Guide frame see approx.
Pages 4/182 to 4/185.
Order No.
Order No. supplements,
see Pages 4/171 and 4/172. kg

B 3VF31 126DS37.... 2.600


B 3VF32 126DW37.... 2.600
B 3VF42 126DM37.... 5.500

B 3VF52 126DM37.... 6.500 4


B 3VF61 126DK37.... 11.000

B 3VF71 122DK37.... 19.600
B 3VF72 122DM37.... 19.600

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/169


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A
General Use Switch
3-pole, fixed-mounted design
Approved according to IEC 60947-2, UL 508 and CSA C22.2, No. 141)/circuit-breakers according to UL 489 on request
3VF3 to 3VF6 circuit-breakers
Type Rated Operating DT Standard switching capacity DT High switching capacity DT Very high switching capacity
current current of Fixed-mounted circuit- Weight Fixed-mounted circuit- Weight Fixed-mounted circuit- Weight
In the instan- breakers per PU breakers per PU breakers per PU
taneous with box terminals2) approx. with box terminals2) approx. with box terminals2) approx.
short-cir-
cuit release
"I" Ii Order No. Order No. Order No.
Order No. supplements, Order No. supplements, Order No. supplements,
see Pages 4/171 and see Pages 4/171 and see Pages 4/171 and
A A 4/1723). kg 4/1723). kg 4/1723). kg
Circuit-breakers for system protection
with permanently set overload/short-circuit releases
Short-circuit breaking Short-circuit breaking Short-circuit breaking

4 capacity (NEMA rating):


25 kA with AC 480 V
18 kA with AC 600 V
capacity (NEMA rating):
65 kA with AC 480 V
25 kA with AC 600 V
capacity (NEMA rating):
100 kA with AC 480 V
35 kA with AC 600 V
3VF3 50 400 B 3VF31 311FL41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 312FL41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 313FL41.... 2.300
60 500 B 3VF31 311FN41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 312FN41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 313FN41.... 2.300
80 630 B 3VF31 311FQ41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 312FQ41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 313FQ41.... 2.300
100 800 B 3VF31 311FS41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 312FS41.... 2.300 B 3VF31 313FS41.... 2.300
with permanently set thermal overload releases
and adjustable instantaneous short-circuit releases
Short-circuit breaking Short-circuit breaking Short-circuit breaking
capacity (NEMA rating): capacity (NEMA rating): capacity (NEMA rating):
25 kA with AC 480 V 65 kA with AC 480 V 100 kA with AC 480 V
18 kA with AC 600 V 25 kA with AC 600 V 50 kA with AC 600 V
3VF4 125 6251250 B 3VF42 311DF41.... 4.200 B 3VF42 312DF41.... 4.200 B 3VF42 313DF41.... 4.200
150 8001600 B 3VF42 311DH41.... 4.200 B 3VF42 312DH41.... 4.200 B 3VF42 313DH41.... 4.200
200 10002000 B 3VF42 311DK41.... 4.200 B 3VF42 312DK41.... 4.200 B 3VF42 313DK41.... 4.200
250 12502500 B 3VF42 311DM41.... 4.200 B 3VF42 312DM41.... 4.200 B 3VF42 313DM41.... 4.200

Short-circuit breaking Short-circuit breaking Short-circuit breaking


capacity (NEMA rating): capacity (NEMA rating): capacity (NEMA rating):
35 kA with AC 480 V 65 kA with AC 480 V 100 kA with AC 480 V
25 kA with AC 600 V 35 kA with AC 600 V 50 kA with AC 600 V
3VF5 200 10002000 B 3VF52 311DF41.... 5.500 B 3VF52 312DF41.... 5.500 B 3VF52 313DF41.... 5.500
250 12502500 B 3VF52 311DH41.... 5.500 B 3VF52 312DH41.... 5.500 B 3VF52 313DH41.... 5.500
Short-circuit breaking Short-circuit breaking Short-circuit breaking
capacity (NEMA rating): capacity (NEMA rating): capacity (NEMA rating):
35 kA with AC 480 V 65 kA with AC 480 V 100 kA with AC 480 V
25 kA with AC 600 V 35 kA with AC 600 V 50 kA with AC 600 V
3VF6 300 15753150 B 3VF62 311DF41.... 8.400 B 3VF62 312DF41.... 8.400 B 3VF62 313DF41.... 8.400
400 20004000 B 3VF62 311DH41.... 8.400 B 3VF62 312DH41.... 8.400 B 3VF62 313DH41.... 8.400
500 25005000 B 3VF62 311DK41.... 8.400 B 3VF62 312DK41.... 8.400 B 3VF62 313DK41.... 8.400
1) Only operated with back-up fuses approved according
to UL or CSA (see Page 4/139) up to AC 600 V.
2) With box terminals:
on 3VF3 for Cu cables AWG 142/0 (25 to 50 mm2);
on 3VF4 for Cu/Al cables AWG 4350 MCM (25 to 185 mm2);
on 3VF5 and 3VF6 for Cu/Al cables MCM 250350 (120 to 150 mm2)
(on 3VF6 for 2 cables).
3) Accessories with connecting leads required.

4/170 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Options

Selection and ordering data


1st Order No. supplement: undervoltage release or shunt release
Version with connecting leads (1 m long)
For plug-in circuit-breakers, order auxiliary conductor plug-in device separately (see Pages 4/182 and 4/183).
Rated control supply Order No. supplement Circuit-breakers
voltage US/frequency 3VF.. .......@@. . 3VF3 3VF4 3VF5 3VF6 3VF7 3VF8
AC 50/60 Hz
DC
Without auxiliary release 0A
Undervoltage releases
AC 9 ... 12 V 1B
AC 12 V 1C
AC 24 V 1D
AC 48 V 1U
AC 48 ... 60 V
AC 60 V
1F
1V











4
AC 110 ... 127 V 1G
AC 208 ... 240 V 1H
AC 380 ... 500 V 1J
AC 380 ... 480 V 1K
AC 480 ... 525 V 1L
DC 12 V 1N
DC 24 V 1P
DC 48 V 1U
DC 48 ... 60 V 1Q
DC 60 V 1V
DC 110 ... 125 V 1R
DC 220 ... 250 V 1S
Shunt releases
AC DC
12 ... 24 V 12 ... 24 V 7C
48 ... 60 V 48 ... 60 V 7J
48 ... 60 V 7F
48 ... 127 V 48 ... 60 V 7G
48 ... 60 V 7H
110 ... 240 V 110 ... 125 V 7K
110 ... 125 V 7L
110 ... 240 V 7M
380 ... 440 V 220 ... 250 V 7S
380 ... 600 V 220 ... 250 V 7T
2nd Order No. supplement: auxiliary switches (HS) and alarm switches (AS)
Version with connecting leads (1 m long)
For plug-in circuit-breakers, order auxiliary conductor plug-in device separately (see Pages 4/182 and 4/183).
Complement Order No. supplement Circuit-breakers
3VF.. .........@@ 3VF3 3VF4 3VF5 3VF6 3VF7 3VF8
HS=1 changeover contact
AS=1 changeover contact
Without auxiliary/alarm switch A0
1 HS B1 2)
2 HS C1 2)
4 HS E1
1 HS F1 3)
1 AS G1 2)
4 HS + 2 AS T1
1 HS + 1 AS N1 2)
If no undervoltage release or shunt release is fitted, the following complements are also possible:
1 HS + 2 AS only R1 1)
2 HS + 1 AS 3-pole P1 1)
2 HS + 2 AS circuit-breaker S1 1)
version possible. .
version not possible
1) Not for 3VF3 circuit-breaker for motor protection.
2) Not for 3VF3 circuit-breaker for motor protection with auxiliary release/
RCD module.
3) Only for 3VF3 circuit-breaker for motor protection.

Siemens LV 30 2004 4/171


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Options

1st Order No. supplement: undervoltage release or shunt release


Version with terminal block 1)
(not for plug-in circuit-breakers for withdrawable version and "General Use Switch" acc. to UL/CSA, Page 4/170)
Rated control supply Order No. supplement Circuit-breakers
voltage US/frequency 3VF.. .......@@. . 3VF3 3VF4 3VF5 3VF6 3VF7
AC 50/60 Hz
DC
Without auxiliary release 0A
Undervoltage releases
AC 9 ... 12 V 2B
AC 12 V 2C
AC 24 V 2D
AC 48 V 2U
AC 48 ... 60 V 2F
AC 60 V 2V

4 AC 110 ... 127 V


AC 208 ... 240 V
2G
2H










AC 380 ... 500 V 2J
AC 380 ... 480 V 2K
AC 480 ... 525 V 2L
DC 12 V 2N
DC 24 V 2P
DC 48 V 2U
DC 48 ... 60 V 2Q
DC 60 V 2V
DC 110 ... 125 V 2R
DC 220 ... 250 V 2S
Shunt releases
AC DC
12 ... 24 V 12 ... 24 V 8C
48 ... 60 V 48 ... 60 V 8J
48 ... 60 V 8F
48 ... 127 V 48 ... 60 V 8G
48 ... 60 V 8H
110 ... 240 V 110 ... 125 V 8K
110 ... 125 V 8L
110 ... 240 V 8M
380 ... 440 V 220 ... 250 V 8S
380 ... 600 V 220 ... 250 V 8T
2nd Order No. supplement: auxiliary switches (HS) and alarm switches (AS)
Version with terminal block1)
(not for plug-in circuit-breakers for withdrawable version or "General Use Switch" acc. to UL/CSA, Page 4/170)
Complement Order No. supplement Circuit-breakers
3VF.. .........@@ 3VF3 3VF4 3VF5 3VF6 3VF7
HS=1 changeover
AS =1 changeover
Without auxiliary/alarm switch A0
1 HS B2 2)
2 HS C2 2)
1 AS only for 3-pole G2 2)
circuit-breakers
1 HS + 1 AS only for 3-pole N2 2)
circuit-breakers
If no undervoltage release or shunt release is fitted, the following complements are also possible:
1 HS + 2 AS R2 3)
2 HS + 1 AS P2 3)
2 HS + 2 AS S2 3)
version possible.
version not possible
1) Due to the terminal block, the lateral spacing of the circuit-breakers must
be at least 25 mm.
2) Not for 3VF3 circuit-breaker for motor protection with auxiliary release/
RCD module.
3) Not for 3VF3 circuit-breaker for motor protection.

4/172 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Accessories/spare parts

Selection and ordering data


for 3VF2 circuit-breakers
Operating mechanisms DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Operating mechanisms
Front-operated rotary operating mechanism
for direct mounting on circuit-breakers B 3VF9 2231AA00 1 unit 0.232
Degree of protection IP30, black knob
Max. 3 padlocks
EMERGENCY-STOP version B 3VF9 2231BA00 1 unit 0.232
Red knob, yellow indicator plate

4
Version with shaft stub without knob B 3VF9 2231JA00 1 unit 0.204
(required operating mechanism 8UC61, see below)
Door-coupling rotary operating
mechanisms
Standard version, black B 8UC61 121BD22 1 unit 0.417
EMERGENCY-STOP version, B 8UC61 223BD22 1 unit 0.402
red/yellow
to be ordered separately: front rotary operating mechanism B 3VF9 2231JA00 1 unit 0.204
with shaft stub
Connection systems, covers
3VF22 rear terminals
for 45 to 100 A for 3-pole circuit-breakers B 3VF9 2241LD10 1 set 0,252
(cover, see below) 1 set = 6 units
for 4-pole circuit-breakers B 3VF9 2241LD20 1 set 0.333
1 set = 8 units
Terminal covers
for main terminal, for 3-pole circuit-breakers B 3VF9 2241NB10 1 set 0.063
cable terminal 1 set = 2 units
for 4-pole circuit-breakers B 3VF9 2241NB20 1 set 0.079
1 set = 2 units
Cover with cap dimension 45 mm
for distributor structure for 3-pole circuit-breakers B 3VF9 2201CA10 1 unit 0.019
for 4-pole circuit-breakers B 3VF9 2201CA20 1 unit 0.021
Masking frame for door cut-out
For circuit-breakers 1 set = 1 unit B 3VF9 2201AA00 1 set 0.048
Shunt releases1)
Version with terminal block
Shunt release
AC 50/60 Hz DC
12 V B 3VF9 2211JC10 1 unit 0.282
24 V B 3VF9 2211JD10 1 unit 0.281
48 V B 3VF9 2211JH10 1 unit 0.289
110125 V B 3VF9 2211JL10 1 unit 0.271
110127 V B 3VF9 2211JP10 1 unit 0.292
220240 V B 3VF9 2211JM10 1 unit 0.280
380415 V B 3VF9 2211JV10 1 unit 0.282
Shunt release with auxiliary switch 1 CO
AC 50/60 Hz DC
12 V B 3VF9 2211KC10 1 unit 0.298
24 V B 3VF9 2211KD10 1 unit 0.302
48 V B 3VF9 2211KH10 1 unit 0.303
110125 V B 3VF9 2211KL10 1 unit 0.296
110127 V B 3VF9 2211KP10 1 unit 0.300
220240 V B 3VF9 2211KM10 1 unit 0.302
380-415 V B 3VF9 2211KV10 1 unit 0.297
Auxiliary switches and alarm switches 1)
Version with terminal block
Tripped signaling/alarm switch
1 CO B 3VF9 2221AC10 1 unit 0.233
Alarm switches (AS) and
auxiliary switches (HS)
1 CO (AS) + 1 CO (HS) B 3VF9 2221DC10 1 unit 0.243
Auxiliary switches
1 CO B 3VF9 2221BC10 1 unit 0.215
2 CO B 3VF9 2221CC10 1 unit 0.235
1) Only one accessory part possible per 3VF2 circuit-breaker; mounting on
left side of circuit-breaker.

* This quantity or a multiple thereof quantity can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/173
Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Accessories/spare parts
Auxiliary and alarm switches
Possible complements for
3VF3 to 3VF8 circuit-breakers
The options for equipping the circuit-breakers with
auxiliary switches or alarm switches, shunt releases,

N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 1 8
undervoltage releases and RCD modules depends on the
position in which they are fitted in the circuit-breaker (left or right), see Table.
Refer to Page 4/133 for versions of auxiliary switches and alarm switches.

In s ta lle d o n In s ta lle d o n
le ft- h a n d s id e r ig h t- h a n d s id e
e .g . e .g .
1 A S o r 1 A S o r
2 A S o r 4 A S o r
1 A S + 1 A S 2 A S

4 A S = 1 c h a n g e o v e r c o n ta c t

Accessories for 3VF3 Accessories for 3VF4


DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.

3- or 4-pole kg kg
Auxiliary and alarm switches (HS + AS) for retrofitting
Version with connecting leads
Left mounting side Right mounting side
3- or 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole
HS 1 HS B 3VF9 3221BB30 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4221BB30 1 unit 2.000
or 1 HS 1 HS B 3VF9 3221BB30 1 unit 0.180 3) B 3VF9 4221BB30 1 unit 2.000
2 4
1 HS 1 HS B 3VF9 3221BB40 1 unit 0.180 ) )
2 HS B 3VF9 3221CB10 1 unit 0.180 2) B 3VF9 4221CB30 1 unit 2.000
2 HS 2 HS B 3VF9 3221CB20 1 unit 0.180 3) B 3VF9 4221CB30 1 unit 2.000
4 HS 4 HS
AS 1 AS B 3VF9 3221GB10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4221GB10 1 unit 2.000
or 3)
1 AS B 3VF9 3221GB20 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4221GB20 1 unit 2.000
1 AS B 3VF9 3221GF20 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4221GF20 1 unit 2.000
2 AS B 3VF9 3221HB10 1 unit 0.180
2 AS 2 AS
HS + AS 1 HS + 1 AS B 3VF9 3221NB10 1 unit 0.180
or 1 HS + 1 AS B 3VF9 3221NB20 1 unit 0.180 3) B 3VF9 4221NB20 1 unit 2.000
1 HS + 1 AS B 3VF9 3221NF20 1 unit 0.180
, , RCD < or or RCD < see Pages 4/176 and 4/186. see Pages 4/176 and 4/186.
Other alternatives for 3VF8 circuit-breaker
HS max. 3 4 HS max. 3 4 HS
or
HS + AS max. 3 4 HS + max. 3 4 HS
or max. 3 2 AS + 3 2 AS
+ HS + AS + max. 3 4 HS + max. 3 4 HS
or + max. 2 2 AS + max. 2 2 AS
+ HS max. 3 + max. 3 +
or max. 3 4 HS max. 3 4 HS
< + HS + AS < + max. 3 4 HS + max. 3 4 HS <

or + max. 2 2 AS + max. 2 2 AS
< + + HS <+ max. 2 + + max. 2 + <

or max. 3 4 HS max. 3 4 HS
Auxiliary and alarm switches (HS + AS) for retrofitting
Version with terminal block 1)
Left mounting side Right mounting side
3 or 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole
HS 1 HS B 3VF9 3221BC10 1 unit 0.180
(only for 3-pole)
3)
or 1 HS 1 HS B 3VF9 3221BC20 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4221BC20 1 unit 2.000
2 HS B 3VF9 3221CC10 1 unit 0.180
(only for 3-pole)
2 HS 2 HS B 3VF9 3221CC20 1 unit 0.180 3) B 3VF9 4221CC20 1 unit 2.000
AS 1 AS or B 3VF9 3221GC10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4221GC10 1 unit 2.000
3
or 1 AS B 3VF9 3221GC20 1 unit 0.180 ) B 3VF9 4221GC20 1 unit 2.000
2 AS or B 3VF9 3221HC10 1 unit 0.180
HS + AS 1 HS + 1 AS or B 3VF9 3221NC10 1 unit 0.180
3
or 1 HS + 1 AS B 3VF9 3221NC20 1 unit 0.180 ) B 3VF9 4221NC20 1 unit 2.000
, , RCD
< or < or RCD see Pages 4/176 and 4/186. see Pages 4/176 and 4/186.
1) Due to the terminal block, the lateral spacing of the circuit-breakers must < Undervoltage release (see Page 4/176)
be at least 25 mm. RCD RCD module
2) Only for 3VF3 for motor protection.
Shunt release (see Page 4/176)

4/174 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof quantity can be ordered.
Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Accessories/spare parts

NSE0_00019

NSE0_00020
1 auxiliary switch 1 auxiliary switch
and 1 alarm switch and 1 alarm switch
fitted on the right fitted on the right

4
Version with connecting leads Version with terminal block

Accessories for 3VF5 Accessories for 3VF6 Accessories for 3VF7 Accessories for 3VF8
DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU per PU per PU
approx. approx. approx. approx.

kg kg kg kg

B 3VF9 5221BB30 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 6221BB30 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7221BB30 1 unit 0.180
B 3VF9 5221BB30 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 6221BB30 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7221BB30 1 unit 0.180

B 3VF9 5221CB30 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 6221CB30 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7221CB30 1 unit 0.180
B 3VF9 5221CB30 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 6221CB30 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7221CB30 1 unit 0.180
B 3VF9 8221EB40 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5221GB10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 6221GB10 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7221GB10 1 unit 0.180
B 3VF9 5221GB20 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 6221GB20 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7221GB20 1 unit 0.180
B 3VF9 5221GF20 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 6221GF20 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7221GF20 1 unit 0.180
B 3VF9 5221HB10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 6221HB10 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7221HB10 1 unit 0.180
B 3VF9 8221HB40 1 unit 0.200

B 3VF9 5221NB20 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 6221NB20 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7221NB20 1 unit 0.180

see Pages 4/177 and 4/186. see Pages 4/177 and 4/186. see Pages 4/177 and 4/186. see Pages 4/177 and 4/186.

B 3VF9 5221BC20 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 6221BC20 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7221BC20 1 unit 0.180

B 3VF9 5221CC20 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 6221CC20 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7221CC20 1 unit 0.180
B 3VF9 5221GC10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 6221GC10 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7221GC10 1 unit 0.180
B 3VF9 5221GC20 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 6221GC20 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7221GC20 1 unit 0.180
B 3VF9 5221HC10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 6221HC10 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7221HC10 1 unit 0.180

B 3VF9 5221NC20 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 6221NC20 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7221NC20 1 unit 0.180
see Pages 4/177 and 4/186. see Pages 4/177 and 4/186. see Pages 4/177 and 4/186. see Pages 4/177 and 4/186.
3) Not suitable for 3VF3 for motor protection.
4) Can be retrofitted with circuit-breakers supplied from Feb. 96.

* This quantity or a multiple thereof quantity can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/175
Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Accessories/spare parts
Shunt releases and undervoltage releases (see Page 4/133 for possible complements)
Accessories for 3VF3 Accessories for 3VF4
DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.

3- or 4-pole kg kg
Shunt release
NSE0_00019

for retrofitting
left for 3VF3 to 3VF7,
right for 3VF8
AC V DC V
12 24 12 24 B 3VF9 3211 . C10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4211 . C10 1 unit on req.
48 60 48 60 B 3VF9 4211 . J10 1 unit on req.
48 60

4
48127 48 60
48 60
B 3VF9 3211 . G10

1 unit 0.180

110240 110125 B 3VF9 3211 . K10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4211 . K10 1 unit 0.180
110125
110240
380440 220250 B 3VF9 4211 . S10 1 unit 0.180
380600 220250 B 3VF9 3211 . T 10 1 unit 0.180

Auxiliary release for fitting to Version with connecting leads H H


left side up to 3VF7 Version with terminal block 1) J J
(auxiliary switch shown as Undervoltage release
example) version with con- for retrofitting <
necting leads left for 3VF3 to 3VF7,
right for 3VF8
AC 12 V B 3VF9 3211 . B10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 4211 . C10 1 unit 0.220
NSE0_00020

AC 24 V B 3VF9 3211 . D10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 4211 . D10 1 unit 0.220
AC 4860 V (3VF3 only 48 V) B 3VF9 3211 . U10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 4211 . F10 1 unit 0.220
AC 60 V (only 3VF3) B 3VF9 3211 . V10 1 unit 0.220
AC 110127 V B 3VF9 3211 . G10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 4211 . G10 1 unit 0.220
AC 208240 V B 3VF9 3211 . H10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 4211 . H10 1 unit 0.220
AC 380500 V (3VF3 only up to 480 V) B 3VF9 3211 . K10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 4211 . J10 1 unit 0.220
AC 480525 V B 3VF9 3211 . L10 1 unit 0.220

Version with connecting leads B B


Version with terminal block 1) C C
DC 12 V B 3VF9 3211 . N10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 4211 . N10 1 unit 0.220
DC 24 V B 3VF9 3211 . P10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 4211 . P10 1 unit 0.220
DC 4860 V (3VF3 only 48 V) B 3VF9 3211 . U10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 4211 . Q10 1 unit 0.220
DC 60 V (only 3VF3) B 3VF9 3211 . V10 1 unit 0.220
DC 110125 V B 3VF9 3211 . R10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 4211 . R10 1 unit 0.220
Auxiliary release for fitting to DC 220250 V B 3VF9 3211 . S10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 4211 . S10 1 unit 0.220
left side up to 3VF7
(auxiliary switch shown as Version with connecting leads B B
example) version with termi- Version with terminal block 1) C C
nal block Time-delay device for
undervoltage release
(DC 220 ... 250 V)

Rated control supply voltage


Us = AC/DC 220 ... 230 V

Delay time
0.3 ... 3.5 s stepless X 3WX31 563JJ10 1 unit 0.500 X 3WX31 563JJ10 1 unit 0.500
0.5; 0.8 s A 3TX4 4901A 1 unit 0.085
1.7; 3.3 s A 3TX4 7010AN1 1 unit 0.169
0.7; 1.4 s A 3TX4 7010AN1 1 unit 0.169
1) Due to the terminal block, the lateral spacing of the circuit-breakers must
be at least 25 mm.

4/176 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Accessories/spare parts

Accessories for 3VF5 Accessories for 3VF6 Accessories for 3VF7 Accessories for 3VF8
DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU per PU per PU
approx. approx. approx. approx.

kg kg kg kg

B 3VF9 5211 . C10 1 unit on req. B 3VF9 6211 . C10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7211 . C10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 8211 . C40 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5211 . J10 1 unit on req.
B 3VF9 6211 . F10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7211 . F10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 8211 . F40 1 unit 0.200

B

3VF9 6211 . H10 1 unit 0.200 B

3VF9 7211 . H10 1 unit 0.180 B

3VF9 8211 . H40 1 unit 0.200 4
B 3VF9 5211 . K10 1 unit 0.180
B 3VF9 6211 . L10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7211 . L10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 8211 . L40 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 6211 . M10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7211 . M10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 8211 . M40 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5211 . S10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 6211 . S10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7211 . S10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 8211 . S40 1 unit 0.200

H H H H
J J J

B 3VF9 5211 . C10 1 unit on req. B 3VF9 6211 . C10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7211 . C10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 8211 . C40 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5211 . D10 1 unit on req. B 3VF9 6211 . D10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7211 . D10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 8211 . D40 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5211 . F10 1 unit on req. B 3VF9 6211 . F10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7211 . F10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 8211 . F40 1 unit 0.200

B 3VF9 5211 . G10 1 unit on req. B 3VF9 6211 . G10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7211 . G10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 8211 . G40 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5211 . H10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 6211 . H10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7211 . H10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 8211 . H40 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5211 . J10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 6211 . J10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7211 . J10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 8211 . J40 1 unit 0.200

B B B B
C C C
B 3VF9 5211 . N10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 6211 . N10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7211 . N10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 8211 . N40 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5211 . P10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 6211 . P10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7211 . P10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 8211 . P40 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5211 . Q10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 6211 . Q10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7211 . Q10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 8211 . Q40 1 unit 0.200

B 3VF9 5211 . R10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 6211 . R10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7211 . R10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 8211 . R40 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5211 . S10 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 6211 . S10 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7211 . S10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 8211 . S40 1 unit 0.200

B B B B
C C C

X 3WX31 563JJ10 1 unit 0.500 X 3WX31 563JJ10 1 unit 0.500 X 3WX31 563JJ10 1 unit 0.500 X 3WX31 563JJ10 1 unit 0.500


A 3TX4 7010AN1 1 unit 0.169 A 3TX4 7010AN1 1 unit 0.169 A 3TX4 7010AN1 1 unit 0.169 A 3TX4 7010AN1 1 unit 0.169

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/177


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Accessories/spare parts
Operating mechanisms
Accessories for 3VF3 Accessories for 3VF4
DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.

3- or 4-pole kg kg
Front rotary operating mechanism
for direct mounting on circuit-breakers
Degree of protection IP30, black
Max. 3 padlocks
without leading HS B 3VF9 3231AA00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231AA00 1 unit 2.000
with leading HS after ON (2 NO) "S4" B 3VF9 3231AB00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231AB00 1 unit 2.000
with leading HS after OFF (2 NC) "S5" B 3VF9 3231AD00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231AD00 1 unit 2.000

4
Front rotary operating with leading HS after ON/OFF (2 NO/2 NC) B 3VF9 3231AF00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231AF00 1 unit 2.000
mechanism "S4/S5"
for 3VF3
Version with connecting leads
EMERGENCY-STOP version
Red knob, yellow indicator plate
without leading HS B 3VF9 3231BA00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231BA00 1 unit 2.000
with leading HS after ON (2 NO) "S4" B 3VF9 3231BB00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231BB00 1 unit 2.000
with leading HS after OFF (2 NC) "S5" B 3VF9 3231BD00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231BD00 1 unit 2.000
with leading HS after ON/OFF (2 NO/2 NC) B 3VF9 3231BF00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231BF00 1 unit 2.000
"S4/S5"
Version with connecting leads
Version with shaft stub, without knob
(additional door-coupling rotary operating
mechanism required see Page 4/189)
without leading HS B 3VF9 3231JA00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231JA00 1 unit 2.000
with leading HS after ON (2 NO) "S4" B 3VF9 3231JB00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231JB00 1 unit 2.000
Front rotary operating
mechanism with leading HS after OFF (2 NC) "S5" B 3VF9 3231JD00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231JD00 1 unit 2.000
for 3VF6 with leading HS after ON/OFF (2 NO/2 NC) B 3VF9 3231JF00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231JF00 1 unit 2.000
"S4/S5"
Version with connecting leads
Rotary operating mechanism, complete, for
fitting in doors and covers
Degree of protection IP65, with total insulation,
incl. black knob, with masking frame,
N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 2 1

aluminized indicator plate, removable door


coupling, 300 mm1) extension shaft and front
rotary operating mechanism for the relevant cir-
Front rotary operating cuit-breaker, lockable with max. 3 padlocks, with
mechanism door interlocking
with knob without leading HS B 3VF9 3231EA00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231EA00 1 unit 2.000
with leading HS after ON (2 NO) "S4" B 3VF9 3231EB00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231EB00 1 unit 2.000
C o n tr o l c a b in e t d o o r with leading HS after OFF (2 NC) "S5" B 3VF9 3231ED00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231ED00 1 unit 2.000
with leading HS after ON/OFF (2 NO/2 NC) B 3VF9 3231EF00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231EF00 1 unit 2.000
"S4/S5"
Version with connecting leads
N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 2 2 a
EMERGENCY-STOP version
Red knob, yellow indicator plate
without leading HS B 3VF9 3231FA00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231FA00 1 unit 2.000
Rotary operating mecha- with leading HS after ON (2 NO) "S4" B 3VF9 3231FB00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231FB00 1 unit 2.000
nism, complete,
scope of supply with leading HS after OFF (2 NC) "S5" B 3VF9 3231FD00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231FD00 1 unit 2.000
with leading HS after ON/OFF (2 NO/2 NC) B 3VF9 3231FF00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231FF00 1 unit 2.000
"S4/S5"
Version with connecting leads
Additional locking device B 3VF9 3231VA00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231VA00 1 unit 2.120
for rotary operating mechanism, complete2)
1) For longer shafts, see Page 4/189
(support for the shaft required in the control cabinet).
2) Only required if the circuit-breaker is also to be locked with the door open,
i.e. with rotary operating mechanism decoupled.
Lockable with max. 3 padlocks, 4.5 to 8 mm shackle diameter.
HS = auxiliary switch.

4/178 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Accessories/spare parts

Accessories for 3VF5 Accessories for 3VF6 Accessories for 3VF7 Accessories for 3VF8
DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU per PU per PU
approx. approx. approx. approx.

kg kg kg kg

B 3VF9 5231AA00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231AA00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231AA00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231AA01 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5231AB00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231AB00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231AB00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231AB01 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5231AD00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231AD00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231AD00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231AD01 1 unit 0.200

4
B 3VF9 5231AF00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231AF00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231AF00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231AF01 1 unit 0.200

B 3VF9 5231BA00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231BA00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231BA00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231BA01 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5231BB00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231BB00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231BB00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231BB01 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5231BD00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231BD00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231BD00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231BD01 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5231BF00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231BF00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231BF00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231BF01 1 unit 0.200

B 3VF9 5231JA00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231JA00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231JA00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231JA01 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5231JB00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231JB00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231JB00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231JB01 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5231JD00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231JD00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231JD00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231JD01 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5231JF00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231JF00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231JF00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231JF01 1 unit 0.200

B 3VF9 5231EA00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231EA00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231EA00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231EA01 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5231EB00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231EB00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231EB00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231EB01 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5231ED00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231ED00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231ED00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231ED01 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5231EF00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231EF00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231EF00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231EF01 1 unit 0.200

B 3VF9 5231FA00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231FA00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231FA00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231FA01 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5231FB00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231FB00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231FB00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231FB01 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5231FD00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231FD00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231FD00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231FD01 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5231FF00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231FF00 1 unit 0.140 B 3VF9 7231FF00 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8231FF01 1 unit 0.200

B 3VF9 5231VA00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231VA00 1 unit 0.332 integrated in front rotary operating integrated in front rotary operating
mechanism mechanism

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/179


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Accessories/spare parts
Operating mechanisms
Accessories for 3VF3 Accessories for 3VF4
DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.

3- or 4-pole kg kg
Motorized operating mechanism1)
degree of protection IP00
without locking device
AC 50/60 Hz DC
24 V B 3VF9 3231MA20 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231MA20 1 unit 2.000
42 V 48 V B 3VF9 3231MB10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231MB10 1 unit 2.000
60 V B 3VF9 3231MC20 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231MC20 1 unit 2.000
110/127 V 110/127 V B 3VF9 3231MD10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231MD10 1 unit 2.000

4 Motorized operating
mechanism for 3VF3
220/240 V 220 V
with locking device
B 3VF9 3231ME10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231ME10 1 unit 2.000

for 3 padlocks
AC 50/60 Hz DC
24 V B 3VF9 3231NA20 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231NA20 1 unit 2.120
48 V
42 V 48 V B 3VF9 3231NB10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231NB10 1 unit 2.120
60 V B 3VF9 3231NC20 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231NC20 1 unit 2.120
110/125 V
110/127 V 110/127 V B 3VF9 3231ND10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231ND10 1 unit 2.120
220/240 V 220 V B 3VF9 3231NE10 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231NE10 1 unit 2.120
Motorized operating mechanism suitable for
synchronizing
Degree of protection IP00
with locking device
for 3 padlocks
Motorized operating
mechanism for 3VF4, AC 50/60 Hz DC
3VF5, 3VF6 (shown with 24 V C 3VF9 4231QA20 1 unit 2.120
3VF6) 48 V
42 V 48 V C 3VF9 4231QB10 1 unit 2.120
60 V C 3VF9 4231QC20 1 unit 2.120
110/127 V 110/127 V C 3VF9 4231QD10 1 unit 2.120
220/240 V 220 V C 3VF9 4231QE10 1 unit 2.120
Handle for motorized operating mechanisms B 3VF9 6231WB00 1 unit 0.332
suitable for synchronizing2)
Solenoid operating mechanism
AC 50/60 Hz 110/120 V B 3VF9 3231SD30 1 unit 0.180
AC 50/60 Hz 220/240 V B 3VF9 3231SE30 1 unit 0.180
DC 110/120 V B 3VF9 3231SD20 1 unit 0.180
Motorized operating DC 220/240 V B 3VF9 3231SE20 1 unit 0.180
mechanism for 3VF8

1) With control voltages of 380/400 V or 500 V a transformer is required:


e.g. 400/230 V (380/220 V), Order No. 4AM34 425AT100FA0
e.g. 500/230 V, Order No. 4AM34 425FT100FA0. Catalog LV 10 "Switchgear and Controlgear for Industry"
The motorized operating mechanism must be ordered for
AC 50/60 Hz 220 V.
2) For local manual closing.
3) Do not use motorized operating mechanisms in combination with guide
frames in the case of 3VF6/3VF7.
4) Not for DC voltages.

4/180 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Accessories/spare parts

Accessories for 3VF5 Accessories for 3VF6 Accessories for 3VF7 Accessories for 3VF8
DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU per PU per PU
approx. approx. approx. approx.

kg kg kg kg

B 3VF9 5231MA20 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231MA20 1 unit 0.140 3)


3
B 3VF9 5231MB10 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231MB10 1 unit 0.140 )
3
B 3VF9 5231MC20 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231MC20 1 unit 0.140 )
3
B 3VF9 5231MD10 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231MD10 1 unit 2.500 )
B 3VF9 5231ME10 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231ME10 1 unit 2.500 3
)
4
3
B 3VF9 5231NA20 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231NA20 1 unit 2.500 )
3
D 3VF9 7231NB20 1 unit 3.680 ) B 3VF9 8331NB20 1 unit 17.300
B 3VF9 5231NB10 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231NB10 1 unit 2.500 3)
3
B 3VF9 5231NC20 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231NC20 1 unit 2.500 )
D 3VF9 7231ND20 1 unit 3.680 3)
3) 3)4) 4)
B 3VF9 5231ND10 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231ND10 1 unit 2.500 D 3VF9 7231ND30 1 unit 3.680 B 3VF9 8331ND30 1 unit 17.300
3 3 4 4
B 3VF9 5231NE10 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231NE10 1 unit 2.500 ) D 3VF9 7231NE30 1 unit 3.680 ) ) B 3VF9 8331NE30 1 unit 17.300 )

C 3VF9 5231QA20 1 unit 1.080 C 3VF9 6231QA20 1 unit 0.332



C 3VF9 5231QB10 1 unit 1.080 C 3VF9 6231QB10 1 unit 0.332
C 3VF9 5231QC20 1 unit 1.080 C 3VF9 6231QC20 1 unit 0.332
C 3VF9 5231QD10 1 unit 1.080 C 3VF9 6231QD10 1 unit 0.332
C 3VF9 5231QE10 1 unit 1.080 C 3VF9 6231QE10 1 unit 0.332
B 3VF9 6231WB00 1 unit 0.332 B 3VF9 6231WB00 1 unit 0.332

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/181


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Accessories/spare parts
Connections
Accessories for 3VF3 Accessories for 3VF4
DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
Rear- per PU per PU
mounting on
circuit- approx. approx.
breaker
3- or 4-pole kg kg
NSE0_00023

Auxiliary conductor plug-in


device
for plug-in circuit-breakers/
withdrawable circuit-breakers
External mounting on side of plug- } 3VF9 6241VA40 1 unit 0.258 } 3VF9 6241VA40 1 unit 0.258
in circuit-breaker1)
3VF9 5241VA50 Fitted to rear of circuit-breaker } 3VF9 5241VA50 1 unit 0.429
Auxiliary conductor plug-in Additional lateral connector1) } 3VF9 6241VJ40 1 unit 0.128 } 3VF9 6241VJ40 1 unit 0.128
device for 3VF4/3VF5 Additional rear connector } 3VF9 6241VJ50 1 unit 0.158

4 Pull-out device2)
for plug-in circuit-breakers/
plug-in bases
B 3VF9 6241VF00 1 unit 0.498 B 3VF9 6241VF00 1 unit 0.498

Position indicator switches


for disconnected position
for guide frame
Phase barrier3) B 3VF9 3241RA10 1 set 0.189 B 3VF9 5241RA10 1 set 0.429
for main connection
3VF9 3241LD10 1 set = 2 units
Rear terminal for 3VF3 3-pole only
Front busbar connection pieces B 3VF9 3241JA10 1 set 3.650 B 3VF9 4241JA10 1 set 2.760
1 set = 3 units

Plug-in base Rear terminals B 3VF9 3241LD10 1 set 3.650 B 3VF9 4241LD10 1 set 0.380
1 set = 3 units
Mounting Terminal with phase with standard termi- with standard ter-
part barriers for flexible flat nal, included in minal, included in
on plug-in copper bars scope of supply of scope of supply of
base 1 set = 3 units circuit-breaker (up circuit-breaker
NSE0_00024

to 160 A)
Multiple feed-in terminal
1 set = 3 units
Plug-in base
complete with baseplate and
2 terminal covers
for front connection B 3VF9 3241FA10 1 unit 3.650 B 3VF9 4241FA10 1 unit 2.760
for circuit-breaker with B 3VF9 3241FE10 1 unit 3.650 B 3VF9 4241FE10 1 unit 2.760
RCD module
Plug-in base
with baseplate
for rear connection B 3VF9 3241FB10 1 unit 3.650 B 3VF9 4241FB10 1 unit 2.760
for circuit-breaker with RCD B 3VF9 3241FF10 1 unit 3.650 B 3VF9 4241FF10 1 unit 2.760
module
Guide frame4)
with baseplate and crank handle
for front connection
for rear connection
Terminal covers IP30 } 3VF9 3241NB10 1 set 0.146 } 3VF9 4241NB10 1 set 0.160
3VF9 5241FA10 with integrated phase for cable connection for cable
Plug-in base with baseplate barriers for main connections connection
for front connection 1 set = 2 units
for 3VF5

3VF9 7241LD10
Rear connections
for 3VF7

For 8US1 busbar adapter system, see Section 8


"Components for distribution systems".
1) Not in conjunction with guide frames.
2) For easy removal of 3VF circuit-breakers when mounted in a row.
3) 3 sets required for 4-pole circuit-breakers.
4) Use plug-in circuit-breakers with connecting leads (see Page 4/171).
5) The guide frame cannot be used in combination with the motorized operat-
ing mechanism for 3VF6 and 3VF7.

4/182 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Accessories/spare parts

Accessories for 3VF5 Accessories for 3VF6 Accessories for 3VF7 Accessories for 3VF8
DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU per PU per PU
approx. approx. approx. approx.

kg kg kg kg

} 3VF9 6241VA40 1 unit 0.258 } 3VF9 6241VA40 1 unit 0.258

} 3VF9 5241VA50 1 unit 0.429 } 3VF9 6241VA50 1 unit 0.498 B 3VF9 7241VA50 1 unit 0.643
} 3VF9 6241VJ40 1 unit 0.128 } 3VF9 6241VJ40 1 unit 0.128
} 3VF9 6241VJ50 1 unit 0.158 } 3VF9 6241VJ50 1 unit 0.158 } 3VF9 6241VJ50 1 unit 0.158
B 3VF9 6241VF00 1 unit 0.498 B 3VF9 6241VF00 1 unit 0.498 B
4
B 3VF9 6241VL60 1 unit 0.498 B 3VF9 7241VL60 1 unit 0.643
(1 changeover (2 changeover
contact) contacts)
B 3VF9 5241RA10 1 set 0.429 B 3VF9 6241RA10 1 set 0.300 B 3VF9 7241RA10 1 set 0.300

B 3VF9 5241JA10 1 set 0.260 B included in scope B 3VF9 7241JA10 1 set 1.820 B 3VF9 8241JA10 1 set 0.200
of supply of (up to 2000 A)
circuit-breaker
B 3VF9 5241LD10 1 set 0.260 B 3VF9 6241LD10 1 set on req. B 3VF9 7241LD10 1 set 1.820 B 3VF9 8241LD10 1 set 0.200

B 3VF9 5241JB10 1 set 0.260 B 3TX7 6901F 1 set 1.930 on request

B 3VF9 6241AD10 1 set 0.332 B 3VF9 7241AD10 1 unit 20.000


(up to 630 A)

B 3VF9 5241FA10 1 unit 0.260 B 3VF9 6241FA10 1 unit 5.180


B 3VF9 5241FE10 1 unit 0.260

B 3VF9 5241FB10 1 unit 0.260 B 3VF9 6241FB10 1 unit 5.180


B 3VF9 5241FF10 1 unit 0.260 B

B 3VF9 6241GA10 1 unit 18.000 5) B 3VF9 7241GA10 1 unit 20.000 5)


B 3VF9 6241GB10 1 unit 18.000 5) B 3VF9 7241GB10 1 unit 20.000 5)
} 3VF9 5241NB10 1 set 0.207 } 3VF9 6241NB10 1 set 0.300
for cable for cable or
connection busbar connec-
tion

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/183


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Accessories/spare parts
Connections
Accessories for 3VF3 Accessories for 3VF4
DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.

4-pole only kg kg
3VF9 6241AD10 Front busbar connection pieces B 3VF9 3241JA20 1 set 3.650 B 3VF9 4241JA20 1 set 2.760
Multiple feed-in 1 set = 4 units
terminal for 3VF6
Rear terminal B 3VF9 3241LD20 1 set 3.650 B 3VF9 4241LD20 1 set 0.380
1 set = 4 units
Terminal with phase with standard termi- with standard ter-
barriers for flexible flat copper nal, included in minal, included in
bars scope of supply of scope of supply of

4 1 set = 4 units circuit-breaker (up to circuit-breaker


160 A)
3VF9 7241JA10 Multiple feed-in terminal
Front busbar 1 set = 4 units
connection pieces for 3VF7 Plug-in base
complete with baseplate and
2 terminal covers
for front connection B 3VF9 3241FA20 1 unit 3.650 B 3VF9 4241FA20 1 unit 2.760
for circuit-breaker with B 3VF9 3241FE20 1 unit 3.650 B 3VF9 4241FE20 1 unit 2.760
RCD module
Plug-in base
with baseplate
for rear connection B 3VF9 3241FB20 1 unit 3.650 B 3VF9 4241FB20 1 unit 2.760
3VF9 5241NB10
for circuit-breaker with RCD mod- B 3VF9 3241FF20 1 unit 3.650 B 3VF9 4241FF20 1 unit 2.760
Terminal cover for main ter-
ule
minal for 3VF5
Guide frame1)
with baseplate and crank handle
for front connection
for rear connection
Terminal covers IP30 B 3VF9 3241NB20 1 set 0.189 B 3VF9 4241NB20 1 set 0.214
with integrated phase for cable connection for cable
barriers for main connections connection
1 set = 2 units
3VF9 5241RA10
Phase barrier
for 3VF4/3VF5

3VF9 6241GB10
Guide frame with 3VF6 plug-in circuit-
breaker

For 8US1 busbar adapter system, see Section 8


"Components for distribution systems".
1) Use plug-in circuit-breakers with connecting leads (see Page 4/171).
2) The guide frame cannot be used in combination with the motorized operat-
ing mechanism for 3VF6 and 3VF7.

4/184 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Accessories/spare parts

Accessories for 3VF5 Accessories for 3VF6 Accessories for 3VF7 Accessories for 3VF8
DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU per PU per PU
approx. approx. approx. approx.

kg kg kg kg
B 3VF9 5241JA20 1 set 0.260 included in scope B 3VF9 7241JA20 1 set 1.820 C 3VF9 8241JA20 1 set 0.200
of supply of circuit- (up to 2000 A)
breaker
B 3VF9 5241LD20 1 set 0.260 B 3VF9 6241LD20 1 set on req. B 3VF9 7241LD20 1 set 0.300 C 3VF9 8241LD20 1 set 0.200

B 3VF9 5241JB20 1 set 0.260 B 3TX7 6901F 1 set 1.930 on request

B 3VF9 6241AD20 1 unit 5.180 B 3VF9 7241AD20 1 unit 20.000


4
(up to 630 A)

B 3VF9 5241FA20 1 unit 0.260 B 3VF9 6241FA20 1 unit 5.180


B 3VF9 5241FE20 1 unit 0.260

B 3VF9 5241FB20 1 unit 0.260 B 3VF9 6241FB20 1 unit 5.180


B 3VF9 5241FF20 1 unit 0.260

B 3VF9 6241GA20 1 unit 18.000 2) B 3VF9 7241GA20 1 unit 20.000 2)


B 3VF9 6241GB20 1 unit 18.000 2) B 3VF9 7241GB20 1 unit 20.000 2)
B 3VF9 5241NB20 1 set 0.270 B 3VF9 6241NB20 1 set 0.391
for cable- for cable or busbar
connection connection

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/185


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Accessories/spare parts
Interlocks, covers
Accessories for 3VF3 Accessories for 3VF4
DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.

3- or 4-pole kg kg
Locking device for toggle B 3VF9 3231VC00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 5231VC00 1 unit 1.080
lever
Toggle lever extension B 3VF9 5231VB00 1 unit 1.080
3VF9 5201AA00 3VF9 5231VC00 for retrofitting by plugging onto
Masking frame for Locking device for the toggle lever
door cut-out toggle lever of the circuit-breaker
for 3VF5 for 3VF4/3VF5 Mutual interlocking } 3VF9 5231VL00 1 unit 0.258 } 3VF9 5231VL00 1 unit 0.258
of two circuit-breakers

4
order 2 door-coupling rotary
operating mechanisms
with this device1)
Masking frame
for door cut-out IP30
for circuit-breaker
without RCD module B 3VF9 3201AA00 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 4201AA00 1 unit 0.120
with RCD module B 3VF9 3201AB00 1 unit 0.220 B 3VF9 4201AB00 1 unit 0.120
Sheet-steel enclosure IP54 C 3VF9 3241DA00 1 unit 3.650 For molded-plastic
3VF9 5231VL00 without operating mechanism enclosure
Mutual interlocking of two (Molded-plastic enclosure see Section 7
circuit-breakers with rotary operating mecha- Section 7 "Switchboards, distri- "Switchboards,
nism, for 3VF3 to 3VF7, complete for fitting bution and cabinet systems" distribution sys-
in doors and covers tems and cabinet
systems"

Accessories:
Front-operated rotary operat-
ing mechanism
with shaft stub, without knob see Page 4/178.
Also required:
Black knob, lockable B 3VF9 3231VN10 1 unit 0.180
Red knob, with yellow plate, B 3VF9 3231VN20 1 unit 0.180
3VF9 3231VG00 3VF9 6231VB00 lockable, for
Module for mutual inter- Toggle lever EMERGENCY-STOP switch
locking of toggle levers extension
for 3VF3 for 3VF6
3-pole only
Module for mutual interlock- B 3VF9 3231VG00 1 unit 0.180 B 3VF9 4231VG00 1 unit 2.120
ing of toggle levers 2)
(this is not a changeover
device)
1) see Page 4/178.
2) Only possible for version with connecting leads.

3VF circuit-breakers with RCD module


The RCD module is factory-mounted on the circuit-breaker (also When ordering, add the suffix "Z" to the full Order No. and add
for the plug-in version). the relevant order code.
For 3 and 4-pole Rated Residual Delay Rated oper- Order No. with "Z" Circuit-breaker Circuit-breaker Extra weight
circuit-breakers current currents time td ational 3VF . . . .. . . . .0A . . Z Order code Order code for
In of the IN adjustable voltage and additional order A01 A02 circuit-
circuit-breaker adjustable Ue code breaker
@@@
3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole
A A S V kg kg
Identification
code for
further versionsZ
3VF31 For system 100 0.03 instanta- 110415 A01 0.48 0.5
3VF32 and motor 160 0.1 neous 110690 A02 0.48 0.5
protection, 0.3 0.06
3VF4 disconnec- 250 0.5 0.1 0.94 1.25
tors or starter 1.0 0.25
combinations 3.0 0.5
3VF5 For system 4001) 10 1.0 1.18 1.21
protection1) 30

1) Not for electronic trip units (11th position of Order No. "6").
version possible.

4/186 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Accessories/spare parts

Accessories for 3VF5 Accessories for 3VF6 Accessories for 3VF7 Accessories for 3VF8
DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU per PU per PU per PU
approx. approx. approx. approx.

kg kg kg kg
B 3VF9 5231VC00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231VC00 1 unit 0.332 B 3VF9 7231VC00 1 unit 3.680

B 3VF9 5231VB00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231VB00 1 unit 0.332 B in scope of supply in scope of supply
of circuit- of circuit-
breaker breaker

} 3VF9 5231VL00 1 unit 0.258 } 3VF9 6231VL00 1 unit 0.332 } 3VF9 6231VL00 1 unit 0.332

4
B 3VF9 5201AA00 1 unit 0.120 B 3VF9 6201AA00 1 unit 0.200 B 3VF9 7201AA00 1 unit 0.120 B 3VF9 8201AA00 1 unit 0.200
B 3VF9 5201AB00 1 unit 0.120
For molded-plas- For molded-plas- For molded-plas-
tic enclosure tic enclosure tic enclosure
see Section 7 see Section 7 see Section 7
"Switchboards, "Switchboards, "Switchboards,
distribution sys- distribution sys- distribution and
tems and cabinet tems and cabinet cabinet systems"
systems" systems"

B 3VF9 5231VG00 1 unit 1.080 B 3VF9 6231VG00 1 unit 0.332

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/187


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Accessories/spare parts
8US1 busbar adapter system

N S E 0 _ 0 0 3 3 9
4

Busbar adapter systems with 40 mm or 60 mm busbar center-to-center distance with components for busbar runs, adapters and For further
switching device holders for individual configuration possibilities, devices with an integrated adapter, as well as accessories and bus- information see
bar copper. Section 8 "Compo-
nents for Distribution
systems".
Version DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
40 mm system
to DIN 43870 Part 2 Busbar adapter, 175 mm long
for Cu busbars with plug connection tags, 3-pole
with sharp (DIN 1759) or for 1 3VF3 circuit-breaker, up to 200 A 108 mm wide A 8US10 114SB00 1 unit 0.500
rounded (DIN 46433) edges,
width 12 mm or 15 mm,
thickness 5 mm or 10 mm
60 mm system
for Cu busbars Busbar adapter, 175 mm long
with sharp (DIN 1759) or rounded with plug connection tags, 3-pole
(DIN 46433) edges, for 1 3VF3 circuit-breaker, up to 200 A 108 mm wide A 8US12 114SB00 1 unit 0.580
width 12 mm or 30 mm,
thickness 5 mm or 10 mm, Busbar adapter, 254 mm long
also for T and double-T special pro- without tags, with pillar terminals
files 70 mm2
for 1 3VF4 circuit-breaker, up to 200 A 108 mm wide A 8US12 104AA04 1 unit 1.140
with
mounting plate
The connecting lead between adapter and switch-
ing device should be manufactured in accordance
with the rated current as a round cable,
e.g. H07V-R, bared at both ends for pillar terminals
Busbar adapter, 320 mm long
with M 4, M 6 and M 8 threaded inserts
8US12 114SB00 for various switching devices up to 630 A, 3-pole
with 3VF3 without connecting leads,
with M 10 terminal screws on top and bottom
Adapter 185 mm wide A 8US12 104AF00 1 unit 2.760
for 3VF5 circuit-breaker
(also possible for 3VF4 circuit-breaker)
for 3KA53, 3KL52, 3KL53, 3NP42
Mounting plate for 8US12 104AF00 A 8US19 274AF00 1 unit 0.501
The connecting lead between adapter and switch-
ing device should be manufactured in accordance
with the rated current as a round cable,
e.g. H07V-R, with a cable lug or as a flat conductor
for bolt-type connection M 10 (adapter).

8US12 104AF00

4/188 Siemens LV 30 2004 * This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered.


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Accessories/spare parts
8UC6 door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms
For Rated current Cross-sec- Torque Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism, complete
type tion of actu- Lockable with padlocks,
ating shaft with door interlocking
C o n tr o l c a b in e t d o o r Supplied with gasket and fixing screws
A mm Nm
EMERGENCY-STOP version
Handle black, Handle red,
light-gray indicator plate with yellow indicator plate with black
N S E 0 _ 0 0 0 2 2 a
black inscription inscription
DT Order No. PS* Weight per DT Order No. PS* Weight per
PU approx. PU approx.
Rotary operating
mechanism, complete Illustrated:
see Pages 4/178 and handle, masking frame kg kg

4
4/179 1 1
3VF2 16 ... 100 88 2 B 8UC61 121BD22 1 unit 0.417 ) B 8UC61 223BD22 1 unit 0.402 )
75
NSE0_00362

Tripped

Reset

36
1 1
8UC61 3VF3 16 ... 225 88 2 B 8UC62 121BD22 1 unit 0.440 ) B 8UC62 223BD22 1 unit 0.445 )
3VF4 125 ... 250 88 6
3VF5 200 ... 400 88 6
75
NSE0_00363

Tripped

Reset

62
1 1
3VF6 315 ... 800 12 12 16 B 8UC63 141BD44 1 unit 1.150 ) B 8UC63 243BD44 1 unit 1.170 )
100
8UC62
NSE0_00364

Tripped

Reset

140
3VF7 800 ... 1250 12 12 25 B 1) 1)
8UC65 141BB44 1 unit 1.260 B 8UC65 243BB44 1 unit 1.220
3VF8 1600 ... 2500 12 12 50
100

8UC65
NSE0_00361

280
Components
For type For operat- Cross-section of DT Order No. PS* Weight per
ing mecha- actuating shaft PU approx.
nism mm mm
kg
Extension shafts, 300 mm long
3VF2-3VF5 8UC62 88 B 8UC60 32 1 unit 0.132
NSE0_00373 Groove 3VF6-3VF8 8UC63, 8UC65 12 12 B 8UC60 34 1 unit 0.315
8UC60 3.
8UC60 8. Extension shafts, 600 mm long
3VF2-3VF5 8UC62 88 B 8UC60 82 1 unit 0.265
3VF6-3VF8 8UC63, 8UC65 12 12 B 8UC60 84 1 unit 0.640

Shaft couplings
NSE0_00374
2) 3VF2-3VF5 8UC62 88 B 8UC60 22 1 unit 0.023
Web Rivet2)
3VF6-3VF8 8UC63, 8UC65 12 12 B 8UC60 24 1 unit 0.077
8UC60 2.

1) 3VF circuit-breakers require in addition a front-operated rotary operating


mechanism with shaft stub for direct mounting on the circuit-breaker, see
Pages 4/178 and 4/179.
2) Non-interchangeability features.

* This quantity or a multiple thereof can be ordered. Siemens LV 30 2004 4/189


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Project planning aids

Characteristics
The indicated tripping values for the thermal overload releases 2 t- V a lu e
("L" trip units) are mean values taken from the spread of all set- x 1 0 5
ting ranges from the cold state under even load conditions on 1 0 0 N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 4 7
the conducting paths. 8 0
6 0
The tripping characteristics of the instantaneous (electromag-
netic) short-circuit releases ("I" trip units) are based on the phase 4 0
rated current In, which also represents the upper value of the
setting range on circuit-breakers with adjustable thermal over- 2 0
load release. With a lower operational current there is a corre-
spondingly higher multiple for the tripping current of the "I" trip
units. 1 0
8
"L" thermal overload release 3 8 0 /4 1 5 V

4
6
"I" instantaneous (electromagnetic) short-circuit release
4

B r e a k - tim e 2
1 2 0 5 0 0 0
A N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 4 5
6 0
2 0 0 0 1
2 0 1 0 0 0
1 0 5 7 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 k A 1 0 0
5 0 0 S h o r t- c ir c u it c u r r e n t S rm s
4 2 0 0
2 1 0 0 Maximum I2t values for 3VF2, AC 50/60 Hz 380/415 V
1 5 0
2 0
1 0 100 NSE00025
5 s
2 1 6 A 50
Opening time

1
0 ,5 6 3 A 20
1 0 0 A
0 ,2
10
0 ,1
0 ,0 5 5
0 ,0 2
0 ,0 1 td
2
0 ,0 0 5 1.0s
0 ,0 0 2 1
0 ,0 0 1 0.5s
1 2 4 6 1 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 4 0 0 1 0 0 0 x n 0.5
0.25s
C u rre n t
0.2
Tripping characteristic for 3VF2 circuit-breaker 0.1s
0.1 0.06s

0.05
C u t-o ff c u rre n t D
2 0 0 0.02
k A 0 ,2 No
delay
0.01
1 0 0
8 0 0.005
p .f. = 0 ,2 5 0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 10 x
6 0 n
Current
4 0
0 ,3 Tripping characteristic of the RCD module
2 0

3 V F 2
1 0
8
6

A N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 4 6
2
5 7 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 k A 1 0 0
S h o r t- c ir c u it c u r r e n t S rm s

Current limiting characteristics for 3VF2, AC 50/60 Hz 380/415 V

4/190 Siemens LV 30 2004


Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Project planning aids

Dimension drawings
3VF2 circuit-breakers, 3 and 4-pole
2 5 ,4 7 6 2 3 Arcing spaces
Z 4 x 4 .5
1 Minimum clearances from adjacent grounded parts and from non-insulated
live parts at rated voltage.
The clearance of at least 2 cm between large covers and the arc chute
openings should be observed for the 3VF2.

(1 2 4 )
5 6 .5
1 2 4

Plain conductors and busbars must be insulated within the arcing space.

8 9
8 9
1 0 2

N S E 0 _ 0 1 2 3 7

2 3
1 7

1 7
5 73 a
3 7 2 5 2 5 x
2 5 ,4 2 5 ,4 6 3 .5 Z 3 P -5 0

50
NSE0_00064
7 3 4 P -7 5
Z 7 8

4
2 5 ,4 1 0 2
1
Type A B C Type a
3VF22 17 23 124 3VF2, 3-pole 78
1 2 4

3VF2, 4-pole 101


8 9
1 0 2

$ Shunt release or
auxiliary or alarm
switch (see Accessories)
1 7

2 5 ,4 2 5 ,4 2 5 ,4
3VF2

Accessories for 3VF2 circuit-breakers, 3 and 4-pole


102 73 80
76 129 63
72 56 58
12

45

45

58
63
80
95
NSE0_00066
124
80
72

NSE0_00065

12

NSE0_00067
95
9 5 5
38 73 35

3VF9 2231.A00 front rotary operating mechanism with knob 3VF9 2241NB.0 3VF9 2201CA10 3VF9 2201AA00
for 3VF2 terminal cover cover with cap dimen- masking frame
for 3VF2 sions of 45 mm for door cut-out
for 3VF2 for 3VF2

102
76
72
22 42-50
1,5-4 75
4,5
64

28
124
80
72

37

65
NSE0_00068

1)
38 35 31 300 57 22
139

Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism, complete 8UC61 .2.BD22 (rotary operating mechanism) and 3VF9 223-1JA00 (front rotary operating
mechanism with shaft stub) for 3VF2
5

Center line
NSE0_00069

$ 3-pole circuit-breaker
% 4-pole circuit-breaker
73

A A
1
139
134

2
31
40

39

B B
6

3
5

8
9 25 25 25
84
3VF9 2241LD.0 rear terminal for 3VF2 View A View B
1) As-supplied, shorten shaft to suit if necessary. Note:
With lengths >130 mm a support is necessary. 4-pole circuit-breakers always have the 4th pole (N) on the left!
4-pole version
Siemens LV 30 2004 4/191
Circuit-Breakers up to 2500 A

Project planning aids

Circuit diagrams
The graphical symbols used in the circuit diagrams provide in-
formation about the type, circuit and method of operation of the
equipment in accordance with DIN 40713, but contain no infor-
mation about the design.
As it is not possible to show all of the potential combinations
here, it may be necessary to alter the circuit diagrams accord-
ingly for different versions.
The purpose of these circuit diagrams is merely to help improve
the understanding of way in which the devices function.

4 C1

C2

N L1 L2 L3
1 3 5

3 1 1 3 > > > >


(4) (6) 2 4 6
N T1 T2 T3
NSE0_01248

(5)
2 2

Connection diagram for 3 and 4-pole 3VF2 circuit-breakers

4/192 Siemens LV 30 2004

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen